US20040170618A1 - Specifically targeted catalytic antagonists and uses thereof - Google Patents
Specifically targeted catalytic antagonists and uses thereof Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20040170618A1 US20040170618A1 US10/791,628 US79162804A US2004170618A1 US 20040170618 A1 US20040170618 A1 US 20040170618A1 US 79162804 A US79162804 A US 79162804A US 2004170618 A1 US2004170618 A1 US 2004170618A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- enzyme
- residue
- cysteine
- targeting moiety
- antagonist
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
- 0 C1CC*CC1 Chemical compound C1CC*CC1 0.000 description 1
- JVLRRGHRARXRRV-UHFFFAOYSA-N CCC(C)(CC)CC.CCSS(C)(=O)=O Chemical compound CCC(C)(CC)CC.CCSS(C)(=O)=O JVLRRGHRARXRRV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B82—NANOTECHNOLOGY
- B82Y—SPECIFIC USES OR APPLICATIONS OF NANOSTRUCTURES; MEASUREMENT OR ANALYSIS OF NANOSTRUCTURES; MANUFACTURE OR TREATMENT OF NANOSTRUCTURES
- B82Y5/00—Nanobiotechnology or nanomedicine, e.g. protein engineering or drug delivery
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
- A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
- A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
- A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
- A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
- A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
- A61K47/62—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being a protein, peptide or polyamino acid
- A61K47/66—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being a protein, peptide or polyamino acid the modifying agent being a pre-targeting system involving a peptide or protein for targeting specific cells
- A61K47/665—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being a protein, peptide or polyamino acid the modifying agent being a pre-targeting system involving a peptide or protein for targeting specific cells the pre-targeting system, clearing therapy or rescue therapy involving biotin-(strept) avidin systems
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
- A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
- A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
- A61K47/68—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. an Fc-fragment
- A61K47/6891—Pre-targeting systems involving an antibody for targeting specific cells
- A61K47/6897—Pre-targeting systems with two or three steps using antibody conjugates; Ligand-antiligand therapies
- A61K47/6898—Pre-targeting systems with two or three steps using antibody conjugates; Ligand-antiligand therapies using avidin- or biotin-conjugated antibodies
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
- A61P11/02—Nasal agents, e.g. decongestants
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
- A61P11/08—Bronchodilators
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P21/00—Drugs for disorders of the muscular or neuromuscular system
- A61P21/02—Muscle relaxants, e.g. for tetanus or cramps
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
- A61P25/04—Centrally acting analgesics, e.g. opioids
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
- A61P25/08—Antiepileptics; Anticonvulsants
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
- A61P25/14—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating abnormal movements, e.g. chorea, dyskinesia
- A61P25/16—Anti-Parkinson drugs
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
- A61P25/18—Antipsychotics, i.e. neuroleptics; Drugs for mania or schizophrenia
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
- A61P25/24—Antidepressants
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P29/00—Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
- A61P3/06—Antihyperlipidemics
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
- A61P3/08—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis
- A61P3/10—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis for hyperglycaemia, e.g. antidiabetics
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
- A61P31/04—Antibacterial agents
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
- A61P31/12—Antivirals
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P5/00—Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system
- A61P5/24—Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system of the sex hormones
- A61P5/26—Androgens
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P5/00—Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system
- A61P5/24—Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system of the sex hormones
- A61P5/28—Antiandrogens
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P5/00—Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system
- A61P5/24—Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system of the sex hormones
- A61P5/30—Oestrogens
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P7/00—Drugs for disorders of the blood or the extracellular fluid
- A61P7/02—Antithrombotic agents; Anticoagulants; Platelet aggregation inhibitors
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
- A61P9/06—Antiarrhythmics
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
- A61P9/10—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system for treating ischaemic or atherosclerotic diseases, e.g. antianginal drugs, coronary vasodilators, drugs for myocardial infarction, retinopathy, cerebrovascula insufficiency, renal arteriosclerosis
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
- A61P9/12—Antihypertensives
Definitions
- This invention relates to the field of chimeric molecules.
- this invention provides novel chimeric molecules that act as catalytic antagonists of targets (e.g. receptors, enzymes, lectins, etc.).
- targets e.g. receptors, enzymes, lectins, etc.
- a chimeric molecule two or more molecules that exist separately in their native state are joined together to form a single molecule having the desired functionality of all of its constituent molecules.
- one of the constituent molecules of a chimeric molecule is a “targeting molecule”.
- the targeting molecule is a molecule such as an antibody that specifically binds to its corresponding target and, by virtue of the targeting molecule, the chimeric molecule will specifically bind (target) cells and tissues bearing the target (e.g. the epitope) to which the targeting moiety is directed.
- effector molecule refers to a molecule that is to be specifically transported to the target to which the chimeric molecule is specifically directed.
- Chimeric molecules comprising a targeting moiety attached to an effector moiety have been used in a wide variety of contexts.
- chimeric molecules comprising a targeting moiety joined to a cytotoxic “effector molecule” have frequently been used to target and kill tumor cells (see, e.g., Pastan et al., Ann. Rev. Biochem ., 61: 331-354 (1992).
- Other chimeric molecules comprising a targeting moiety attached to angiogenesis inhibitors have been used to inhibit tumor growth and/or proliferation.
- angiogenesis inducers have been proposed for the treatment of atherosclerosis.
- Other uses of chimeric molecules have involved the delivery of intrabodies, intracellularly expressed antibodies that then bind to an intracellular protein, the specific delivery of vectors (e.g. for gene therapy), or the creation of tissue-specific liposomes.
- the target recognized by the targeting moiety is not the desired site of action of the effector molecule.
- the targeting moiety specifically binds to a target on the surface of the cell.
- the chimeric molecule is then internalized into the cell and the effector molecule (e.g., ricin, abrin, Diptheria toxin, Pseudomonas exotoxin) is transported to the cytosol of the cell where it exerts its characteristic activity (e.g. ADP ribosylation in the case of Pseudomonas exotoxin).
- the effector molecule e.g., ricin, abrin, Diptheria toxin, Pseudomonas exotoxin
- targeted liposomes are typically internalized through a receptor-mediated process or through the action of the lipid.
- Targeted intrabodies and gene therapy vectors are also internalized for expression within the cell.
- a common goal in the design of targeted chimeric molecules has been the increase of binding specificity and avidity. It is generally believed that, by increasing avidity and specificity the concentration of the chimeric molecule to achieve a given result will decrease. Thus, release of the chimeric molecule from its target is generally viewed as undesirable.
- chimeric molecules Because the chimeric molecule is typically internalized (in the case of targeted cells) and the activity of the effector molecule is directed to a molecule other than the specifically recognized target, chimeric molecules typically act in a “stoichiometric” manner. That is, each chimeric molecule is essentially consumed upon interaction with its “substrate” and activity of the chimeric molecule is unavailable for subsequent reactions. As a consequence chimeric molecules must be maintained at relatively high level for efficacy and a recurring problem of chimeric moieties, particularly in in vivo applications is the inability to maintain elevated serum levels of the chimeric molecule over therapeutically significant periods of time and the increased (e.g. non-specific) toxicity caused by the high dosages that must be utilized.
- This invention provides a novel approach to the design of chimeric molecules.
- the molecules of this invention specifically bind to a target molecule and degrade that bound molecule. In preferred embodiments, this results in a loss of activity (e.g. biological activity) of the target molecule and also results in the release of the chimeric molecule so that it is free to find and degrade another target. In this manner the chimeric molecule is “regenerated” and essentially catalytic. Because a single chimeric molecule can attack and degrade an essentially limitless number of targets, the so called “catalytic antagonists” of this invention are highly effective at relatively low dosages.
- this invention provides a catalytic antagonist of a target molecule (e.g. an enzyme, a receptor, etc.).
- the antagonist comprises a targeting moiety that specifically binds to the target molecule and the targeting moiety is attached to an enzyme that degrades the target molecule to reduce binding of the target molecule to its cognate ligand.
- the degradation of the target molecule also reduces binding of the antagonist to the target molecule.
- the antagonist is released from the target thereby allowing the antagonist to bind and degrade another target molecule.
- the targeting moiety is joined to the enzyme through the sulfur group on a cysteine and the cysteine is a naturally occurring cysteine in the enzyme or a cysteine introduced into the enzyme (e.g. substituted for a native amino acid other than cysteine in the enzyme).
- the cysteine is a cysteine that is substituted for a native amino acid other than cysteine in or near a subsite comprising a substrate binding site of the enzyme.
- the cysteine is a cysteine that is substituted for an amino acid forming a substrate binding site.
- Preferred enzymes include, but are not limited to a protease, an esterase, an amidase, a peptidase, a lactamase, a cellulase, an oxidase, an oxidoreductase, a reductase, a transferase, a hydrolase, an isomerase, a ligase, a lipase, a phospholipase, a phosphatase, a kinase, a sulfatase, a lysozyme, a glycosidase, a nuclease, an aldolase, a ketolase, a lyase, a cyclase, a reverse transcriptase, a hyaluronidase, an amylase, a cerebrosidase, and a chitinase.
- a protease an esterase, an amidas
- the enzyme is a serine hydrolase.
- the enzyme is a subtilisin-type serine hydrolase (e.g. a Bacillus lentus subtilisin) and said cysteine is substituted for an amino acid in or near a subsite selected from the group consisting of an S1 subsite, an S1′ subsite, and an S2 subsite.
- the enzyme is a Bacillus lentus subtilisin.
- the cysteine is substituted for an amino acid in a subtillisin, where the amino acid corresponds to a reference residue in a Bacillus lentus subtilisin, where the reference residue is at or near a residue selected from the group consisting of residue 156, residue 166, residue 217, residue 222, residue 62, residue 96, residue 104, residue 107, residue 189, and residue 209.
- the enzyme is a chymotrypsin-type serine protease and the cysteine is substituted for the amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in a mature trypsin (Protein Data Bank entry 1TPP), wherein said reference residue is at or near a residue selected from the group consisting of Tyr94, Leu99, Gln175, Asp189, Ser190, Gln192, Phe41, Lys60, Tyr151, Ser214, and Lys224.
- a reference residue selected from the group consisting of Tyr94, Leu99, Gln175, Asp189, Ser190, Gln192, Phe41, Lys60, Tyr151, Ser214, and Lys224.
- the enzyme is an alpha/beta type serine hydrolase and the cysteine is substituted for the amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in a Candida antartica lipase (Protein Data Bank entry 1TCA), where the reference residue is at or near a residue selected from the group consisting of Trp104, Leu140, Leu144, Val154, Glu188, Ala 225, Leu278 and Ile285.
- the enzyme is an aspartyl protease. More preferably the enzyme is a pepsin-type protease and the cysteine is substituted for the amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in the mature human pepsin (Protein Data Bank entry 1PSN), where the reference residue is at or near a residue selected from the group consisting of Tyr9, Met12, Glu13, Gly76, Thr77, Phe111, Phe117, Ile128, Ser130, Tyr189Ile213, Glu239, Met245, Gln287, Met289, Leu291, and Glu294.
- the enzyme is a cysteine protease. More preferably the enzyme is a papain and the cysteine is substituted for the amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in a mature papain (Protein Data Bank entry 1BQI), where the reference residue is at or near a residue selected from the group consisting of Asn18, Ser21, Asn64, Tyr67, Trp69, Gln112, Gln142, Asp158, Trp177, and Phe207.
- a cysteine protease More preferably the enzyme is a papain and the cysteine is substituted for the amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in a mature papain (Protein Data Bank entry 1BQI), where the reference residue is at or near a residue selected from the group consisting of Asn18, Ser21, Asn64, Tyr67, Trp69, Gln112, Gln142, Asp158, Trp177, and Phe207.
- the enzyme is a metalloprotease and the cysteine is substituted for the amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in the mature human matrix metalloprotease (Protein Data Bank entry 830C), where the reference residue is at or near a residue selected from the group consisting of Leu111, Phe175, Tyr176, Ser182, Leu184, Phe189, Tyr214, Asp231, Lys234, and Ile243.
- the catalytic antagonist targeting moiety is directed against a target where the target is a molecule present on the surface of a cell (e.g., a. molecule forming a receptor, a ligand, a component of a cell wall, a component of a cell membrane, etc.).
- the targeting moiety includes, but is not limited to an antigen, a carbohydrate, a nucleic acid, a lipid, a coordination complex, a sugar, a vitamin, a dendrimer, and a crown ether.
- the targeting moiety is a cognate ligand for a receptor or an enzyme.
- the targeting moiety is an inhibitor for a receptor or an enzyme.
- the enzyme is a protease (e.g. a papain, a subtilisin, a pepsin, a trypsin, a metalloprotease, etc.) and the targeting moiety is a ligand selected from the group consisting of a carbohydrate, a vitamin or vitamin analog, an enzyme inhibitor, a peptide, a pharmaceutical that is a small organic molecule, and biotin.
- the enzyme is a protease and said targeting moiety is a receptor.
- the enzyme is a protease (e.g. a papain, a subtilisin, a pepsin, a trypsin, a metalloprotease, etc.) and the targeting moiety is an enzyme inhibitor that is a pyrazole, a biotin, a ligand that binds a lectin (e.g. concanavalin A), a carbohydrate (e.g. thioethyl D-mannopyranoside).
- the targeting moiety specifically binds to a soil and the enzyme degrades a component of the soil.
- this invention provides a method of degrading a target molecule.
- the method involves contacting the target molecule with a catalytic antagonist comprising a targeting moiety that specifically binds to the target molecule the targeting moiety being attached to an enzyme that degrades the target molecule.
- the degradation of the target molecule releases the antagonist thereby allowing the antagonist to bind and degrade another target molecule.
- the targeting moiety is joined to the enzyme through the sulfur group on a cysteine.
- Preferred antagonist molecules include, but are not limited to the catalytic antagonist molecules described above.
- this invention provides an enzyme having altered substrate specificity (i.e. a “redirected enzyme).
- the enzyme preferably comprises a targeting moiety attached to a subsite comprising the substrate binding site of said enzyme.
- the targeting moiety is coupled to said enzyme through to a sulfur of a cysteine in said subsite of said enzyme.
- the cysteine may be a native cysteine or a cysteine is substituted for a native amino acid that is not cysteine in the subsite of the enzyme.
- Preferred enzymes include, but are not limited to a protease, an esterase, an amidase, a peptidase, a lactamase, a cellulase, an oxidase, an oxidoreductase, a reductase, a transferase, a hydrolase, an isomerase, a ligase, a lipase, a phospholipase, a phosphatase, a kinase, a sulfatase, a lysozyme, a glycosidase, a glycosyltransferase, a nuclease, an aldolase, a ketolase, a lyase, a cyclase, a reverse transcriptase, a hyaluronidase, an amylase, a cerebrosidase and a chitinase.
- the enzyme is a serine hydrolase (e.g., a subtilisin).
- the cysteine is preferably subsitited for amino acids at or near a subsite selected from the group consisting of an S1 subsite, an S1′ subsite, and an S2 subsite.
- Particularly preferred sites for substitution of the cysteine in various enzymes include, but are not limited to those identified above.
- particularly preferred targets and targeting moieties include those identified above.
- the targeting moiety is an inhibitor for a receptor or an enzyme, in other embodiments the targeting moiety is selected from the group consisting of a growth factor, a cytokine, and a receptor ligand.
- the enzyme is a protease and the targeting moiety is a ligand selected from the group consisting of a carbohydrate, a vitamin or vitamin analog, an enzyme inhibitor, a peptide, a pharmaceutical that is a small organic molecule, and biotin.
- the enzyme is a protease (e.g. a subtilisin, a papain, a pepsin, etc.) and the targeting moiety is a receptor, enzyme inhibitor that is a pyrazole, a biotin, a ligand that binds a lectin (e.g. concanavalin A), or a carbohydrate (e.g. thioethyl D-mannopyranoside).
- the targeting moiety specifically binds to a soil and said enzyme degrades a component of the soil.
- this invention provides methods of directing the activity of an enzyme to a specific target.
- the methods comprise providing an enzyme having altered substrate specificity said enzyme comprising a targeting moiety attached to a subsite within the substrate binding region of said enzyme; and contacting the target with the enzyme, whereby the enzyme specifically binds to the target thereby localizing the activity of the enzyme at the target.
- Preferred enzymes include, but are not limited to, the “redirected” enzymes described above.
- This invention also provides methods of enhancing the activity of a drug that acts as an inhibitor of a receptor or an enzyme.
- the methods involve coupling a hydrolase to said drug such that when said drug binds said receptor or enzyme, the hydrolase degrades the receptor or enzyme.
- the method increases the dosage therapeutic window of said drug.
- the hydrolase is a serine hydrolase (e.g. a subtilisin).
- the hydrolase is a metalloprotease, a cysteine protease, an aspartyl protease, and the like.
- This invention also provides a method of inhibiting an enzyme or a receptor.
- the method comprises contacting the enzyme or receptor with a chimeric molecule comprising a ligand that binds the enzyme or receptor attached to an enzyme that degrades the cognate ligand of the enzyme or receptor.
- the enzyme thus becomes linked to the enzyme or receptor where it is free to degrade the cognate ligand thereby preventing the cognate ligand from activating the receptor or acting as a substrate for the enzyme.
- the chimeric molecule comprises a hydrolase (e.g. a protease) attached to an inhibitor of the enzyme or receptor.
- Preferred hydrolases include, but are not limited to a serine protease, a cysteine protease, an aspartyl protease, a pepsin-type protease, and a metalloprotease.
- this invention does not include catalytic antibodies, e.g. as described by Hifumi et al. (1999) J. Bioscience and Bioengineering , 88: 323.
- catalytic antagonist refers to an enzyme that can inhibit the activity of a molecule that has a particular biological activity and/or simply degrade a molecule that has no particular biological activity.
- the inhibition can be a blocking or destroying of the function of the “target” molecule.
- the inhibition or blockage is by partial or complete degradation of the target molecule.
- the “catalytic antagonist” is catalytic by virtue of the fact that the antagonist is not itself consumed or significantly altered (i.e., permanently changed) by its interaction with the target molecule.
- the degradation of the target molecule ultimately results in the release of the catalytic antagonist so that it is free to attack another target molecule.
- the reaction is preferably sub-stoichiometric (ratio of catalytic antagonist to target is less than 1) and a single catalytic antagonist is free to degrade any number of target molecules.
- a “target molecule” refers to a molecule that is specifically bound by the catalytic antagonist or specifically directed enzymes described herein. Where a catalytic antagonist is employed the target molecule is partially or completely degraded by that antagonist.
- a “targeting moiety” refers to a moiety in the chimeric molecule that that specifically binds to the target molecule. Prior to coupling the targeting moiety to the enzyme, the targeting moiety is a targeting molecule. In preferred embodiments, the targeting moiety is one of a pair of cognate binding partners.
- a heterogeneous population of molecules e.g., proteins and other biologics.
- the binding may be by one or more of a variety of mechanisms including, but not limited to ionic interactions, covalent interactions, hydrophobic interactions, van der Waals interactions, etc.
- binding partner or a member of a “binding pair”, or “cognate ligand” refers to molecules that specifically bind other molecules to form a binding complex such as antibody/antigen, lectin/carbohydrate, nucleic acid/nucleic acid, receptor/receptor ligand (e.g. IL-4 receptor and IL-4), avidin/biotin, etc.
- ligand is used to refer to a molecule that specifically binds to another molecule.
- a ligand is a soluble molecule, e.g. a hormone or cytokine, that binds to a receptor.
- the decision as to which member of a binding pair is the ligand and which the “receptor” is often a little arbitrary when the broader sense of receptor is used (e.g., where there is no implication of transduction of signal). In these cases, typically the smaller of the two members of the binding pair is called the ligand.
- the sugar would be the ligand (even if it is attached to a much larger molecule, recognition is of the saccharide).
- polypeptide oligopeptide
- peptide protein
- the terms apply to amino acid polymers in which one or more amino acid residue is an artificial chemical analogue of a corresponding naturally occurring amino acid, as well as to naturally occurring amino acid polymers.
- the term also includes variants on the traditional peptide linkage joining the amino acids making up the polypeptide.
- Proteins also include glycoproteins (e.g. histidine-rich glycoprotein (HRG), Lewis Y antigen (Le Y ), and the like.).
- HRG histidine-rich glycoprotein
- Le Y Lewis Y antigen
- nucleic acid or “oligonucleotide” or grammatical equivalents herein refer to at least two nucleotides covalently linked together.
- a nucleic acid of the present invention is preferably single-stranded or double stranded and will generally contain phosphodiester bonds, although in some cases, as outlined below, nucleic acid analogs are included that may have alternate backbones, comprising, for example, phosphoramide (Beaucage et al. (1993) Tetrahedron 49(10):1925) and references therein; Letsinger (1970) J. Org. Chem . 35:3800; Sblul et al. (1977) Eur. J. Biochem .
- residue refers to natural, synthetic, or modified amino acids.
- enzyme includes proteins that are capable of catalyzing chemical changes in other substances without being permanently changed themselves.
- the enzymes can be wild-type enzymes or variant enzymes.
- Enzymes within the scope of the present invention include, but are not limited to, proteases, esterases, amidases, peptidases, lactamases, cellulases, oxidases, oxidoreductases, reductases, transferases, hydrolases, isomerases, ligases, lipases, phospholipases, phosphatases, kinases, sulfatases, lysozymes, glycosidases, glycosyltransferases, nucleases, aldolases, ketolases, lyases, cyclases, reverse transcriptases, hyaluronidases, amylases, cerebrosidases, chitinases, and the like.
- a “mutant enzyme” is an enzyme that has been changed by replacing an amino acid residue with a cysteine (or other) residue.
- a “chemically modified” enzyme is an enzyme that has been derivatized to bear a substituent not normally found at that location in the enzyme.
- the derivatization typically is of a post translational modification, occasionally performed in vivo, but more typically performed ex vivo.
- a “chemically modified mutant enzyme” or “CMM” is an enzyme in which an amino acid residue has been replaced with another amino acid residue (preferably a cysteine) and the replacement residue is chemically derivatized to bear a substituent not normally found on that residue.
- thiol side chain group “thiol containing group”, and “thiol side chain” are terms that can be used interchangeably and include groups that are used to replace the thiol hydrogen of a cysteine.
- the thiol side chain group includes a sulfur atom through which the thiol side chain group that is attached to the thiol sulfur of the cysteine.
- the “substituent” typically refers to the group remains attached to the cysteine through a disulfide linkage formed by reacting the cysteine with a methanesulfonate reagent as described herein. While the term substituent preferably refers just to the group that remains attached (excluding its thiol group), the substituent can also refer to the entire thiol side chain group. The difference will be clear from the context.
- the “binding site of an enzyme” consists of a series of subsites across the substrate binding surface of the enzyme (Berger & Schechter (1970) Phil. Trans. Roy Soc. Lond. B 257: 249-264).
- the substrate residues that correspond to the subsites are labeled P and the subsites are labeled S.
- the subsites are labeled S 1 , S 2 , S 3 , S 4 , S 1 ′, and S 2 ′.
- S 1 , S 2 , S 3 , S 4 , S 1 ′, and S 2 ′ A discussion of subsites can be found in Siezen et al. (1991) Protein Engineering , 4: 719-737, and Fersht (1985) Enzyme Structure and Mechanism , 2nd ed. Freeman, New York, 29-30.
- the preferred subsites include S 1 , S 1 ′, and S 2 .
- amino acid ## or “amino acid ## in the XX subsite” is intended to include the amino acid at the referenced position (e.g. amino acid 156 of B. lentus subtilisin which is in the S 1 subsite) and the amino acids at the corresponding (homologous) position in related enzymes.
- a residue (amino acid) of an enzyme is equivalent to a residue of a referenced enzyme (e.g. B. amyloliquefaciens subtilisin) if it is either homologous (i.e., corresponding in position in either primary or tertiary structure) or analogous to a specific residue or portion of that residue in B. amyloliquefaciens subtilisin (i.e., having the same or similar finctional capacity to combine, react, or interact chemically).
- a referenced enzyme e.g. B. amyloliquefaciens subtilisin
- the amino acid sequence of the subject enzyme e.g. a serine hydrolase, cysteine protease, aspartyl protease, metalloprotease, etc.
- a reference enzyme e.g. B. amyloliquefaciens subtilisin in the case of a subtilisin type serine protease
- a set of residues known to be invariant in all enzymes of that family e.g. subtilisins
- the residues equivalent to particular amino acids in the primary sequence of the reference enzyme e.g. B. amyloliquefaciens subtilisin
- Alignment of conserved residues preferably should conserve 100% of such residues. However, alignment of greater than 75% or as little as 50% of conserved residues is also adequate to define equivalent residues.
- Conservation of the catalytic triad, e.g., Asp32/His64/Ser221) should be maintained for serine hydrolases.
- the conserved residues may be used to define the corresponding equivalent amino acid residues in other related enzymes.
- the two (reference and “target”) sequences are aligned in order to produce the maximum homology of conserved residues.
- a number of deletions are seen in the thermitase sequence as compared to B. amyloliquefaciens subtilisin (see, e.g. U.S. Pat. No. 5,972,682).
- the equivalent amino acid of Tyr217 in B. amyloliquefaciens subtilisin in thermitase is the particular lysine shown beneath Tyr217 in FIG. 5B-2 of the U.S. Pat. No. 5,972,682.
- the particular “equivalent” resides may be substituted by a different amino acid to produce a mutant carbonyl hydrolase since they are equivalent in primary structure.
- Equivalent residues homologous at the level of tertiary structure for a particular enzyme whose tertiary structure has been determined by x-ray crystallography are defined as those for which the atomic coordinates of 2 or more of the main chain atoms of a particular amino acid residue of the reference sequence (e.g. B. amyloliquefaciens subtilisin) and the sequence in question (target sequence) (N on N, CA on CA, C on C, and O on O) are within 0.13 nm and preferably 0.1 nm after alignment. Alignment is achieved after the best model has been oriented and positioned to give the maximum overlap of atomic coordinates of non-hydrogen protein atoms of the enzyme in question to the reference sequence.
- the reference sequence e.g. B. amyloliquefaciens subtilisin
- target sequence target sequence
- Alignment is achieved after the best model has been oriented and positioned to give the maximum overlap of atomic coordinates of non-hydrogen protein atoms of the enzyme
- R ⁇ h ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ Fo ⁇ ( h ) ⁇ - ⁇ Fc ⁇ ( h ) ⁇ ⁇ h ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ Fo ⁇ ( h ) ⁇
- Equivalent residues which are functionally analogous to a specific residue of a reference sequence are defined as those amino acids sequence in question (e.g. related subtilisin) which may adopt a conformation such that they will alter, modify or contribute to protein structure, substrate binding or catalysis in a manner defined and attributed to a specific residue of the reference sequence as described herein.
- residues of the sequence in question for which a tertiary structure has been obtained by x-ray crystallography
- the atomic coordinates of at least two of the side chain atoms of the residue lie with 0.13 nm of the corresponding side chain atoms of the reference sequence residue(s).
- the three dimensional structures would be aligned as outlined above. For an illustration of this procedure see U.S. Pat. No. 5,972,682.
- a “reference residue” refers to a residue that is specified in a particular enzyme and which serves as a “reference point” for identifying, e.g., as described above, equivalent residues in other members of the family of which the reference enzyme is a member.
- the phrase “the amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in the mature human protein X” refers to residues equivalent (or homologous) to the reference residue of protein X in other members of the same protein family.
- the phrase refers to the reference residue itself.
- a “serine hydrolase” is a hydrolytic enzyme utilizing an active serine side chain to serve as a nucleophile in a hydrolytic reaction. This term includes native and synthetic serine hydrolases as well as enzymes engineered to perform the reverse reaction, e.g., for synthetic purposes.
- the family of serine peptidases is characterized by Bartlett and Rawlings (1994) Meth. Enzymol ., 244: 19-61, Academic Press, S.D.
- alpha/beta serine hydrolases are a family of serine hydrolyases based on structural homology to enzymes including wheat germ serine carboxypeptidase's II (see, e.g., Liam et al. (1992) Biochemistry 31: 9796-9812; Ollis et al. (1992) Protein Engineering , 5: 197-211).
- aspartic proteases are proteases that are directly dependent on aspartic acid residues for catalytic activity.
- the family of aspartyl proteases is characterized in a number of publications known to those of skill in the art (see, e.g.,. Rawlings and Barrett, (1995) Meth. Enzymology , 248: 105-120, Academic Press, S.D.).
- cyste proteases is used herein consistently with conventional usage of those of skill in the art.
- the family of cysteine proteases is characterized in a number of publications known to those of skill in the art (see, e.g., Rawlings and Barrett, (1994) Meth. Enzymology , 224: 461-486, Academic Press, S.D.).
- metalloproteases is used herein consistently with the conventional usage of those of skill in the art.
- the family of metalloproteases is characterized in a number of publications known to those of skill in the art (see, e.g., Rawlings and Barrett, (1995) Meth. Enzymology , 248: 183-228, Academic Press, S.D.)
- subtilisin type serine proteases refer to a family of serine hydrolyases based on structural homology to enzymes derived from Bacillus subtilus , including subtilisin BPN′ (Bott et al. (1988) J. Biol. Chem . 263: 7895-7906; Siezen and Louise (1997) Protein Science 6: 501-523; Bartlett and Rawlings (1994) Meth. Enzymol ., 244: 19-61, Academic Press, S.D.).
- Subtilisins are bacterial or fungal proteases which generally act to cleave peptide bonds of proteins or peptides.
- subtilisin means a naturally-occurring subtilisin or a recombinant subtilisin.
- a series of naturally-occurring subtilisins is known to be produced and often secreted by various microbial species. Amino acid sequences of the members of this series are not entirely homologous. However, the subtilisins in this series exhibit the same or similar type of proteolytic activity. This class of serine proteases shares a common amino acid sequence defining a catalytic triad which distinguishes them from the chymotrypsin related class of serine proteases.
- subtilisins and chymotrypsin related serine proteases have a catalytic triad comprising aspartate, histidine and serine.
- subtilisin related proteases the relative order of these amino acids, reading from the amino to carboxy terminus, is aspartate-histidine-serine.
- the relative order is histidine-aspartate-serine.
- subtilisin herein refers to a serine protease having the catalytic triad of subtilisin related proteases.
- chymotrypsin serine protease family refers to a family of serine hydrolyases based on structural homology to enzymes including gamma chymotrypsin (Birktoft and Blow. (1972) J. Molecular Biology 68: 187-240).
- a “dendritic polymer” is a polymer exhibiting regular dendritic branching, formed by the sequential or generational addition of branched layers to or from a core.
- the term dendritic polymer encompasses “dendrimers”, which are characterized by a core, at least one interior branched layer, and a surface branched layer (see, e.g., Petar et al. Pages 641-645 In Chem. in Britain , (August 1994).
- a “dendron” is a species of dendrimer having branches emanating from a focal point which is or can be joined to a core, either directly or through a linking moiety to form a dendrimer. Many dendrimers comprise two or more dendrons joined to a common core. However, the term dendrimer is used broadly to encompass a single dendron.
- Dendritic polymers include, but are not limited to, symmetrical and unsymmetrical branching dendrimers, cascade molecules, arborols, dense star polymers, and the like.
- the PAMAM dense star dendrimers (disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,714,166) are symmetric, in that the branch arms are of equal length. The branching occurs at the nitrogen atom of a terminal amine group on a preceding generation branch.
- the lysine-based dendrimers are unsymmetric, in that the branch arms are of a different length.
- One branch occurs at the epsilon nitrogen of the lysine molecule, while another branch occurs at the alpha nitrogen, adjacent to the reactive carboxy group which attaches the branch to a previous generation branch.
- hyperbranched polymers e.g., hyperbranched polyols
- an “antibody” refers to a protein or glycoprotein consisting of one or more polypeptides substantially encoded by immunoglobulin genes or fragments of immunoglobulin genes.
- the recognized immunoglobulin genes include the kappa, lambda, alpha, gamma, delta, epsilon and mu constant region genes, as well as myriad immunoglobulin variable region genes.
- Light chains are classified as either kappa or lambda.
- Heavy chains are classified as gamma, mu, alpha, delta, or epsilon, which in turn define the immunoglobulin classes, IgG, IgM, IgA, IgD and IgE, respectively.
- a typical immunoglobulin (antibody) structural unit is known to comprise a tetramer.
- Each tetramer is composed of two identical pairs of polypeptide chains, each pair having one “light” (about 25 kD) and one “heavy” chain (about 50-70 kD).
- the N-terminus of each chain defines a variable region of about 100 to 110 or more amino acids primarily responsible for antigen recognition.
- the terms variable light chain (VL) and variable heavy chain (VH) refer to these light and heavy chains respectively.
- Antibodies exist as intact immunoglobulins or as a number of well characterized fragments produced by digestion with various peptidases.
- pepsin digests an antibody below (i.e. toward the Fc domain) the disulfide linkages in the hinge region to produce F(ab)′2, a dimer of Fab which itself is a light chain joined to V H —C H l by a disulfide bond.
- the F(ab)′2 may be reduced under mild conditions to break the disulfide linkage in the hinge region thereby converting the (Fab′)2 dimer into an Fab′ monomer.
- the Fab′ monomer is essentially a Fab with part of the hinge region (see, Paul (1993) Fundamental Immunology , Raven Press, N.Y. for a more detailed description of other antibody fragments). While various antibody fragments are defined in terms of the digestion of an intact antibody, one of skill will appreciate that such fragments may be synthesized de novo either chemically, by utilizing recombinant DNA methodology, or by “phage display” methods (see, e.g., Vaughan et al. (1996) Nature Biotechnology , 14(3): 309-314, and PCT/US96/10287).
- Preferred antibodies include single chain antibodies, e.g., single chain Fv (scFv) antibodies in which a variable heavy and a variable light chain are joined together (directly or through a peptide linker) to form a continuous polypeptide.
- scFv single chain Fv
- carboxylic acids include mono-, oligo- and poly-saccharides as well as substances derived from monosaccharides by reduction of the carbonyl group (alditols), by oxidation of one or more terminal groups to carboxylic acids, or by replacement of one or more hydroxy group(s) by an hydrogen atom, an amino group, a thiol group or similar heteroatomic groups. It also includes derivatives of these compounds.
- saccharide is frequently applied to monosaccharides and lower oligosaccharides.
- Parent monosaccharides are polyhydroxy aldehydes H—[CHOH] n —CHO or polyhydroxy ketones H—[CHOH] n —CO—[CHOH] m —H with three or more carbon atoms.
- the generic term “monosaccharide” denotes a single unit, without glycosidic connections to other such units. It also includes aldoses, dialdoses, aldoketoses, ketoses and diketoses, as well as deoxy sugars and amino sugars, and their derivatives, provided that the parent compound has a (potential) carbonyl group (see, e.g., McNaught (1996) Pure Appl. Chem .
- Carbohydrates also include, but are not limited to, oligosaccharides and polysaccharides (e.g. starch, cellulose, glycogen) and carbohydrate analogues (e.g., those in which OH have been replaced by H, F, NH 2 or NHC(O)CH 3 ).
- the term “soil” or “stain” refers to the accumulation of foreign material on a substrate of interest (e.g. a textile).
- the “soil” or “stain” may have no biological activity, but may serve to discolor, and/or degrade the underlying substrate.
- the “soil” need not be visible to the naked eye. Deposition of foreign materials that, while not visible to the naked eye, but that create odors or support bacterial growth are also considered “soils” in the context of this application.
- Typical stains or soils include, but are not limited to grass stains, blood stains, milk stains, egg, egg white, and the like.
- small organic molecule refers to a molecule of a size comparable to those organic molecules generally used in pharmaceuticals.
- Preferred small organic molecules range in size up to about 5000 Da, more preferably up to 2000 Da, and most preferably up to about 1000 Da.
- adjacent to when used to indicate a location with respect to a particular amino acid residue (e.g. “adjacent to residue 149”) refers to a residue covalently attached to the “reference residue”, either preceding or following that residue, or in van der Waals contact with the reference residue.
- FIG. 1 illustrates a variety of chimeric molecules of this invention utilizing dendrimers as targeting moieties.
- FIG. 2 illustrates SBL targeting an enzyme with an inhibitor.
- FIG. 3 illustrates scheme 11 for synthesis of MTS-pyrazole 4.
- FIG. 4 illustrates results of HLADH targeting assay for SBL-pyrazole chimeric molecules.
- FIG. 5A, FIG. 5B, FIG. 5C, and FIG. 5D illustrate results of HLADH degradation assay for SBL-pyrazole chimeric molecules.
- FIG. 6 shows HLADH activity for HLADH/AP mixtures with and without S166C- pyrazole.
- FIG. 7 shows AP activity for HLADH/AP mixtures with and without S166C-pyrazole.
- FIG. 8 shows HLADH activity for HLADH/AP mixtures with and without S166C-pyrazole.
- FIG. 9 shows AP activity for HLADH/AP mixtures with and without S166C-pyrazole.
- FIG. 10 shows HLADH degradation by substoichiometric pyrazole-CMMs.
- FIG. 11 shows HLADH degradation by pyrazole-CMMs in the presence of alkaline phosphatase
- FIG. 12 illustrates alkaline phosphatase degradation by pyrazole-CMMs in the presence of HLADH.
- FIG. 13 shows 11 mono- and disaccharide methanethiosulfonates that were prepared.
- FIG. 14A, FIG. 14B, and FIG. 14C illustrate selective lectin degradation by sugar-modified GG36-WT.
- FIG. 15A, FIG. 15B, FIG. 15B, and FIG. 15D illustrate time course plots of the formation of ⁇ 3000 MW protein fragments during a lectin assay.
- FIG. 16 illustrates synthesis scheme 7 for the synthesis of biotin-MTS reagent 1.
- FIG. 17 illustrates a standard enzyme linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA)-technique for assaying targeting of biotinylated CMMs to anti-biotin.
- ELISA enzyme linked immunosorbent assay
- FIG. 18 illustrates a targeting assay for anti-biotin using using hapten modified subtilisins in a 96-well plate.
- FIG. 19 plot of anti-biotin degradation by biotin-CMM as a function of time.
- the chimeric molecules are catalytic antagonists of a target molecule.
- the catalytic antagonists of this invention preferably comprise a targeting moiety attached to an enzyme that degrades the molecule specifically bound by the targeting moiety.
- the catalytic antagonists of this invention thus bind to a target recognized by the targeting moiety (e.g. a receptor) the enzyme component of the chimera then degrades all or part of the target. This preferably resulting in a reduction or loss of activity of the target and release of the chimeric molecule.
- the chimeric molecule is then free to attack and degrade another target molecule.
- a chimeric molecule of this invention is free to attack and degrade essentially a limitless number of targets.
- the antagonists of this invention are thus catalytic in nature being effectively regenerated (rendered available again) after degrading each substrate molecule (target).
- the activity of the catalytic antagonists of this invention is thus essentially sub-stoichiometric.
- the catalytic antagonists of this invention are effective in far lower concentrations than chimeric molecules or traditional inhibitors. Consequently formulations (e.g. detergents) comprising the catalytic inhibitors of this invention can utilize significantly lower concentrations of inhibitor and can be fabricated at lower cost. In in vivo applications, the catalytic inhibitors of this invention because they offer greater activity at lower concentration, are expected to show longer effective serum half-life and lower toxicities than “traditional” chimeric molecules.
- the catalytic antagonists of this invention are useful in a wide variety of contexts where it is desired to degrade a target molecule and/or inhibit the activity of that target molecule.
- the catalytic antagonists can be used to specifically target and degrade a particular molecule.
- the chimeric molecules of this invention can be utilized to specifically target and degrade a component of a soil (e.g. a protein component, a lipid component, etc.).
- biochemical synthetic processes e.g. in analytic or industrial preparations, in bioreactors, etc. to specifically degrade particular preselected molecules.
- the catalytic antagonist of this invention comprises, as a targeting moiety, a substrate for the enzyme mediating the activity (e.g. a glycosyltransferase).
- the enzyme (receptor) in the reactor binds the targeting moiety and the enzymatic component of the chimera (e.g. a hydrolase) degrades the enzyme reducing or eliminating its activity and also freeing itself from the enzyme binding site whereby it is free to attack another target enzyme.
- chimeric molecules of this invention having, e.g. targeting moieties directed against lectins present on bacterial surfaces attached to, e.g. lipases, or hydrolases, are effective antimicrobial agents and can be used in a wide variety of disinfectants.
- the chimeric molecules of this invention can be used to bind and antagonize/inhibit a wide variety of receptors and/or enzymes, and/or intermediary signaling molecules.
- a wide variety of drugs act by inhibiting the activity of cellular receptors.
- antiestrogens e.g. tamoxifen
- beta blockers e.g.
- the catalytic antagonists of this invention Unlike a simple competitive inhibitor that “temporarily” blocks the target receptor(s), the catalytic antagonists of this invention effectively degrade the receptor. Thus, once bound and degraded, the receptor is unlikely to function again, absent some repair mechanism. Thus at equal concentrations, the catalytic antagonists of this invention will produce a far greater degree of activity and/or duration of activity than “traditional” competitive inhibitors.
- an enzyme e.g. an intracellular enzyme
- catalytic antagonists of this invention can be used to degrade target enzymes as well. In this instance, it is preferably to use, as the targeting moiety, a molecule that is not degraded or altered by the target enzyme.
- Known competitive inhibitors of enzymes make good targeting moieties in this context.
- this invention include chemical antagonists (e.g. of receptors and/or enzymes) comprising a targeting moiety that binds to the receptor or enzyme attached to an enzyme that degrades the cognate ligand that binds to that enzyme and/or receptor.
- the inhibitor of the enzyme or receptor binds and anchors the enzyme comprising the chimeric molecule to the target enzyme or receptor.
- the enzyme degrades is and thereby blocks its activity on the receptor. Again, the process is “catalytic” with no permanent change to the chimeric molecule.
- the catalytic antagonists of this invention are chemically coupled chimeric molecules.
- the targeting moiety preferably coupled, directly or through a linker, to either terminus of the enzyme (the amino or carboxyl terminus or through an R group of the terminal amino acid), or more preferably, is coupled, directly or through a linker, to a non-terminal amino acid in the enzyme.
- the catalytic antagonists of this invention comprise a chemically modified mutant (CMM) enzyme.
- CCMM chemically modified mutant
- a chemically modified mutant enzyme is an enzyme in which a native amino acid residue is replaced with a different amino acid residue (e.g. cysteine, affording a reactive site suitable for coupling the targeting moiety.
- preferred chimeric molecules of this invention are chemically coupled molecules rather than fusion proteins.
- the use of chemically coupled targeting moieties in this invention affords a number of advantages.
- the targeting moiety is not limited to a peptide or protein, but rather can be any of a number of ligands including, but not limited to, known drugs, vitamins, carbohydrates, lectins, and the like. Because the targeting moieties are typically smaller than proteins, they are less immunogenic and show greater tissue penetration. In addition, because the targeting moieties are often various small organic molecules, they retain their conformation and specificity in a physiological context and are typically less subject to degradation in vivo.
- the chimeric molecules of this invention offer a number of other advantages. Because they are chemically conjugated using a “standard” chemistry, they are easier to make and/or to vary.
- the molecules are smaller than typical “therapeutic” fusion proteins (e.g. immunotoxins) and are expected to have increased serum half-life.
- the molecules actually destroy/degrade existing receptors and/or enzymes, a single dosage is expected to have a longer-lasting effect since the subject organisms must actually replace the receptor and/or enzyme to restore that functionality.
- the catalytic antagonists of this invention can be regarded as enzymes that have been “redirected” so that they either act on a non-native substrate (for the enzymatic component) or, more typically, so that the enzymatic activity is localized at the site of the target molecule.
- this invention provides an enzyme having altered substrate specificity where the enzyme is a component of a chimeric molecule comprising a targeting moiety attached to a subsite comprising the substrate binding site of the enzyme.
- targeted chimeric molecules are designed to position the targeting moiety/domain some distance away from active sites of interest in the effector moiety. It was generally believed that a targeting moiety located too close to an active site of the effector moiety would interfere with proper functioning of the effector (e.g. via steric hindrance).
- targeting moieties comprising the chimeric molecules of this invention can be coupled to amino acid residues comprising a substrate binding site of the enzyme. Moreover, attachment of the targeting moiety to an amino acid residue in the substrate binding site of the enzyme results in the substrate binding site being closely juxtaposed to the target bound by the targeting moiety.
- the activity of the enzyme is thus “redirected” in one or both of two ways: First the activity of the enzyme can be “spatially localized” by binding of the targeting moiety to a particular preselected target. Thus, the enzyme may be specifically directed to a particular cell type, a particular enzyme, a particular receptor, etc. Second, by virtue of alterations in the enzyme produced by the presence of the targeting molecule and/or by virtue of the fact that the targeting molecule brings the substrate binding site in close proximity to the target, the enzyme can show significant activity against a target that is not its usual substrate.
- the targeting moiety can be selected to redirect/localize the enzyme to a particular target for selective degradation.
- the targeting moiety can be selected to specifically bind to a particular class of “soil” (e.g. egg) and thereby direct and appropriate degradative enzyme (e.g. a protease) to that substrate.
- the retargeted enzyme can comprise a targeting moiety that directs the enzyme to a particular target cell (e.g. a tumor cell) where the retargeted enzyme (e.g. a thymidine kinase (tk)) activates a particular drug (e.g. a cytotoxin such as ganclovir).
- a particular target cell e.g. a tumor cell
- the retargeted enzyme e.g. a thymidine kinase (tk)
- a particular drug e.g. a cytotoxin such as ganclovir
- the enzyme may be retargeted to a cell that contains an overabundance of a particular metabolite (e.g. as in storage diseases such as Tay Sachs disease).
- the redirected enzyme affords the “missing” enzymatic activity thereby treating the condition.
- catalytic antagonists can be retargeted enzymes, but are not necessarily so. Conversely, retargeted enzymes may act as catalytic antagonists, but there are retargeted enzymes that are not necessarily catalytic antagonists.
- the retargeted enzymes and catalytic antagonists are created by selecting a targeting moiety, selecting an enzyme (an effector moiety) and chemically conjugating the two to form a chimeric molecule.
- any cognate binding partner of a target e.g. a receptor and/or an enzyme and/or a lectin
- a targeting moiety in the molecules of this invention.
- molecules that are not cognate binding partners, but that are specifically bound by the target molecules e.g. receptors or an enzymes
- targeting moieties in the chimeric molecules of this invention can also be used as targeting moieties in the chimeric molecules of this invention.
- targeting moiety depends on the application for which the chimeric molecule (e.g. catalytic antagonist) is to be utilized.
- Targeting moieties can be grouped and/or identified according to a wide variety of classification schemes. Thus, for example they can be grouped according to type of molecule, e.g.
- Preferred targets include, but are not limited to receptors, enzymes, and lectins. In some instances it is simple to refer to the targeting moiety that binds to one of these targets. Thus, for example serotonin or a serotonin analogue may be a targeting moiety. Similarly targeting moieties can be referred to/identified by the target to which they bind. Thus a serotonin analogue as targeting moiety is encompassed by a drug or compound that specifically binds to a serotonin receptor.
- Receptors provide highly effective targets, particularly for the catalytic antagonists of this invention.
- Receptors typically specifically bind a cognate ligand and are involved in a wide variety of biological processes.
- receptors mediate signaling or the influx or efflux of molecules from a cell.
- transducers of signals receptors are involved in a wide variety of processes including, but not limited to regulation of growth and morphology/differentiation, gene expression and production of particular molecules, cell proliferation, elements of the immune response, various biological cascades (e.g. the inflammatory response, the clotting response, etc.) and the like.
- receptors have long been recognized as good targets for drugs and a wide variety of drugs are agonists and/or antagonists of particular receptor activity (see, e.g., Table 1). Typically these drugs are relatively small organic molecule and, as such, are good candidates as targeting moieties for the chimeric molecules of this invention. TABLE 1 Typical pharmacological agents and their mode of activity. Such pharmaceuticals make useful targeting moieties to specifically direct a catalytic antagonist of this invention to a target receptor.
- Analgesic-Antipyretic Motrin (Children's) Analgesic-Antipyretic-Decongestant Tylenol Decongestant Analgesic-Antitussive Codeine 15 mg & 30 mg Analgesic-Decongestant-Antihistamine Sinutab Nightime Extra Strength Androgen Testosterone Enanthate Injection Androgen Testosterone Propionate Injection Anesthetic-Sedative Propofol Injection Angiotensin II AT1 Receptor Blocker Avapro Angiotensin II AT1 Receptor Blocker Diovan Angiotensin-converting Enzyme Inhibitor Captril Antiandrogen Novo-Cyproterone Antiandrogen-estrogen Combination Diane - 35 Hormone Antianginal Agent Nitrolingual Pumpspray Antianginal Agent pms-Nifedipine Antianginal Agent Trinipatch 0.2, 0.4 & 0.6 Antiarrhythmic Nu-Sotalol Antiarrhythmic Rho-So
- the targeting moiety need not be a known pharmaceutical. There are a number of receptors for which inhibitors or agonists are known where the inhibitors or agonists are not approved pharmaceuticals.
- the first class includes receptors that penetrate the plasma membrane and have intrinsic enzymatic activity.
- receptors include, but are not limited to, those that are tyrosine kinases (e.g. PDGF, insulin, EGF and FGF receptors), tyrosine phosphatases (e.g. CD45 [cluster determinant-45] protein of T cells and macrophages), guanylate cyclases (e.g. natriuretic peptide receptors), , and serine/threonine kinases (e.g. are cAMP-dependent protein kinase (PKA), protein kinase C (PKC), MAP kinases, activin and TGF- ⁇ receptors).
- PKA cAMP-dependent protein kinase
- PKC protein kinase C
- MAP kinases activin and TGF- ⁇ receptors
- the proteins encoding receptor tyrosine kinases typically contain four major domains: an extracellular ligand binding domain, an intracellular tyrosine kinase domain, an intracellular regulatory domain, and a transmembrane domain.
- the amino acid sequences of the tyrosine kinase domains of RTKs are highly conserved with those of cAMP-dependent protein kinase (PKA) within the ATP binding and substrate binding regions.
- PKA cAMP-dependent protein kinase
- Some RTKs have an insertion of non-kinase domain amino acids into the kinase domain termed the kinase insert.
- RTK proteins are classified into families based upon structural features in their extracellular portions (as well as the presence or absence of a kinase insert) which include the cysteine rich domains, immunoglobulin-like domains, leucine-rich domains, Kringle domains, cadherin domains, fibronectin type III repeats, discoidin I-like domains, acidic domains, and EGF-like domains. Based upon the presence of these various extracellular domains the RTKs have been sub-divided into at least 14 different families.
- RTKs include, but are not limited to I EGF receptor, NEU/HER2, HER3, insulin receptor, IGF-1 receptor, PDGF receptors, c-Kit, FGF receptors, vascular endothelial cell growth factor (VEGF) receptor, hepatocyte growth factor (HGF) and scatter factor (SC) receptors, the neurotrophin receptor family (trkA, trkB, trkC) and NGF receptor, and the like.
- the second class includes receptors that are coupled, inside the cell, to GTP-binding and hydrolyzing proteins (termed G-proteins).
- G-protein coupled receptors are a superfamily of integral membrane proteins that are typically characterized by seven hydrophobic domains which are of sufficient length (typically 20-28 amino acid residues) to span the plasma membrane. Examples of this class include, but are not limited to the -adrenergic receptors, odorant receptors and receptors for peptide hormones (e.g. glucagon, angiotensin, vasopressin and bradykinin).
- the third class includes receptors that are found intracellularly and that, upon ligand binding, migrate to the nucleus where the ligand-receptor complex directly affects gene transcription.
- receptors include, but are not limited to steroid/thyroid hormone receptor superfamily (e.g. glucocorticoid, vitamin D, retinoic acid and thyroid hormone receptors). This is a class of proteins that reside in the cytoplasm and bind the lipophilic steroid/thyroid hormones.
- hormone response elements HREs
- Ligands that bind such receptors are well known to those of skill in the art. These include, but are not limited to A 2 receptor agonists (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,026,317), 5HT1 receptor agonists or antagonists (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,025,374 and 6,025,367), N-methyl-D-aspartate (NMDA) receptor blockers for the prevention of atherosclerosis (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,025,369), modulators of peroxisome proliferator activated receptor-gamma (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No.
- endothelin receptor antagonists see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,022,886, 6,020,348, human growth hormone variants having enhanced affinity for human growth hormone receptor at site 1 (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,022,711), antagonists of the human neuronal nicotinic acetylcholine receptor (see, e.g, U.S. Pat. No. 6,020,335), platelet GPIIb/IIIa receptor antagonists (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,022,523), adenosine receptor agonists (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No.
- interleukin receptor e.g. IL-2R, IL4R, IL-6R, IL-8R, IL-10R, IL-13R, etc.
- binding agents specific for growth factor receptors e.g. EGF, TGF and analogues or mimetics thereof
- binding agents specific for IgA receptor e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,018,031
- agonists of the strychnine insensitive glycine modulatory site of the N-methyl-D-aspartate receptor complex see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,017,957)
- integrin receptor antagonists see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No.
- corticotropin releasing factor receptors dopamine receptors, EP2 receptors, EP3 receptors, ETA receptors , ETB receptors, FSH receptors, GABA receptors, galanin receptors, glucagon receptors, glucagon-like peptide-1 receptors, gonadotropin receptors, growth hormone-releasing hormone receptors, histamine H1 receptors, histamine H2 receptors, leukotriene B4 receptors, melatonin receptors, MSH receptors, muscarinic M1, M2, M3, and M4 receptors, neurotensin receptors, parathyroid hormone receptors, pituitary adenylate cyclase-activating polypeptide receptors, platelet-activating factor receptors, prostacyclin receptors, P2U purinoceptors, P2Y purinoceptors, rhodopsins, secretin receptors, somatostatin receptors, SSTR receptors, VIP receptors, vasopressin receptors
- the targeting moieties used in the chimeric molecules of this invention are moieties specifically bound by enzymes or antibodies.
- enzymes or antibodies A wide variety of enzymes, their substrates and competitive inhibitors thereof are known to those of skill in the art. Moreover, many of these enzymes provide good targets for drug in a wide variety of pathologies.
- caspases are a remarkable and intricately regulated network of enzymes that can trigger cell suicide in animals from yeast and worms to humans.
- Caspases are known to mediate programmed cell death in a number of diseases, including ischemic brain injury, or stroke. It is believed that the cardiac cell death that occurs during heart “attack” is caused by activation of several caspases.
- YVAD-cmk an experimental caspase inhibitor known as YVAD-cmk blocks this biochemical cascade and also protects heart tissue, dramatically reducing the amount of myocardial deaths by over 30 percent.
- Catalytic antagonists of this invention comprising caspase-specific agents as targeting moieties attached to a protease (enzyme) can specifically target and degrade the caspase. It is expected this will offer protection of heart tissue during and after myocardial infarction and brain tissue during and after stroke.
- Agents that specifically bind to caspases e.g. YVAD-cmk, and various protected caspase substrates are known to those of skill in the art.
- the enzyme GARFT (Glycinamide Ribonucleotide Formyl Transferase) is an enzyme in a biochemical pathway through which tumor cells synthesize purines, essential components of DNA. Blocking the action of GARFT inhibits purine synthesis and subsequent tumor DNA molecule construction. With the exception of liver cells, all normal human tissues can obtain purines via an alternative pathway (purine salvage pathway). Inhibitors of GARFT will show selectivity for tumor cells and less significant bone marrow toxicity than other chemotherapeutic agents.
- a catalytic antagonist of this invention comprising a GARFT targeting moiety attached to a protease capable of degrading GARFT is expected to show similar tumor selectivity.
- AG2037 produced by Agouron
- AG2037 has been engineered using structure-based design to exhibit potent and selective inhibition of GARFT but to avoid binding to mFBP, a membrane protein believed to be important in the side-effects of earlier GARFT inhibitors.
- AG2037 is well tolerated in a variety of mouse cancer models and demonstrates broad-spectrum antitumor efficacy, at least equal to that of paclitaxel when studied in the same tumors grown in mice.
- DHODH dihydroorotate dehydrogenase
- UMP uridylate
- Hoechst Leflunomide
- FDA Food and Drug Administration
- DHODH-specific agents can be used as a targeting moiety attached to an enzyme that degrades the DHODH enzyme and provides a similar therapeutic result.
- Another known inhibitor, Brequinar sodium has shown efficacy in many animal models of immunosuppression, but was not successful in clinical trials for transplantation, apparently due to a narrow therapeutic window.
- a targeting moiety in a catalytic antagonist of this invention it is expected that the therapeutic window will be improved because the molecule will be effective in lower dosages.
- conversion of drugs that act as competitive inhibitors into catalytic antagonists in accordance with this invention will show an improved therapeutic window due to their higher efficacy at lower concentration.
- the catalytic antagonists of this invention are useful in the treatment of hereditary emphysema.
- the inherited form of emphysema is called alpha-1 proteinase inhibitor deficiency or “alpha-one” for short.
- People with this disease have a deficiency in a major protein, alpha-1 proteinase inhibitor.
- Alpha-1 proteinase inhibitor is a major protein in the blood and is produced primarily in the liver cells but also by some white blood cells. It protects the lung by blocking the effects of powerful enzymes called elastases.
- Elastase is normally carried in white blood cells and protects the delicate tissue of the lung by killing bacteria and neutralizing tiny particles inhaled into the lung. Once the protective work of this enzyme is finished, further action is blocked by the alpha-1 proteinase inhibitor. Without alpha-1 proteinase inhibitor, elastase can destroy the air sacs of the lung.
- catalytic antagonists of this invention comprising an alpha-1 proteinase binding moiety attached (e.g. the drug called Prolastin) to, e.g. a protease, will degrade alpha-1 proteinase affording similar or better therapeutic benefit.
- an alpha-1 proteinase binding moiety attached e.g. the drug called Prolastin
- Antibodies also provide useful targets for the catalytic antagonists of this invention.
- a catalytic antagonist that targets and antagonizes (e.g. degrades) ⁇ -Gal epitope specific antibodies is expected to significantly reduce an immune response (e.g. to a xenotransplant).
- the ⁇ -Gal epitope can be used as a targeting moiety in a chimera of this invention. It may be attached to a protease (e.g. a subtilisin, a pepsin, etc.) and when it is bound by the antibody it will degrade that antibody thereby inhibiting the antibody-mediated immune response.
- the catalytic antagonist can use as a targeting moiety the MHC (or component thereof) of the xenotransplant.
- the enzymatic component is a hydrolase (e.g. a protease)
- the catalytic inhibitor will specifically digest the receptor on effector cells of the immune system (e.g. cytotoxic T lymphocytes (CTLs) only on those cells specifically directed against the xenotransplant.
- CTLs cytotoxic T lymphocytes
- antibodies that are good targets for the catalytic inhibitors of this invention are antibodies produced in auto-immune responses and/or other allergic responses.
- the targeting moiety is a molecule bearing an epitope recognized by the antibodies mediating the autoimmune or allergic response. Degradation of the antibody by, e.g. a hydrolase attached to the targeting moiety will reduce the pathologic symptoms associated with the autoimmune response.
- Specific allergens and substrates recognized by antibodies in various autoimmune responses are well known to those of skill in the art and can readily incorporated into the chimeric molecules of this invention.
- targeting moieties are selected that bind to particular lectins.
- Lectins are proteins obtained from many plant, animal, and bacterial sources that have binding sites for specific mono or oligosaccharides. Lectins such as concanavalin A and wheat germ agglutinin are widely used as analytical and preparative agents in the study of glycoproteins.
- Lectins are also present on the surfaces of eukaryotic and bacterial cells. In eukaryotic cells, lectins are often involved in cell-cell interactions. In bacterial cells, lectins often mediate adhesion of the bacterium to its target/host and, in many cases, such adhesion is required for the bacterium to infect the host cell.
- Biofilm formation is also problematic in a wide variety of commercial synthetic systems. Often fermentation vessels and other bioreactors are contaminated by biofilms. Biofilms also growing in and contaminate apparatus used for many chemical processes particularly those involving “digestible” organic reagents. Thus, biofilms often contaminate filters, conduits, separators and other devices.
- the catalytic antagonists of this invention can be used to inhibit/degrade various lectins.
- a catalytic antagonist comprising a sugar or oligosaccharide attached to a hydrolase will specifically target and degrade a lectin that binds the target molecule.
- Such a catalytic antagonist is illustrated in the examples.
- ganglioside an acid glycosphingolipid and invade host cells.
- cholera toxin an enterotoxin produced by.
- Vibrio cholerae which is known to bind ganglioside GM1.
- Other ganglioside-binding bacterial toxins include Tetanus toxin (GD1b), botulinum toxins (GT1b and GQ1b) and delta toxin produced by Clostridium perfringens (GM2).
- GT1b and GQ1b botulinum toxins
- GM2b botulinum toxins
- GM2b Clostridium perfringens
- Shiga toxin produced by Shigella dysenteriae and Vero toxin produced by enterohaemorrhagic E. coli bind to neutral glycosphingolipids having an alpha-1,4 galabiose moiety in the sugar chain, such as galabioside (Ga2Cer) and ceramide trihexoside (G
- uropathogenic E. coli which cause urinary tract infections can bind to glycosphingolipids having an alpha-1,4 galabiose moiety at the non-reducing end of the sugar chain (Gb3Cer, etc).
- Uropathogenic E. coli can also bind to globoside (Gb4Cer) and Forssman glycolipid, both of which have an alpha-1,4 galabiose moiety internally in a sugar chain.
- Gb4Cer globoside
- Forssman glycolipid both of which have an alpha-1,4 galabiose moiety internally in a sugar chain.
- E. coli binds to glycosphingolipids by pili that exist on the bacterial cell surface and are similar to fibers or hairs.
- adhesin On the top of pili, there is an adhesin characterized as a lectin.
- adhesin characterized as a lectin.
- types of adhesin with respect to their sugar specificity, have been identified. They are the type I adhesin of E. coli that are mannose specific, type P adhesin, also of E. coli , specific for alpha-1,4 galabiose moiety, and type S adhesin of E. coli , specific for sialylgalactose moiety. It was reported that the amino acid sequence of P-adhesin is similar as that of Shiga toxin because both recognize alpha-1,4 galabiose moiety of glycosphingolipid.
- Propionibacterium which causes skin disease, recognizes the lactosyl moiety of glycosphingolipids as a binding epitope. These bacteria can bind strongly to lactosylceramide and also bind to isoreceptors such as asialo GM1 (GA1) and asialo GM2 (GA2). Because almost all glycosphingolipids contain a common lactosyl moiety, Propionibacterium may be assumed to bind almost all glycosphingolipids. However, the bacteria cannot bind to any glycosphingolipids composed of a dihydroxy base and nonhydroxy fatty acid in ceramide, even though these contain a lactosyl moiety.
- binding epitope of the bacteria also depends on the ceramide structure in addition to the lactosyl moiety in sugar chain.
- Neisseria gonorrhoeae which cause gonorrhoea, also bind glycosphingolipids having a lactosyl moiety.
- catalytic antagonists having targeting moieties that specifically bind various glycosphingolipids and/or various adhesins (e.g. mannose specific type I adhesin of E. coli , alpha-1,4 galabiose specific type P adhesin of E. coli , and sialylgalactose type S adhesin of E. coli ) attached to enzymes that degrade the glycosphingolipids (e.g. glycosidases, cerebrosidases, etc.) will act to prevent bacterial infections and are expected to provide effective therapeutics to block acute effects of bacterial-produced toxins (e.g. cholera toxin).
- various adhesins e.g. mannose specific type I adhesin of E. coli , alpha-1,4 galabiose specific type P adhesin of E. coli , and sialylgalactose type S adhesin of E. coli
- Lectins are also implicated in various inflammatory processes (e.g. inflammatory processes associated with rheumatoid arthritis, arthritis, septic shock, myocardial infarction., etc.).
- Lec-CAMs or selectins are expressed on the surfaces of endothelium, leukocytes and platelets and influence leukocyte-endothelial adhesion at sites of inflammation.
- GMP-140 P-selectin stored in Weibel-Palade bodies of endothelial cells and a platelet granules, when stimulated by TNF- ⁇ IL-1 is transported within minutes to the cell surface and participates in interactions between endothelium, platelets, neutrophils.
- ELAM-1 (E-selectin) is synthesized de novo by stimulated endothelium e.g. by TNF- ⁇ /IL-1, and enhances later recruitment of leukocytes.
- LAM-1 (L-selectin) regulates lymphocyte binding to high endothelial lymph node venules, the surface of neutrophils and lymphocytes to localize these cells to injury.
- the integrins a family of adhesion molecules composed of heterodimers of ⁇ and ⁇ subunits; act in regulation of cell-matrix and cell-cell adhesion. These molecules are transmembrane in structure, thus linking or “integrating” exterior/surface stimuli to the internal cell cytoskeleton.
- ⁇ 2 integrins also known as CD11/CD18 molecules confer adhesion specificity, mediate activation of phagocytic cells by chemotactic stimuli.
- integrins e.g. MO-1, leukocyte function antigen-1 (LFA-1) and gp150,95; assist in localization of phagocytes to injury sites; deficiency states result in enhanced susceptibility to bacterial infection.
- integrins e.g. MO-1, leukocyte function antigen-1 (LFA-1) and gp150,95; assist in localization of phagocytes to injury sites; deficiency states result in enhanced susceptibility to bacterial infection.
- the intercellular adhesion molecule-1 (ICAM-1): assists in localization of leukocytes to tissue injury; expressed on surface of cytokine stimulated endothelium and leukocytes; binds to LFA-1 and MO-1 present on cell membranes of neutrophils and macrophages.
- the vascular cell adhesion molecule-1 (VCAM-1): binds VLA-4 leukocyte receptor on lymphocytes, monocytes, eosinophils, basophils.
- the targeting moiety can be a lectin that will specifically direct the catalytic antagonist (or redirected enzyme) to a sugar or sugar-bearing target.
- the molecules can be directed to the sugars present on and characteristic of particular bacteria.
- the sugar-targeted catalytic antagonist will make an effective microbicide.
- such molecules can be targeted by using simple sugars, or oligosaccharides and the like as targeting moieties in the chimeric molecules of this invention.
- dendrimers can also be used as targeting moieties.
- multiple functionalization of the enzyme e.g. either a catalytic antagonist or a redirected enzyme
- multiple branched linking structures can be employed to create a polyfunctionalized enzyme (chimeric molecule).
- multiple glycosylation including multiple mannose-containing chimeras and varied sugar moieties can be created.
- This could confer the benefit of increased affinity for, and increased binding affinity between, lectins and the targeted enzyme (e.g. a hydrolase).
- the targeted enzyme e.g. a hydrolase.
- This would also permit multiple concurrent targeting of sites, for instance by incorporating multiple biotin molecules into a targeting moiety that would elicit multiple concurrent biotin-avidin interactions.
- the dendrimer targeting moieties (before coupling to the enzyme) would preferably include methanethiosulfonates with simple branching such as:
- the redirected enzymes describe herein can be used in a variety of drug delivery strategies.
- the targeting moiety can be directed to specifically bind to a particular cell type or tissue (e.g. a tumor cell).
- the enzymatic component can be selected for an activity that converts a (e.g. non-toxic prodrug) to an active form (e.g. a cytotoxin).
- the retargeted enzyme of this invention thus localizes the activity of the prodrug/drug to the cells bound by the chimeric molecule.
- thymidine kinase e.g., Herpes simplex thymidine kinase (HSVTK) or Varicella zoster thymidine kinase (VZVTK)
- HVTK Herpes simplex thymidine kinase
- VZVTK Varicella zoster thymidine kinase
- thymidine kinase assists in metabolizing antiviral nucleoside analogues to their active form are therefore useful in activating nucleoside analogue precursors (e.g., AZT or ddC) into their active form.
- nucleoside analogue precursors e.g., AZT or ddC
- tk-containing cells are killed when contacted with ganclovir.
- the redirected enzyme of this invention can be a thymidine kinase targeted, for example to a cell expressing a CCR5 and/or a CCR3 receptor (and hence likely to be susceptible to HIV infection).
- the tk re-directed to these cells can activate AZT or ddC precursors into their active form.
- the tk enzyme can be directed to a tumor cell (e.g. via a tumor specific antigen). Treatment with ganclovir then results in death of the tumor cell.
- DPD dihydropyrimidine dehydrogenase
- prodrug phosphenytoin a relatively soluble prodrug that is converted by phosphatase to relatively insoluble phenytoin an active. anticonvulsant.
- depivefrin is converted by esterase to epinephrine, an adrenergic, useful in the treatment of glaucoma.
- the re-directed enzymes of this invention can also act as “self-protected” polypeptides particularly when utilized as in vivo therapeutics.
- the organic molecule (e.g. the targeting moiety) component of the chimeric molecule can sterically shield and protect the effector (enzyme) component of the chimeric molecule.
- the idea of this is that bulky groups attached near to key positions on the chimeric molecule would hinder the attack of another reagent on, e.g. cleavage sites in the remainder of the chimera and therefore prolong its lifetime.
- the organic molecule can perform “double duty” providing both a targeting functionality as well as a protective function.
- the re-directed enzymes of this invention can be utilized in enzyme replacement therapy, particular in the treatment of storage diseases.
- Storage diseases are caused by the increased accumulation of metabolic products (e.g., lipids, proteins, and complex carbohydrates) due to either the inactivity of an enzyme that degrades the products or the hyperactivity of an enzyme that creates the products.
- Storage disease include but are not limited to glycogen storage disease I, GM1 gangliosidoses, MPS IV B (Morquio B), GM2 gangliosidoses (O, B, AB, B1 variants), Niemann-Pick disease (A, B, and C), Metachromatic leukodystrophy (arylsulfatase A and SAP-1 deficient), Krabbe disease, Fabry disease, Gaucher disease, Farber disease, Wolman disease (cholesterol ester storage disease), MPS I (Hurler and Scheie syndromes), MPS II (Hunter syndrome), MPS III A, C, and D (Sanfilippo A, C, and D), PS III B (Sanfilippo B), MPS IV A (Morquio A), MPS VI (Maroteaux-Lamy syndrome), MPS VII (beta-glucuronidase deficiency), Multiple sulfatase deficiency, Mucolipidosis I (Sialidosis), Muco
- Gaucher's disease can be treated by use of a glucocerebrosidase targeted to spleen cells.
- superoxide dismutase can be targeted to the liver as an anti-oxidant, and so forth.
- any enzyme can be utilized in the chimeric molecules of this invention.
- the chimeric molecule is a catalytic antagonist
- enzymes are selected that are capable of degrading the substrate specifically bound by the targeting moiety.
- Such enzymes include, but are not limited to proteases, cellulases, nucleases (exo- and endo-), amylases, lipases, aldolases, ketolases, glycosidases, and the like.
- the chimeric molecule is an enzyme whose activity is directed to a new location and/or substrate
- the enzyme can be , but need not necessarily be an enzyme that degrades its substrate.
- the redirected enzymes can also include enzymes such as isomerases, oxidases, oxidoreductases, ligases, transferases, and the like.
- Preferred enzymes for use in the catalytic antagonists of this invention are the hydrolases.
- Particularly preferred enzymes for use in the catalytic antagonists of this invention are the serine hydrolases.
- the serine hydrolases are a class of hydrolytic enzymes characterized by a hydrolytic enzymes that posses a catalytic triad composed of a serine, histidine and a carboxylate amino acid (either aspartic or glutamic acid), and which catalyze the hydrolysis, and microscopic reverse reactions thereof, of carboxylic acid derivatives including, but not restricted to, esters, peptides and amides.
- Preferred serine hydrolases comprising this invention include the trypsin-chymotrypsin proteases, the subtilisin proteases, and the alpha/beta hydrolases.
- the enzyme is protease, more preferably a subtilisin (e.g. a Bacillus lentis subtilisin).
- subtilisin is a serine endoprotease (MW ⁇ 27,500) which is secreted in large amounts from a wide variety of Bacillus species.
- the protein sequence of subtilisin has been determined from at least four different species of Bacillus (see, e.g., Markland et al. (1971) pages 561-608 In: The Enzymes , ed.
- subtilisin BPN′ from B. amyloligoefaciens
- the three-dimensional crystallographic structure of subtilisin BPN′ has also been reported (Wright et al. (1969) Nature 221, 235-242; Drenth et al. (1972) Eur. J. Biochem . 26: 177-181.
- subtilisin containing covalently bound peptide inhibitors Robottus, et al. (1972) Biochemistry 11: 2439-2449
- product complexes Robottus et al. (1972) Biochemistry 11: 4293-4303
- transition state analogs Mol.
- subtilisin containing covalently bound peptide inhibitors Robottus, et al. (1972) Biochemistry 11: 2439-2449
- product complexes Robottus et al. (1972) Biochemistry 11: 4293-4303
- transition state analogs Moatthews et al (1975) J. Biol. Chem . 250: 7120-7126
- hydrolases for use in this invention include, but are not limited to ⁇ / ⁇ hydrolases, trypsin/chymotryspsin families of serine hydrolase enzymes, aspartyl proteases, cysteine proteases, metalloproteases, lysozymes and other glycosidases etc.
- the chimeric catalytic antagonists and/or redirected enzymes of this invention are made by chemically conjugating the desired enzyme (directly or through a linker) to the targeting moiety. While many strategies are known for preparing chemically conjugated chimeric molecules (see, e.g., European Patent Application No. 188,256; U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,671,958, 4,659,839, 4,414,148, 4,699,784; 4,680,338; 4,569,789; 4,589,071; 4,545,985 and 4,894,443; Borlinghaus et al. (1987) Cancer Res . 47: 40714075; Thorpe et al.
- the targeting moiety is derivatized/functionalized with a reactive group that can react with an available R group (e.g. NH 2 , N, NH, OH, COOH, SH, etc.) on an amino acid residue comprising the enzyme.
- R group e.g. NH 2 , N, NH, OH, COOH, SH, etc.
- the targeting moiety is derivatized as a methanethiosulfonate reagent that can then react with the —SH in a cysteine to provide the targeting moiety coupled in place of the thiol hydrogen on the cysteine.
- the coupling can be direct or through a linker.
- the cysteine to which the targeting moiety is attached is a native cysteine in the enzyme, however, in preferred embodiments the cysteine is a cysteine substituted for a different native amino acid residue in the enzyme.
- the enzyme so modified is, optionally, referred to as a mutant enzyme.
- Chimeric molecules of this invention in which the targeting molecule is chemically coupled to a mutant enzyme are, optionally, referred to as Chemically Modified Mutants (CMMs).
- the location (residue) in the enzyme for attachment of the targeting moiety is identified. Where this residue is not already a cysteine, a cysteine is substituted for the native residue.
- the targeting moiety, or a linker attached thereto is derivatized as a methanethiosulfonate which can then be reacted with the cysteines —SH group as described herein.
- Detailed protocols for the preparation of mutant enzymes and the coupling of a targeting moiety are provided below and in the examples.
- any residue of the enzyme can be selected for mutagenesis (e.g. substitution of a cysteine) and chemical modification to introduce a targeting moiety, as long as the modification retains the desired level of activity of the subject enzyme.
- mutagenesis e.g. substitution of a cysteine
- chemical modification to introduce a targeting moiety, as long as the modification retains the desired level of activity of the subject enzyme.
- this is accomplished by making the substitution at a location that does not block critical substrate interactions or drastically alter folding/conformation of the subject enzyme.
- Suitable sites for introduction of a targeting moiety can be determined by substituting cysteine, and optionally an attached targeting moiety, and assaying the enzymes for the desired activity. With the current advances in combinatorial chemistry and high throughput screening systems such modifications and screening can be accomplished with only routine experimentation.
- residues for modification/substitution in the enzyme are rationally selected.
- Preferred sites include sites not in critical conformation determining regions and sites disposed away from the subsite(s) of the enzyme.
- preferred amino acid residues selected for modification include residues expected to be important discriminatory sites near, adjacent to or within the substrate binding region of the enzyme. Such residues are determined from mutagenesis experiments where the subsite residues are systematically mutagenized and the effect of such mutagenesis on binding specificity and/or enzymatic activity is determined.
- important residues can be identified from inspection of crystal structures of the enzyme alone or in complex with subtrate, substrate analogues or inhibitors and/or from predicted protein folding or protein-protein interactions determined using protein modeling software (e.g., Quanta, Cerius, Insight (Molecular Simulations Inc.) and Frodo (academic software).
- Side chains situated to alter interaction at subsites defined by Berger and Schechter can be selected based on the crystallographic models of the enzymes and extrapolated to homologous enzymes if necessary if structural information on a specific enzyme is unavailable.
- B. lentus subtilisin sites 62, 156, 166, 217 and 222 are important substrate specificity determining sites.
- Additional related sites include position 96, 104, 107, 189 and 209 in subtilisin and homologous positions in related enzymes.
- residues typically lie in the S1, S2, S4, S1′, S2′, or S3′ subsites although it will be appreciated that in certain cases, alteration of residues in other subsites can also produce dramatic effects.
- preferred residues for mutation include, but are not limited to residues at or near residues 156 and 166 in the S1 subsite, residues 217 and 222 in the S1′ subsite, residue 62 in the S2 subsite, and Leu96, Val104, Ile107, Phe189 and Tyr209 or residues at or near homologous positions other subtilisin-type serine proteases (preferably positions within subsites).
- preferred residues for mutation include, but are not limited to, residues at or near residues Tyr94, Leu99, Gln175, Asp189, Ser190, Gln192, Leu111, Phe175, Tyr176, Ser182, Leu184, Phe189, Tyr214, Asp231, Lys234, and Ile243 of trypsin (Protein Databank Entry 1TPP) or residues at or near homologous positions of other chymotrypsin-type (trypsin-chymotrypsin-type) serine proteases (preferably positions within subsites).
- preferred residues for mutation include, but are not limited to, residues at or near the following residues: Trp104, Thr138, Leu144, Val154, Ile189, Ala 225, Leu278 and Ile185, where these are residues of Candida antartica lipase (Protein Data Bank entry 1tca) or residues at homologous positions of other alpha/beta type serine hydrolases (preferably positions within subsites).
- amino acids replaced in the enzyme by cysteines are selected from the group consisting of asparagine, leucine, methionine, or serine. More preferably the amino acid to be replaced is located in or near a subsite of the enzyme preferably the S1, S1′ or S2 subsites.
- subtilisin the amino acids to be replaced are N62, L217, M222, S156,S166, site 104, site 107 (S4), site 96 (S2), site 189(S2′) and site 209 (S1′/S3′) or their homologues where the numbered position corresponds to naturally occurring subtilisin from Bacilus amyloliquefaciens or to equivalent amino acid residues in other subtilisins such as Bacillus lentus subtilisin.
- the chimeric molecules of this invention are not limited to serine hydrolases.
- this invention includes other chimeric proteases.
- proteases include, but are not limited to aspartyl proteases, cysteine proteases, metalloproteases, and the like.
- residues for mutation include, but are not limited to, amino acid(s) corresponding (e.g. at a homologous position) to a residue at or near the following residues Tyr9, Met12, Gln13, Gly76, Thr77, Phe111, Phe 117, Ser127, Ile 128, Ser130, Tyr189, Ile213, Glu239, Met245, Gln 287, Met 289, Asn290, Leu291, and Glu294, where these “reference” residues are residues in the mature human pepsin (Protein Data Bank entry 1PSN).
- protease is cysteine protease
- preferred residues for mutation include, but are not limited to, amino acid(s) corresponding (e.g. at a homologous position) to a residue at or near the following residues Asn18, Ser21, Asn64, Tyr67, Trp69, Gln112, Gln142. Asp158, Trp177, and Phe207, where these reference residues are residues in the mature papain (Protein Data Bank entry 1BQI).
- residues for mutation include, but are not limited to, amino acid(s) corresponding (e.g. at a homologous position) to a residue at or near the following residues Leu111, Phe175, Tyr176, Ser182, Leu184, Phe189, Tyr214, Asp231, Lys234, and Ile243, where these reference residues are residues in the mature human matrix metalloprotease (Protein Data Bank entry 830C).
- the mutants described herein are most efficiently prepared by site-directed mutagenesis of the DNA encoding the wild-type enzyme of interest (e.g. Bacillus lentis subtilisin). Techniques for performing site-directed mutagenesis or non-random mutagenesis are known in the art. Such methods include, but are not limited to alanine scanning mutagenesis (Cunningham and Wells (1989) Science , 244, 1081-1085), oligonucleotide-mediated mutagenesis (Adellman et al. (1983) DNA, 2, 183), cassette mutagenesis (Wells et al. (1985) Gene , 344: 315) and binding mutagenesis (Ladner et al. WO 88/06630).
- the substitute amino acid residue (e.g. cysteine) is introduced into the selected position by oligonucleotide-mediated mutagenesis using the polymerase chain reaction technique.
- the gene encoding the desired native enzyme (e.g. subtilisin) is carried by a suitable plasmid.
- the plasmid is an expression vector, e.g., a plasmid from the pBR, pUC, pUB, pET or pHY4 series.
- the plasmid can be chosen by persons skilled in the art for convenience or as desired.
- the fragment containing the selected mutation site is cleaved from the gene encoding the subject enzyme by restriction endonucleases and is used as the template in a modified PCR technique (see, Higuchi et al. (1988) Nucleic Acid Res ., 16, 7351-7367).
- an oligonucleotide containing the desired mutation is used as a mismatch primer to initiate chain extension between 5′ and 3 PCR flanking primers.
- the process includes two PCR reactions. In the first PCR, the mismatch primer and the 5′ primer are used to generate a DNA fragment containing the desired base substitution. The fragment is separated from the primers by electrophoresis. After purification, it is then used as the new 5′ primer in a second PCR with the 3′ primer to generate the complete fragment containing the desired base substitution. After confirmation of the mutation by sequencing, the mutant fragment is then inserted back to the position of the original fragment.
- a cassette mutagenesis method may be used to facilitate the construction and identification of the cysteine mutants of the present invention.
- the gene encoding the serine hydrolase is obtained and sequenced in whole or in part.
- the point(s) at which it is desired to make a mutation of one or more amino acids in the expressed enzymes is identified.
- the sequences flanking these points are evaluated for the presence of restriction sites for replacing a short segment of the gene with an oligonucleotide which when expressed will encode the desired mutants.
- restriction sites are preferably unique sites within the serine hydrolase gene so as to facilitate the replacement of the gene segment.
- any convenient restriction site which is not overly redundant in the hydrolase gene may be used, provided the gene fragments generated by restriction digestion can be reassembled in proper sequence. If restriction sites are not present at locations within a convenient distance from the selected point (e.g., from 10 to 15 nucleotides), such sites are generated by substituting nucleotides in the gene in such a fashion that neither the reading frame nor the amino acids encoded are changed in the final construction.
- the task of locating suitable flanking regions and evaluating the needed changes to arrive at two convenient restriction site sequences is made routine by the redundancy of the genetic code, a restriction enzyme map of the gene and the large number of different restriction enzymes. If convenient flanking restriction site is available, the above method need be used only in connection with the flanking region which does not contain a site.
- Mutation of the gene in order to change its sequence to conform to the desired sequence is accomplished e.g., M13 primer extension in accord with generally known methods.
- the restriction sites flanking the sequence to be mutated are digested with the cognate restriction enzymes and the end termini-complementary oligonucleotide cassette(s) are ligated into the gene.
- the mutagenesis is enormously simplified by this method because all of the oligonucleotides can be synthesized so as to have the same restriction sites, and no synthetic linkers are necessary to create the restriction sites.
- a suitable DNA sequence computer search program simplifies the task of finding potential 5′ and 3′ convenient flanking sites.
- any mutation introduced in creation of the restriction site(s) are silent to the final construction amino acid coding sequence.
- a candidate restriction site 5′ to the target codon a sequence preferably exists in the gene that contains at least all the nucleotides but for one in the recognition sequence 5′ to the cut of the candidate enzyme.
- the blunt cutting enzyme SmaI CCC/GGG
- N needs to be altered to C this alteration preferably leaves the amino acid coding sequence intact.
- a particularly preferred of method of introducing cysteine mutants into the enzyme of interest is illustrated with respect to the subtilisin gene from Bacillus lentus (“SBL”).
- the gene for SBL is cloned into a bacteriophage vector (e.g. M13mp19 vector) for mutagenesis (see, e.g. U.S. Pat. No. 5,185,258).
- Oligonucleotide-directed mutagenesis is performed according to the method described by Zoller et al. (1983) Meth. Enzymol ., 100: 468-500.
- the mutated sequence is then cloned, excised, and reintroduced into an expression plasmid (e.g. plasmid GG274) in the B. subtilis host.
- PEG 50%) is added as a stabilizer.
- the crude protein concentrate thus obtained is purified by first passing through a SephadexTM G-25 desalting matrix with a pH 5.2 buffer (e.g. 20 mM sodium acetate, 5 mM CaCl 2 ) to remove small molecular weight contaminants. Pooled fractions from the desalting column are then applied to a strong cation exchange column (e.g. SP SepharoseTM FF) in the sodium acetate buffer described above and the SBL is eluted with a one step gradient of 0-200 mM NaCl acetate buffer, pH 5.2. Salt-free enzyme powder is obtained following dialysis of the eluent against Millipore purified water and subsequent lyophilization.
- a pH 5.2 buffer e.g. 20 mM sodium acetate, 5 mM CaCl 2
- kits for site-directed mutagenesis are commercially available (see, e.g. TransfomerTM Site-Directed Mutagenesis Kit available from Toyobo).
- a number of particularly preferred sites for introduction of the cysteine and coupling the targeting moiety are indicated herein.
- the positions are indicated with respect to a “reference” enzyme and “homologous” sites in related enzymes in the same family can be determined, e.g. as described herein. It may, however, be desired to optimize, coupling sites for a particular enzyme, targeting moiety combination.
- this invention utilizes chemically coupled targeting moieties this can be accomplished with relative ease and, at most, routine experimentation. Cysteines can be introduced, e.g. into positions near the reference site of interest, and then the targeting moiety can be readily conjugated as described herein. The resulting chimera can then be tested for the desired activity.
- chemical coupling of the targeting moiety is to a cysteine, either naturally occurring in the subject enzyme or introduced (e.g. via site-directed mutagenesis.
- the chimeric molecules of this invention need not be limited to molecules conjugated through cysteines. In certain embodiments the conjugation can be through virtually any other amino acid (e.g., a serine, a glycine, a tyrosine, etc.).
- the conjugation can be through the existing R group (using other coupling chemistries), or alternatively a sulfhydryl group (SH) can be introduced (linked) to the R group and the targeting moiety, derivatized as a methanethiosulfonate reagent, can be coupled, e.g. as illustrated in the examples.
- a sulfhydryl group SH
- the targeting moiety derivatized as a methanethiosulfonate reagent
- the mutated enzyme is expressed from a heterologous nucleic acid in a host cell.
- the expressed enzyme is then isolated and, if necessary, purified.
- the choice of host cell and expression vectors will to a large extent depend upon the enzyme of choice and its source.
- a useful expression vector contains an element that permits stable integration of the vector into the host cell genome or autonomous replication of the vector in a host cell independent of the genome of the host cell, and preferably one or more phenotypic markers that permit easy selection of transformed host cells.
- the expression vector may also include control sequences encoding a promoter, ribosome binding site, translation initiation signal, and, optionally, a repressor gene, a selectable marker or various activator genes.
- nucleotides encoding a signal sequence may be inserted prior to the coding sequence of the gene.
- a gene or cDNA encoding a mutated enzyme to be used according to the invention is operably linked to the control sequences in the proper reading frame.
- Vectors containing the mutant genes obtained by site-directed mutagenesis are then used respectively to transform suitable host cells and expressed.
- suitable host cells include bacteria such as E. coli or Bacillus, yeast such as S. cerevisiae , mammalian cells such as mouse fibroblast cell, or insect cells.
- yeast such as S. cerevisiae
- mammalian cells such as mouse fibroblast cell, or insect cells.
- a bacterial expression system is used.
- the host is Bacillus. Protein expression is performed by processes well known in the art according to factors such as the selected host cell and the expression vector to culture the transformed host cell under conditions favorable for a high-level expression of the foreign plasmid.
- one particularly preferred expression system is plasmid GG274 which is then expressed in a B. subtilis host.
- targeting moieties can be coupled to the cysteine(s) introduced into the subject enzyme (e.g. serine hydrolase).
- the targeting moiety is selected depending on the desired use of the enzyme.
- suitable targeting moieties include, but are not limited to, moieties that are bound by receptors, targeting moieties that are bound by antibodies and enzymes, targeting moieties that are bound by lectins, and various other targeting moieties.
- the targeting moieties are drugs or prodrugs that are specifically bound by a receptor and/or an enzyme.
- the R group on cysteines provides a convenient relatively reactive thiol group (—SH) that can be exploited for coupling a desired targeting moiety to the cysteine.
- the targeting moiety of interest is provided, derivatized as a methanethiosulfonate reagent which, when reacted with the cysteine, results in the substituent of interest covalently coupled to the cysteine by a disulfide linkage (—S—S—).
- Reaction mixtures are kept at 20° C. with continuous end-over-end mixing. Reactions are monitored by following the specific activity (e.g. with suc-AAPF-pNA) and by tests for residual free thiol (e.g. with Ellman's reagent).
- the reaction mixture is loaded on a SephadexTM PD-10 G25 column with 5 mM MES and 2 mM CaCl2, pH 6.5.
- the protein fraction is then dialyzed against 1 mM CaCl2 and the dialysate is lyophilized. In a particulary preferred embodiment the fraction is dialyzed against pH 6.5 MES then flash frozen.
- the reactive groups may be derivatized with, appropriate blocking/protecting groups to prevent undesired reactions during the coupling.
- the serine hydrolase contains one or more cysteines that are not to be derivatized
- the cysteines may be replaced with other amino acids (e.g. via site directed mutagenesis) and/or the thiol group(s) on these cysteines may be derivatized with appropriate protecting groups (e.g. (e.g. benzyl, trityl, tert-butyl, MOM, acetyl, thiocarbonate, thiocarbamate, and others).
- cysteine is introduced/substituted into the enzyme
- other amino acids e.g. lysine, histadine, etc.
- the targeting moiety may be coupled to these residues.
- the chimeric molecules of this invention are typically screened for the activity or activities of interest.
- the activity of interest depends on the desired use of the chimeric molecule.
- the chimeric molecule may be assayed for two properties: 1) The ability to reduce or eliminate the activity of the target, e.g., where the target is biologically active, or simply to partially or fully degrade the target, e.g. where the target is not biologically active; and 2) the ability to release from the target after the target is degraded and to bind and degrade another target.
- the chimieric molecule may simply be assayed for activity (e.g. the ability to perform degradations) in a substoichiometric manner.
- activity of a molecule on a cell surface receptor can be determined by providing a cell expressing the receptor and measuring the activity of the receptor in the presence or absence of the chimeric molecule.
- Receptor assays are commonly performed in oocytes (e.g. Xenopus oocytes) into which an RNA encoding the subject receptor is inserted. Receptor activity is monitored by measuring electrochemical activity (e.g.
- the catalytic antagonists of this invention can be used as therapeutic in a wide number of pathologies including, but not limited to inhibitors of viral infection and/or replication, inhibitors of bacterial infection and/or biofilm formation, modulators of an immune response, modulators of an autoimmune response, inhibitors of an inflammatory response, and the like. More generally, as indicated above, the catalytic antagonists of this invention can be used to replace existing pharmaceuticals where the pharmaceutical acts by inhibiting and/or antagonizing a receptor.
- a receptor bound by a catalytic antagonist of this invention is degraded (thereby releasing the catalytic antagonist to act on another receptor). Because the receptor is degraded it does not recover its activity.
- the catalytic antagonists are thus expected to provide greater efficacy at a lower dosage and to provide longer lasting activity at a particular dosage.
- this invention provides methods of improving the activity of a drug.
- the methods involve attaching the drug to an enzyme capable of degrading the target (e.g. receptor) to which the drug binds.
- Preferred enzymes in this context include hydrolases and even more preferably include proteases (e.g. serine proteases, metalloproteases, cysteine proteases, aspartyl proteases, etc.).
- the targeting moieties need not be limited to drugs.
- a wide variety of other targeting moieties are suitable as well and provide catalytic antagonists useful in a wide variety of therapeutic contexts.
- the targeting moiety can be a molecule that specifically binds to the CCR5 and/or CXCR2 receptors, commonly found on lymphocytes (e.g. T-cells).
- CCR5 and CXCR2 receptors are implicated in the infection of a cell by HIV and persons defective in one or more of these receptors typically demonstrate resistance to HIV infection.
- Targeted destruction/inhibition of either or both of these receptors e.g. by a catalytic antagonist comprising a CCR5 and/or CXCR2 specific targeting agent attached to a suitable hydrolase (e.g. subtilisin) will increase the target cell's resistance to HIV infection.
- a catalytic antagonist comprising a CCR5 and/or CXCR2 specific targeting agent attached to a suitable hydrolase (e.g. subtilisin) will increase the
- glycosidases involved in N-linked protein glycosylation can be specifically targeted (e.g. using an Aza-sugar targeting moiety) attached to a suitable hydrolase (e.g. subtilisin, pepsin, etc.).
- a catalytic antagonist will be of use in the treatment of HIV, herpes, other viruses, and various cancers.
- Catalytic antagonists comprising a sugar targeting moiety attached to a suitable hydrolase (e.g. subtilisin, pepsin, etc.) will be useful in the treatment of a wide variety of conditions, including inflammatory responses (e.g. associated with arthritis, septic shock, myocardial infarction, etc.), bacterial binding to cells and subsequent infection (e.g. H. pylori infection associated with ulcers).
- a suitable hydrolase e.g. subtilisin, pepsin, etc.
- bacterial binding to cells e.g. H. pylori infection associated with ulcers.
- the targeting moiety is a Gal ⁇ (1,4)Gal pathogenic E. coli infections can be blocked.
- lectin-directed catalytic antagonists can be used to inhibit biofilm formation in vivo or ex vivo.
- the targeting moiety can be a sialic acid sugar (or mimetics such as Rilenza (Glaxo-Wellcome) or the like).
- a suitable hydrolase e.g. subtilisin
- the catalytic antagonist can specifically target the sialidase activity of viruses such as influenza.
- the chimeric catalytic antagonists of this invention can also be used to specifically target hyperproliferative and/or invasive cells (e.g. metastatic cells).
- Various enzymes e.g. especially matrix metalloproteases
- These enzymes can be specifically targeted using a number of targeting moieties (e.g. crown ethers).
- suitable hydrolase e.g. a subtilisin
- the catalytic antagonist will degrade the target enzyme (e.g. metalloprotease) and thereby interfere with or eliminate the ability of a cell to invade, e.g. a basement membrane, thereby slowing the progression of a cancer.
- the catalytic antagonists of this invention can also be used to target and alter a variety of immune processes.
- a target directed at a T-cell receptor e.g. by using a MHC complex from a xenotransplant
- alpha-Gal epitope disaccharide Gal ⁇ (1,3)Gal
- known allergens e.g. various pollens or epitopes present on such allergens
- the chimeric molecules can be used in various drug delivery strategies to specifically target a therapeutic activity to a cell, organ, or tissue of interest.
- enzymes capable of converting prodrugs to their active form are attached to a targeting moiety (e.g. a tumor cell specific moiety) that localizes them to the site of desired activity (e.g. a tumor cell)
- a targeting moiety e.g. a tumor cell specific moiety
- various prodrugs are known to those of skill in the art and include, but are not limited to ganclovir activated by thymidine kinase, phosphenytoin converted to phenytoin by a phosphatase, depivefrin is converted to epinephrine by an esterase and the like.
- glucocerebrosidase may be directed, e.g. to spleen cells in the treatment of Gaucher's or Tay-Sachs disease.
- superoxide dismutase may be attached to liver cell specific targeting moieties so that it is targeted to liver tissue where it can provide anti-oxidant activity.
- the chimeric molecules of this invention can be used to target and destroy particular preselected molecules whether or not they have a biological activity.
- components of various soils or stains e.g. milk, blood, eggs, grass stains, oil stains, etc.
- avidin/egg protein can be specifically targeted by using a biotin as a targeting moiety to specifically directed, e.g. a protease to the site. The stain is degraded/digested and thereby released from the underlying substrate.
- Such specifically targeted chimeras are particularly in various cleaning formulations.
- the therapeutic chimeric molecules of this invention are useful for intravenous, parenteral, topical, oral, or local administration (e.g., by aerosol or transdermally).
- Particularly preferred modes of administration include intra-arterial injection, more preferably intra-peritoneal intra-hepatic artery injection or, where it is desired to deliver a composition to the brain, (e.g., for treatment of brain tumors) a carotid artery or an artery of the carotid system of arteries (e.g., occipital artery, auricular artery, temporal artery, cerebral artery, maxillary artery, etc.).
- the chimeric molecules are typically combined with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier (excipient) to form a pharmacological composition.
- Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers can contain a physiologically acceptable compound that acts, for example, to stabilize the composition or to increase or decrease the absorption of the agent.
- Physiologically acceptable compounds can include, for example, carbohydrates, such as glucose, sucrose, or dextrans, antioxidants, such as ascorbic acid or glutathione, chelating agents, low molecular weight proteins, compositions that reduce the clearance or hydrolysis of the anti-mitotic agents, or excipients or other stabilizers and/or buffers.
- physiologically acceptable compounds include wetting agents, emulsifying agents, dispersing agents or preservatives which are particularly useful for preventing the growth or action of microorganisms.
- Various preservatives are well known and include, for example, phenol and ascorbic acid.
- a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier including a physiologically acceptable compound depends, for example, on the route of administration of the chimeric molecule and on the particular physio-chemical characteristics of the agent.
- the pharmaceutical compositions can be administered in a variety of unit dosage forms depending upon the method of administration.
- unit dosage forms suitable for oral administration include powder, tablets, pills, capsules and lozenges.
- the chimeric molecules when administered orally, are preferably protected from digestion. This is typically accomplished either by complexing the subject molecule with a composition to render it resistant to acidic and enzymatic hydrolysis or by packaging the chimeric molecule agent in an appropriately resistant carrier such as a liposome.
- Means of protecting compounds from digestion are well known in the art (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,391,377 describing lipid compositions for oral delivery of therapeutic agents).
- Certain chimeric molecules of this invention may be only marginally soluble in aqueous solutions.
- these compositions are either delivered directly to the desired site (e.g. by injection, cannulization, or direct application during a surgical procedure) or they are solubilized in an acceptable excipient.
- compositions of this invention are useful for topical administration e.g., in surgical wounds to treat incipient tumors, neoplastic and metastatic cells and their precursors.
- the compositions are useful for parenteral administration, such as intravenous administration or administration into a body cavity or lumen of an organ.
- the compositions for administration will commonly comprise a solution of the chimeric molecule agent dissolved in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, preferably an aqueous carrier for water-soluble chimeric molecules.
- a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier preferably an aqueous carrier for water-soluble chimeric molecules.
- a variety of carriers can be used, e.g., buffered saline and the like. These solutions are sterile and generally free of undesirable matter.
- These compositions may be sterilized by conventional, well known sterilization techniques.
- the compositions may contain pharmaceutically acceptable auxiliary substances as required to approximate physiological conditions such as pH adjusting and buffering agents, toxicity adjusting agents and the like, for example, sodium acetate,
- concentration of chimeric molecule in these formulations can vary widely, and will be selected primarily based on fluid volumes, viscosities, body weight and the like in accordance with the particular mode of administration selected and the patient's needs. Actual methods for preparing administrable compositions will be known or apparent to those skilled in the art and are described in more detail in such publications as Remington's Pharmaceutical Science , 15th ed., Mack Publishing Company, Easton, Pa. (1980).
- compositions for typical chemotherapeutics are well known to those of skill in the art. Moreover, such dosages are typically advisorial in nature and may be adjusted depending on the particular therapeutic context, patient tolerance, etc. Single or multiple administrations of the compositions may be administered depending on the dosage and frequency as required and tolerated by the patient. In any event, the composition should provide a sufficient quantity of the proteins of this invention to effectively treat the patient.
- dosage for a typical pharmaceutical composition for intravenous administration would be about 0.01 to per patient per day. Dosages from 0.1 up to about 1000 mg per patient per day may be used, particularly when the drug is administered to a secluded site and not into the blood stream, such as into a body cavity or into a lumen of an organ.
- kits for the creation and/or use of the chimeric molecules of this invention comprise one or more containers containing one or more targeting moieties derivatized as methanesulfonates for coupling to a cysteine in an enzyme.
- the kits may comprise one or more enzymes, more preferably mutant enzymes having an inserted cysteine ready for coupling to a methanesulfonate derivatized targeting moiety. When provided in this manner the kits enable one or ordinary skill in the art to assemble the desired chimeric molecule for a particular use.
- one typically kit may include a multiplicity of methanesulfonate derivatized targeting moieties and one or more enzymes suitable for coupling.
- the desired enzyme is then reacted (as described herein) with the desired targeting moiety to produce the desired chimeric molecule.
- kits may additional comprise one or more of the reagents utilized in a typical coupling reaction.
- this invention provides one or more chimeric molecules (e.g. catalytic antagonists and/or redirected enzymes) of this invention.
- the chimeric molecules can be provided as a dry (e.g. lyophilized powder) or in solution and/or as an emulsion.
- the chimeric molecules are provided in, or along with, a pharmacological excipient and, optionally, may be provided in a unit dosage format.
- kits may optionally include any reagents and/or apparatus to facilitate the uses described herein.
- reagents include, but are not limited to buffers, organic solvents, labels, labeled antibodies, bioreactors, cells, etc.
- kits may include instructional materials containing directions (i.e., protocols) for the assembly of chimeric molecules of this invention and/or for the use thereof.
- instructional materials typically comprise written or printed materials they are not limited to such. Any medium capable of storing such instructions and communicating them to an end user is contemplated by this invention.
- Such media include, but are not limited to electronic storage media (e.g., magnetic discs, tapes, cartridges, chips), optical media (e.g., CD ROM), and the like.
- Such media may include addresses to internet sites that provide such instructional materials.
- Examples 1-4 demonstrates the highly specific selectivity of a catalytic antagonist of this invention in which the targeting moiety is a known enzyme inhibitor.
- Examples 5 through 7 detail the construction and evaluation of chimeric molecules in which the chimeric molecules are targeted to the binding protein lectin concanavalin A.
- Examples 8 through 10 detail the construction and evaluation of chimeric molecules in which the chimeric molecules are targeted to the binding protein avidin.
- Examples 11 and 12 detail the construction and evaluation of chimeric molecules in which the chimeric molecules are targeted to a monoclonal anti-biotin antibody IgG.
- Example 13 details the respective stoichiometry of these examples.
- the inhibitor(s) chosen as targeting moieties for this approach are strong inhibitor(s)/degraders of the target enzyme, but are poor inhibitors of the CMM.
- ADH alcohol dehydrogenase
- SBL subtilisin
- HLADH horse liver alcohol dehydrogenase
- N62C, L217C, S166C, and S156C mutants were modified with the MTS-pyrazole reagent 4 by reaction at pH 9.5 following the standard protocol. In all cases the resulting enzymes were active after modification and the data for amidase kinetics (substrate suc-AAPFpNA) and ESMS are shown in Table 2. TABLE 2 vKinetic constants for pyrazole-CMMs Pyrazole- Amidase Kinetics ESMS CMM k cat K M k cat /K M Calc.
- the S166C-S5-Pyrazole CMM shows the lowest k cat /K M ; about 9 times smaller than for SBL-WT.
- N62C-S-Pyrazole is slightly more active than the other pyrazole CMMs and its k cat is just 1.5 times smaller compared to SBL-WT. However it had the largest K M among all pyrazole-CMMs and its k cat /K M was about 2 times smaller compared to SBL-WT.
- the reaction was poured onto a pre-packed, pre-equilibrated G-25 Sephadex® PD10 column and eluted with 3.5 mL Quench Buffer (see below).
- the eluant was dialysed at 4° C. against 10 mM MES, 1 mM CaCl 2 pH 5.8 (2 13 1L, 2 13 45 min).
- the resulting dialysate was flash frozen in liquid nitrogen and stored at ⁇ 18° C.
- pH 7.5 140 mM HEPES, 2 mM CaCl 2
- Quench Buffer Reactions at pH 7.5-9.5: 5 mM MES 1 mM CaCl 2 pH 6.5
- CMMs Prior to ES-MS analysis CMMs were purified by FPLC (BioRad, Biologic System) on a Source 15 RPC matrix (17-0727-20 from Pharmacia) with 5% acetonitrile, 0.01% TFA as the running buffer and eluted with 80% acetonitrile, 0.01% TFA in a one step gradient.
- FPLC BioRad, Biologic System
- MTS reagent was added and the reaction then proceeded as for flash-frozen mutant solutions, using the appropriate quench buffer.
- Michaelis-Menten constants were measured at 25° C. by curve fitting (Grafit® 3.03) of the initial rate data determined at eight concentrations (31.25 ⁇ M-2.0 mM) of the succinyl-AAPF-SBn substrate, followed indirectly using Ellman's reagent in 0.1 M Tris.HCl, containing 0.005 vol % Tween-80, 1 vol % 37.5 mM Ellman's reagent in DMSO, pH 8.6.
- Targeted association of CMMs with HLADH via the pyrazole inhibitor should lead to selective hydrolysis. If hydrolysis of the HLADH takes place, the oxidoreductase activity of the HLADH should be diminished or eradicated after a certain time of incubation with our CMMs. To demonstrate this, the “Targeting Assay” as described above was carried out again after 4 h incubation. Remaining HLADH activity was determined by addition of cyclohexanol as substrate. The results are shown in FIG. 5.
- subtilisins e.g. SBL
- CMM site directed mutagenesis chemical modification
- HLADH activity was monitored by periodically withdrawing a portion of the digestion mixture, and assessing the ability of the aliquot to oxidize cyclohexanol to cyclohexanone.
- the reaction course was monitored by observing the change of NAD + to NADH at 340 nm as cyclohexanol was oxidized.
- Alkaline phosphatase (AP) activity was monitored by periodically withdrawing a portion of the digestion mixture, and assessing the ability of the aliquot to hydrolyze p-nitrophenyl phosphate to inorganic phosphate and p-nitrophenolate. The reaction course was monitored by observing the appearance of p-nitrophenolate at 405 nm.
- HLADH activity after incubation * % HLADH activity as % of initial (0 h) value vial 0 h 1 h 2 h 3 h 72 h AP + HLADH + no S166C- 100 117 108 109 114 pyrazole AP + HLADH + S166C-pyrazole 100 22 19 16 2 HLADH alone 100 108 74 69 89 HLADH + S166C-pyrazole 100 54 33 30 3
- Glycine (0.1 mol) was dissolved in water (ca. 800 mL), and MgCl 2 (1 mL of a 1 M solution in MQ water) and ZnCl 2 (1 mL of a 0.1 M solution in MQ water) were added. The pH was adjusted to 9.0 with ca. 5 M NaOH solution, and the mixture was made up to 1 L.
- Triethanolamine (0.05 moles, 7.5 g), NaCl (3 moles, 175.5 g), MgCl2 (0.1 mL of 1 M solution) and ZnCl2 (0.1 mL of 1M solution) were dissolved in MQ water (ca. 900 mL). The pH was adjusted to 7.4 with ca 2N HCl and the resulting solution made up to 1 L.
- MgCl 2 (0.1 mL of a 1 M solution in MQ water) and ZnCl 2 (0.1 mL of a 0.1 M solution in MQ water) were added to a 100 mL volumetric flask, and the flask was made up to the mark with pH 8.6 0.1 M TRIS-HCl buffer containing 0.05% Tween.
- Horse liver alcohol dehydrogenase (Sigma A-9589, EC 1.1.1.1, 8 mg of ca. 50% w/w protein) was dissolved in pH 7.4 TRIS (0.8 mL) to give a 10 mg/mL solution.
- Alkaline phosphatase (Boehringer Mannheim 713 023, EC 3.1.3.1, ca. 950 ⁇ L as received in 50% w/v glycerol: buffer) was diluted with pH 7.8 buffer (ca. 15 mL), and was concentrated at 4° C. to 10-20% of its original volume using a Centriprep concentrator. A further 15 mL of pH 7.8 buffer was added, and the sample was concentrated once more. This process was repeated a further 3 times using pH 9.0 assay buffer for dilutions. After the third concentration the concentrate (ca. 1.85 mL) was collected and was stored on ice. This procedure was necessary to remove glycerol, which is a substrate for HLADH.
- PNPP Solution p-Nitrophenyl Phosphate Solution
- a portion of solution (65 ⁇ L) was withdrawn from an incubation vial and was then injected into a micro-cuvette containing pH 9.0 assay buffer (200 ⁇ L). The cuvette was incubated at 25° C. for 2 minutes, and then cyclohexanol solution (30 ⁇ L) was added. The absorbance at 340 nm was then monitored for 300 s, and the O.D. change per second up to 0.2 absorbance units was recorded.
- a portion (20 ⁇ L) was withdrawn from an incubation vial and was then injected into pH 8.6 buffer (980 ⁇ L). The mixture was vortexed. 10 ⁇ L was the removed from the mixture, and was injected into a cuvette containing 990 ⁇ L of PNPP solution incubated at 25° C. The absorbance change at 405 nm was monitored for 150 s, and the O.D. change per second up to 1 Absorbance unit was recorded.
- HLADH solutions were incubated in the presence of WT-SBL, S166C-pyrazole or S156C-pyrazole.
- a control experiment was performed in the absence of any SBL-based enzyme (HLADH alone).
- the HLADH activities of the four mixtures were periodically assayed (see experimental)—see Table 11.
- % HLADH activity compared to the initial “HLADH alone” value * HLADH + HLADH + HLADH + HLADH + HLADH WT S166C- S156C- time/h alone SBL pyrazole pyrazole 0 100 97 89 67 1 99 89 65 21 3 98 82 49 12 20 93 70 17 5
- the initial drop in HLADH activity caused on addition of the pyrazole-CMMs reflects the ability of the CMMs to target and thus inhibit HLADH.
- S156C-pyrazole and, to a lesser extent, S166C-pyrazole clearly cause dramatic reductions in HLADH activity on incubation.
- the pyrazole-CMMs were used in less than stoichiometric amounts with respect to HLADH—4 eq.
- HLADH activity is seen to drop from 67% to 5% over 20 h, representing a 13.5-fold reduction of HLADH activity over-and-above the maximum inhibitory effect of the pyrazole moiety.
- WT-SBL causes a mere 1.4-fold reduction of HLADH activity over the same 20 h period, despite its enhanced amidase specific activity when compared to the pyrazole-CMMs.
- Glycine (0.1 mol) was dissolved in water (ca. 800 mL). A solution of Tween 80 (50 mL of a 0.1% v/v in MQ water) was added, and the pH was adjusted to 9.0 with ca. 5 M NaOH solution. The mixture was made up to 1 L with MQ water.
- TRIS (302.9 mg, 2.5 mmol) was dissolved in MQ water (ca. 40 mL). The pH was adjusted to 7.4 with ca. 1 M HCl solution, and the volume of the mixture was made up to 50 mL with MQ water.
- Horse liver alcohol dehydrogenase (Sigma A-9589, Lot 58H7004, EC 1.1.1.1, 8.45 mg of 52.4% w/w protein—according to manufacturer's Biuret titration) was dissolved in pH 7.4 TRIS (0.845 mL) to give a 5.24 mg/mL solution of active protein.
- HLADH (50 ⁇ L) solution was added to pH 7.4 TRIS (450 ⁇ L) to give a tenfold diluted solution.
- Bradford (Bio-Rad) protein determination was performed on this diluted sample, and yielded a protein concentration of 0.616 mg/mL. This translates to a concentration of 6.16 mg/mL in the original HLADH stock.
- NAD + (332 mg) was dissolved in pH 9.0 assay buffer (10 mL) to give a 33.2 mg/mL solution.
- WT-SBL (1.88 mg of dry powder, 73% w/w active protein) was dissolved in pH 5.8, 10 mM MES, 2 mM CaCl 2 “storage buffer” (500 ⁇ L) to give a 2.74 mg/mL solution of active WT-SBL.
- S156C-pyrazole and S166C-pyrazole were previously titrated with PMSF: their concentrations were 2.5 mg/mL and 3.62 mg/mL respectively.
- the tubes were kept on ice until the HLADH activity of each tube had been assayed in order to give a “time zero” value for each tube (see below for assay protocol).
- the tubes were then incubated on a water bath at 35° C. Periodically, 700 ⁇ L of reaction mixture with withdrawn from each falcon tube, the aliquots were placed in individual eppendorf tubes, and the eppendorf tubes were stored on ice. The content of each eppendorf tube was then assayed for HLADH activity (see below).
- reaction mixture 650 ⁇ L was injected into a cuvette containing pH 9.0 assay buffer (2.00 mL). The cuvette was incubated at 25° C. for 2 minutes, and then cyclohexanol solution (300 ⁇ L) was added. After a 10 s delay, the absorbance at 340 nm was monitored for 300 s. Tthe O.D. change per second up to 0.2 absorbance units was used to calculate an initial rate.
- each vial contained one of: buffer (no SBL added), WT-SBL, S156C-pyrazole or S166C-pyrazole.
- Alkaline phosphatase is clearly not very susceptible to hydrolysis by WT-SBL or Pyrazole-CMMs. HLADH activity is not significantly diminished on incubation in the absence of SBL or in the presence of WT-SBL. However, in the presence of S156C-pyrazole or S166C-pyrazole HLADH activity is seen to diminish rapidly.
- Glycine (0.1 mol) was dissolved in water (ca. 800 mL). Magnesium chloride solution (1 mL of a 1 M solution) and zinc chloride solution (1 mL of a 0.1 M solution) were added to the glycine solution. A solution of Tween 80 (50 mL of a 0.1% v/v in MQ water) was added to the mixture, and the pH was adjusted to 9.0 with ca. 5 M NaOH solution. The mixture was made up to 1 L with MQ water.
- Glycine (0.1 mol) was dissolved in water (ca. 800 mL).
- Magnesium chloride solution (1 mL of a 1 M solution) and zinc chloride solution (1 mL of a 0.1 M solution) were added to the glycine solution, and the of the mixture pH was adjusted to 9.0 with ca. 5 M NaOH solution.
- the mixture was made up to 1 L with MQ water.
- TRIS (302.9 mg, 2.5 mmol) was dissolved in MQ water (ca. 40 mL). The pH was adjusted to 7.4 with ca. 1 M HCl solution, and the volume of the mixture was made up to 50 mL with MQ water.
- TRIS (6.057 g, 0.05 mol) was dissolved in MQ water (ca. 800 mL).
- MQ water ca. 800 mL
- Magnesium chloride solution (1 mL of a 1 M solution
- zinc chloride solution (1 mL of a 0.1 M solution) were added to the TRIS solution, and the of the mixture pH was adjusted to 7.4 with ca. 1 M HCl solution.
- the mixture was made up to 1 L with MQ water.
- pH 8.6 ca. 0.1 M TRIS-HCl Buffer with 0.05% Tween, 1 mM Mg2+ and 0.1 mM Zn2+(PH 8.6 Buffer)
- MgCl 2 (0.1 mL of a 1 M solution in MQ water) and ZnCl 2 (0.1 mL of a 0.1 M solution in MQ water) were added to a 100 mL volumetric flask, and the flask was made up to the mark with pH 8.6 0.1 M TRIS-HCl buffer containing 0.05% Tween (standard amidase kinetics buffer).
- Horse liver alcohol dehydrogenase (Sigma A-9589, Lot 58H7004, EC 1.1.1.1, 3.77 mg of 52.4% w/w protein—according to manufacturer's Biuret titration) was dissolved in pH 7.4 TRIS (0.377 mL) to give a 5.24 mg/mL solution of active protein.
- NAD + 39.15 mg was dissolved in pH 9.0 assay buffer (1.179 ML) to give a 33.2 mg/mL solution.
- WT-SBL (1.88 mg of dry powder, 73% w/w active protein) was dissolved in pH 5.8, 10 nM MES, 2 mM CaCl 2 “storage buffer” (500 ⁇ L) to give a 2.74 mg/mL solution of active WT-SBL. This solution was diluted four-fold with pH 5.8, 10 mM MES, 2 mM CaCl 2 “storage buffer” to give a 0.685 mg/mL solution.
- S156C-pyrazole and S166C-pyrazole were previously titrated with PMSF: their concentrations were 2.5 mg/mL and 3.62 mg/mL respectively. These stock solutions were diluted four-fold with pH 5.8, 10 mM MES, 2 mM CaCl 2 “storage buffer” to give 0.63mg/mL and 0.91 mg/mL solutions of S156C-pyrazole and S166C-pyrazole, respectively.
- PNPP Solution p-Nitrophenyl Phosphate Solution
- the tubes were kept on ice until aliquots had been withdrawn from each tube to establish initial HLADH and alkaline phosphatase activities. These activities were used to give “time zero” values for each tube (see below for assay protocols). The tubes were then incubated on a water bath at 35° C. Periodically, aliquots of reaction mixture were withdrawn from each eppendorf tube in order to assay HLADH and alkaline phosphatase activities.
- a portion (10 ⁇ L) was withdrawn from an incubation vial and was then injected into pH 8.6 buffer (490 ⁇ L). The mixture was vortexed. 10 ⁇ L was the rremoved from the mixture, and was injected into a cuvette containing 990 ⁇ L of PNPP solution incubated at 25° C. The absorbance change at 405 nm was monitored for 120 s, and the O.D. change per second up to 1.0 Absorbance unit was recorded.
- glycosylated CMMs useful for the we have prepared 11 mono- and disaccharide methanethiosulfonates (FIG. 13) bearing different carbohydrates which allow the preparation of a large number glycosylated CMMs for use, e.g. as lectin-directed proteases.
- a number of chemically modified enzymes having chemically conjugated carbohydrate moieties are described in PCT Application WO 00001712 entitled “Chemically modified proteins with a carbohydrate moiety.
- This example describes a highly effective lectin assay that has allowed us to start a screen of the ability of sugar-modified CMMs to degrade the lectin Concanavalin A in the manner shown schematically below (FIG. 14A, FIG. 14B, and FIG. 14C).
- S156C-sugar CMMs which contain surface exposed sugar groups were chosen initially.
- biotinylated lectin was incubated with glyco-CMM and compared with samples incubated with GG36-WT. To allow comparison, equal amounts of active enzyme were used. These samples were also incubated both with and without the decoy protein disulfide scrambled-RNaseA, in order to measure the selectivity of these enzymes for the lectin over the decoy.
- GG36-WT The higher rate of hydrolysis by GG36-WT is consistent with its higher k cat /K M value towards Suc-AAPF-pNA (k cat /K M for GG36 of 209 s ⁇ 1 mM ⁇ 1 , as compared with 112 and 85 s ⁇ 1 mM ⁇ 1 for S156C-S-Et-Man and S156C-S-EtMan(Ac) 4 , respectively).
- FIG. 15A-FIG. 15D A more detailed examination of FIG. 15A-FIG. 15D reveals that
- the assay was performed as for method 1 except 100 ⁇ L aliquots of concanavalin replaced by 100 ⁇ L of Milli Q water. Results are shown in Table 27. TABLE 27 Assay of filtrate. Control without lectin. HABA/ HABA/ HABA/ % of Max Avidin Avidin Avidin Incub. Biotin Total % of Max Total Vial Before a / After b / Diff./ Time/ Release/ Protein/ Biotin/ Protein/ No.
- biotin-MTS reagent 1 was synthesized.
- Biotinol (4) was elaborated, according to our established preparative procedure, to the target biotin-MTS via the corresponding primary mesylate and bromide.
- the use of MsCl led to only a moderate yield of mesylate as a result of competing formation of primary chloride. Consequently, biotinol (4) was treated with mesylic anhydride in pyridine/DCM, then LiBr in refluxing acetone and finally NaSSO 2 Me in DMF to give target biotin-MTS1 in 54% yield over 3 steps (37% overall yield from (+)-biotin (2)). Attempts to scale up this synthesis gave reduced yields.
- 1,1′-Dicarbonylimidazole 360 mg, 2.22 mmol was added to a stirred solution of (+)-biotin (2) (540 mg, 2.2 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) under N 2 and the resulting solution heated until evolution of CO 2 ceased (approx 30 min.). The solution was cooled to RT and stirred for a further 2 h, during which time a white solid precipitated from solution. A solution of N-hydroxysuccinimide (260 mg, 2.26 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) was added and the mixture stirred.
- NaBH 4 50 mg, 1.32 mmol was added to a suspension of 3 (170 mg, 0.5 mmol) stirred in THF/HMPA (40: 1, 41 mL) under nitrogen. After 4.5 h the volume of reaction solvent was reduced and the resulting residue quenched with water. The residue was dried further under vacuum and purified by flash chromatography (MeOH: CHCl 3 , 1: 19) to give 4 (17 mg, 15%) as a white solid.
- (+)-Biotin (2) (196 mg, 0.8 mmol) was dissolved in pyridine (5 mL) by careful warming at 80° C. under nitrogen. The resulting solution was added dropwise to a suspension of LiAlH 4 (196 mg, 5.15 mmol) in freshly distilled dry ether (25 mL) under nitrogen. After 30 min. the resulting mixture was heated to reflux. After a further 40 min., tlc (MeOH:CHCl 3 , 1:9) showed the formation of a major product (R f 0.35) from starting material (R f 0.45). The reaction was cooled and remaining LiAlH 4 quenched by the dropwise addition of water.
- Biotin-MTS reagent 1 was used to prepare the biotinylated CMMs of N62C, L217C, S166C, and S156C mutants, by reaction at pH 9.5 following the standard protocol. In all cases the resulting enzymes are active after modification.
- N62C-S-Biotin CMM had a slightly decreased k cat compared to SBL-WT and has the highest K M of all the biotin-CMMs, however it was still the most active of these biotinylated CMMs.
- the S1 66C-S-Biotin CMM shows the smallest k cat /K M , which is about four times lower than for SBL-WT.
- the biotin-CMMs have an approximately four fold lower k cat compared to SBL-WT with the S156C-S-Biotin CMM as the only exception.
- the k cat of the S156C-S-Biotin CMM is about two fold lower than for SBL-WT and therefore two fold higher compared to the other biotin-CMMs.
- S156C-S-Biotin CMM is not the most active of all biotinylated CMMs since it has also the highest K M value.
- the k cat /K M of S156C-S-Biotin CMM and L217C-S-Biotin CMM are very similar, about 3-fold lower than for SBL-WT, although k cat and K M show big differences.
- the K M values of the biotin-CMMs were slightly higher for the S166C-S-Biotin CMM and the S156C-S-Biotin CMM compared to SBL-WT. Whereas, the values for the N62C-S-Biotin CMM and the L217C-S-Biotin CMM are about two times smaller compared to SBL-WT.
- the N62C-S-Biotin CMM has the lowest K M of all the biotinylated CMMs, and is 2.6 fold lower than SBL-WT. Although it also has the lowest k cat of the biotin-CMMs, it has the highest catalytic activity, which is still 1.8 fold lower then SBL-WT.
- biotinylated proteins will bind to avidin only when the biotin is separated from the surface of the macromolecule to which it is covalently linked by at least five methylene groups (Green (1970) Meth. Enzymol . 18A: 418-424). Furthermore, Wilchek et al. observed that proteolytic enzymes are not able to cleave avidin. Even when the proteases is biotinylated, avidin is not cleaved (Bayer et al. (1990) Biochemistry , 29: 11274-11279).
- (+)-biotin should be better available to bind to avidin than the biotinylated side-chain of our CMMs we expected a smaller or, for the best case, the same HABA release for all biotin-CMMs compared to the biotin/WT mixture.
- Both SBL-WT and S156C-S-Biotin are able to hydrolyze avidin. Since the enzyme concentrations were calculated for equal catalytic activity with the standard amidase substrate suc-AAPF-pNA the hydrolysis values can be compared directly. Therefore we are able to demonstrate not only that avidin is hydrolyzed by SBL-proteases but is also more efficiently hydrolyzed by a biotinylated protease. S156C-S-Biotin produces 45% more protein fragments after 240 min than GG36-WT.
- S156C-S-Biotin produces 72% more protein fragments after 240 min than SBL-WT.
- decoy protein [0.05 mg] the amount of total protein produced increases drastically for the WT enzyme (23% after 240 min) whereas the production of total protein does not change significantly for the biotin-CMM.
- N62C-S-Biotin provides nearly the same amount of protein fragments as SBL-WT after 240 min. However, in the presence of a decoy the N62C CMM gives only 5 % more protein release after 240 min and is therefore clearly more selective than SBL-WT (23% more protein fragments after 240 min). Those results suggests that the biotin side-chain of the N62C CMM is less available since overall protein hydrolysis is less effective by this CMM compared to S156C CMM which contains a surface exposed biotin moiety. However, since in the N62 CMM the biotin side-chain is adjacent to the catalytic center its avidin hydrolysis selectivity is nearly as effective as for S156C-S-Biotin.
- the S166C CMM gives a 7% higher protein release compared to SBL-WT but is fairly unselective in the presence of a decoy protein [18% protein fragments compared to 23% for SBL-WT after 240 min]. Although this enzyme proved to be the second best of the biotin-CMMs in the “Avidin Targeting Assay”, it is less selective than the N62C CMM with respect to the “Avidin Hydrolysis Assay”. Presumably the biotin side chain buried in the S 1 pocket is available for avidin targeting but conformationally not very favorable for the effective and selective catalysis of avidin hydrolysis.
- Antibodies to biotin are commercially available as either free antibody or as an enzyme-conjugate. We chose an anti-biotin conjugated to alkaline phosphatase as our model target antibody. Using the standard Enzyme Linked Immuno-sorbent Assay (ELISA)-technique, we could demonstrate the ability of our CMMs to target the antibody. The experiment is outlined schematically in FIG. 17.
- ELISA Enzyme Linked Immuno-sorbent Assay
- the phosphatase substrate [a solution of p-nitrophenylphosphate disodium salt (PNPP) in glycine buffer pH 10.4] was added and the reaction was carried out at 4° C. The release of p-nitrophenolate was determined visually using a 96-well plate (FIG. 17).
- PNPP p-nitrophenylphosphate disodium salt
- Biotin-MTS was prepared according to the procedure described in Example 8.
- Phosphate buffered saline (PBS) solution was prepared from 8 g NaCl, 0.2 g KCl, 1.44 g Na 2 HPO 4 , 0.24 g KH 2 PO 4 in 1 L water, adjust pH to 7.2 with 1N HCl and was stored at room temperature.
- 10% Sodium azide solution was prepared from 10 g NaN 3 in 100 mL water and was stored at room temperature.
- 3% BSA in PBS solution was prepared from 3 g bovine serum albumin (fraction V) in 100 mL water, then 0.2 mL 10% NaN 3 solution added and was stored at 4° C.
- Phosphate buffered saline with Tween (PBST) solution was prepared from 0.5 mL of Tween 80 in 1 L PBS solution.
- Anti-biotin solution (1:30,000) solution was prepared from 16.67 ⁇ L anti-biotin (Sigma A-6561 clone BN-34, conc. 1.15 mg/mL) in 50 mL 3% BSA/PBS and was stored at 4° C.
- 0.1 M glycine buffer pH 10.4 solution was prepared from 7.51 g glycine, 203 mg MgCl 2 H 2 O, 136 mg ZnCl 2 in 1 L water. The pH was adjusted to pH 10.4 with 10 N NaOH.
- p-Nitrophenylphosphate 1 mg/mL solution was prepared from I tablet PNPP (Sigma N-2765) (20 mg) in 20 mL of 0.1 M glycine buffer and was stored at 4° C. 0.06 M PMSF solution was prepared from 47.2 mg ⁇ -toluenesulfonyl fluoride (PMSF) in 449.2 ⁇ L EtOH and was stored at 0° C.
- the following enzymes were used: WT (1mg/mL), N62C-Biotin (0.97 mg/mL), S156C-Biotin (0.71 mg/mL), S166C-Biotin (1.09 mg/mL) and L217C-Biotin (1.0 mg/mL).
- Tris Buffer pH 8.6 consisted of 1.21 mg Tris in 100 mL water. The pH was adjusted to pH 8.6 with conc. HCl.
- Ribonuclease A 5 mg/mL consisted of 5 mg of ribonuclease A (with scrambled disulfide bonds, Sigma R-2638) in 1 mL water.
- the plate was incubated at 4° C. overnight. The remaining enzyme solutions were removed using a pipette. Then, BSA/PBS (3%, 100 ⁇ L) was added to each well and the plate was incubated at RT for 1 h. The BSA solution was removed and the plate was dried by flicking and banging it on layers of paper towel. PMSF (10 ⁇ L) was added to columns 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 row A and B. After this procedure the plate was washed with PBST (2 ⁇ ) and dried as described previously. Anti-Biotin solution (30 ⁇ L) was added to each well, except for 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 C and D, and the plate was kept for 2 h at 4° C. to minimize the proteolysis of antibody by the enzymes.
- the anti-Biotin solution was removed, the plate was washed with PBST (4 ⁇ ) to remove unbound antibody, and was dried in order to remove unbound antibody.
- the phosphate buffer was removed and the pH was adjusted for alkaline phosphatase activity by washing the plate with glycine buffer (0.1 M, pH 10.4) (2 ⁇ ) and drying afterwards. Then, glycine buffer and PNPP solution were added to the wells in the following manner:
- Eppendorf vials were filled according to Table 43. The vials were then incubated at 35° C. in a thermostat-controlled water bath for 60 and 240 min. The contents of each vial were then placed in the top of a Centricon YM-3 filter (Amicon, MWCO 3000, pre-rinsed with 2 mL Milli-Q water centrifuged at 3750 rpm for 90 min) and centrifuged at 3750 rpm for 60 min. The filtrates were then assayed by measuring A 280 (zeroed against with Milli-Q water). The results are as shown in Table 53.
- a solution of biotin (1.94 mg/mL) in TRIS (pH 8.6) was prepared. 10 ⁇ L of this solution was added to 779.5 ⁇ L of TRIS (this solution will be referred to as B/79 throughout).
- An Eppendorf vial containing TRIS (700.5 ⁇ L) and anti-biotin (37.5 ⁇ L, 1.3 mg/mL immunoglobulin, alkaline phosphatase labelled) was prepared. S156C-biotin. (12.15 ⁇ L, 0.71 mg/mL) was added to the vial. The vial was vortexed, and was placed in a water bath (35° C.).
- a solution of biotin (1.94 mg/mL) in TRIS (pH 8.6) was prepared. The solution was diluted twenty-fold (referred to throughout as B/20). Eppendorfyvials were filled according to Table 55, and incubated for varying times at 35° C. TABLE 55 Volumes used for control experiments (each prepared in quadruplicate) Contents of each vial for each time point anti-biotin S156C- B/20 Experiment TRIS ( ⁇ L) ( ⁇ L) biotin ( ⁇ L) ( ⁇ L) Ab then B/20. Incubate 693 37.5 0 20 Ab then B/20, then CMM. 681 37.5 12.15 20 Incubate
- catalytic antagonists were found to function substoichoimetrically: Pyrazole CMM-HLADH (Example 2), pyrazole CMM-HLADH in the presence of AP (Example 3), substoichiometric pyrazole CMM-HLADH (Example 4), sugar CMM-biotinylated Con A (Examples 7 and 8), biotin CMM-Avidin, and biotin CMM-anti-biotin IgG.
Landscapes
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
- Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
- Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
- Public Health (AREA)
- Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
- General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
- Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
- Organic Chemistry (AREA)
- Diabetes (AREA)
- Epidemiology (AREA)
- Neurology (AREA)
- Biomedical Technology (AREA)
- Neurosurgery (AREA)
- Pain & Pain Management (AREA)
- Endocrinology (AREA)
- Molecular Biology (AREA)
- Nanotechnology (AREA)
- Cardiology (AREA)
- Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
- Hematology (AREA)
- Immunology (AREA)
- Pulmonology (AREA)
- Biophysics (AREA)
- Obesity (AREA)
- Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
- Medical Informatics (AREA)
- General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Biotechnology (AREA)
- Oncology (AREA)
- Cell Biology (AREA)
- Communicable Diseases (AREA)
- Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
- Psychiatry (AREA)
Abstract
This invention provides chimeric molecules that are catalytic antagonists of a target molecule. The catalytic antagonists of this invention preferably comprise a targeting moiety attached to an enzyme that degrades the molecule specifically bound by the targeting moiety. The catalytic antagonists of this invention thus bind to a target recognized by the targeting moiety (e.g., a receptor) the enzyme component of the chimera then degrades all or part of the target. This typically results in a reduction or loss of activity of the target and release of the chimeric molecule. The chimeric molecule is then free to attack and degrade another target molecule.
Description
- This application claims priority to and benefit of U.S. Ser. No. 60/131,362, filed on Apr. 28, 1999, as provided for under 35 U.S.C. §119 and/or 35 U.S.C. §120, as appropriate. U.S. Ser. No. 60/131,362 is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety for all purposes.
- [Not Applicable ]
- This invention relates to the field of chimeric molecules. In particular this invention provides novel chimeric molecules that act as catalytic antagonists of targets (e.g. receptors, enzymes, lectins, etc.).
- In a chimeric molecule, two or more molecules that exist separately in their native state are joined together to form a single molecule having the desired functionality of all of its constituent molecules. Frequently, one of the constituent molecules of a chimeric molecule is a “targeting molecule”. The targeting molecule is a molecule such as an antibody that specifically binds to its corresponding target and, by virtue of the targeting molecule, the chimeric molecule will specifically bind (target) cells and tissues bearing the target (e.g. the epitope) to which the targeting moiety is directed.
- Another constituent of the chimeric molecule may be an “effector molecule”. The effector molecule refers to a molecule that is to be specifically transported to the target to which the chimeric molecule is specifically directed.
- Chimeric molecules comprising a targeting moiety attached to an effector moiety have been used in a wide variety of contexts. Thus, for example, chimeric molecules comprising a targeting moiety joined to a cytotoxic “effector molecule” have frequently been used to target and kill tumor cells (see, e.g., Pastan et al.,Ann. Rev. Biochem., 61: 331-354 (1992). Other chimeric molecules comprising a targeting moiety attached to angiogenesis inhibitors have been used to inhibit tumor growth and/or proliferation. Conversely, angiogenesis inducers) have been proposed for the treatment of atherosclerosis. Other uses of chimeric molecules have involved the delivery of intrabodies, intracellularly expressed antibodies that then bind to an intracellular protein, the specific delivery of vectors (e.g. for gene therapy), or the creation of tissue-specific liposomes.
- Typically, the target recognized by the targeting moiety is not the desired site of action of the effector molecule. Thus, for example, in the case of chimeric cytotoxins used to treat cancers (e.g. IL4-PE, B1FvPE38, etc., see, e.g., Benhar & Pastan (1995)Clin. Canc. Res., 1: 1023-1029, Thrush et al. (1996) Ann. Rev. Immunol., 14: 49-71, etc.) the targeting moiety specifically binds to a target on the surface of the cell. The chimeric molecule is then internalized into the cell and the effector molecule (e.g., ricin, abrin, Diptheria toxin, Pseudomonas exotoxin) is transported to the cytosol of the cell where it exerts its characteristic activity (e.g. ADP ribosylation in the case of Pseudomonas exotoxin).
- Similarly, targeted liposomes are typically internalized through a receptor-mediated process or through the action of the lipid. Targeted intrabodies and gene therapy vectors are also internalized for expression within the cell. In addition, a common goal in the design of targeted chimeric molecules has been the increase of binding specificity and avidity. It is generally believed that, by increasing avidity and specificity the concentration of the chimeric molecule to achieve a given result will decrease. Thus, release of the chimeric molecule from its target is generally viewed as undesirable.
- Because the chimeric molecule is typically internalized (in the case of targeted cells) and the activity of the effector molecule is directed to a molecule other than the specifically recognized target, chimeric molecules typically act in a “stoichiometric” manner. That is, each chimeric molecule is essentially consumed upon interaction with its “substrate” and activity of the chimeric molecule is unavailable for subsequent reactions. As a consequence chimeric molecules must be maintained at relatively high level for efficacy and a recurring problem of chimeric moieties, particularly in in vivo applications is the inability to maintain elevated serum levels of the chimeric molecule over therapeutically significant periods of time and the increased (e.g. non-specific) toxicity caused by the high dosages that must be utilized.
- Attempts at solving these problems have focused on reducing the immunogenicity of the chimera (e.g. by using humanized antibodies, antibody fragments, small fusion proteins, etc.) or “masking” the chimeric molecule (e.g. “stealth” liposomes). In particular, the impetus to reduced immunogenicity, improved tumor penetration, and the like, has led to the increasing use of fusion proteins instead of chemically coupled moieties in chimeric molecules (see, e.g., Pastan, (1992)Ann. Rev. Biochem., 61: 331-354; Thrush (1996) Ann. Rev. Immunol., 14: 49-71; Brinkmann and Pastan (1994) Biochem. Biophys. Acta, 1198: 27-45, etc.), but have not addressed the actual stoichiometry or kinetics of the chimera.
- This invention provides a novel approach to the design of chimeric molecules. In one embodiment, the molecules of this invention specifically bind to a target molecule and degrade that bound molecule. In preferred embodiments, this results in a loss of activity (e.g. biological activity) of the target molecule and also results in the release of the chimeric molecule so that it is free to find and degrade another target. In this manner the chimeric molecule is “regenerated” and essentially catalytic. Because a single chimeric molecule can attack and degrade an essentially limitless number of targets, the so called “catalytic antagonists” of this invention are highly effective at relatively low dosages.
- Thus, in one embodiment, this invention provides a catalytic antagonist of a target molecule (e.g. an enzyme, a receptor, etc.). The antagonist comprises a targeting moiety that specifically binds to the target molecule and the targeting moiety is attached to an enzyme that degrades the target molecule to reduce binding of the target molecule to its cognate ligand. In particularly preferred embodiments, the degradation of the target molecule also reduces binding of the antagonist to the target molecule. Thus, in these embodiments, the antagonist is released from the target thereby allowing the antagonist to bind and degrade another target molecule.
- In particularly preferred embodiments the targeting moiety is joined to the enzyme through the sulfur group on a cysteine and the cysteine is a naturally occurring cysteine in the enzyme or a cysteine introduced into the enzyme (e.g. substituted for a native amino acid other than cysteine in the enzyme). In certain preferred embodiments, the cysteine is a cysteine that is substituted for a native amino acid other than cysteine in or near a subsite comprising a substrate binding site of the enzyme. In some embodiments, the cysteine is a cysteine that is substituted for an amino acid forming a substrate binding site.
- Preferred enzymes include, but are not limited to a protease, an esterase, an amidase, a peptidase, a lactamase, a cellulase, an oxidase, an oxidoreductase, a reductase, a transferase, a hydrolase, an isomerase, a ligase, a lipase, a phospholipase, a phosphatase, a kinase, a sulfatase, a lysozyme, a glycosidase, a nuclease, an aldolase, a ketolase, a lyase, a cyclase, a reverse transcriptase, a hyaluronidase, an amylase, a cerebrosidase, and a chitinase. In a particularly preferred embodiment, the enzyme is a serine hydrolase. In an even more preferred embodiment, the enzyme is a subtilisin-type serine hydrolase (e.g. aBacillus lentus subtilisin) and said cysteine is substituted for an amino acid in or near a subsite selected from the group consisting of an S1 subsite, an S1′ subsite, and an S2 subsite.
- In a particularly preferred embodiment the enzyme is aBacillus lentus subtilisin. In preferred embodiments, the cysteine is substituted for an amino acid in a subtillisin, where the amino acid corresponds to a reference residue in a Bacillus lentus subtilisin, where the reference residue is at or near a residue selected from the group consisting of residue 156, residue 166, residue 217, residue 222, residue 62, residue 96, residue 104, residue 107, residue 189, and residue 209.
- In another embodiment the enzyme is a chymotrypsin-type serine protease and the cysteine is substituted for the amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in a mature trypsin (Protein Data Bank entry 1TPP), wherein said reference residue is at or near a residue selected from the group consisting of Tyr94, Leu99, Gln175, Asp189, Ser190, Gln192, Phe41, Lys60, Tyr151, Ser214, and Lys224.
- In still another embodiment the enzyme is an alpha/beta type serine hydrolase and the cysteine is substituted for the amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in aCandida antartica lipase (Protein Data Bank entry 1TCA), where the reference residue is at or near a residue selected from the group consisting of Trp104, Leu140, Leu144, Val154, Glu188, Ala 225, Leu278 and Ile285.
- In yet another embodiment the enzyme is an aspartyl protease. More preferably the enzyme is a pepsin-type protease and the cysteine is substituted for the amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in the mature human pepsin (Protein Data Bank entry 1PSN), where the reference residue is at or near a residue selected from the group consisting of Tyr9, Met12, Glu13, Gly76, Thr77, Phe111, Phe117, Ile128, Ser130, Tyr189Ile213, Glu239, Met245, Gln287, Met289, Leu291, and Glu294.
- In still yet another embodiment the enzyme is a cysteine protease. More preferably the enzyme is a papain and the cysteine is substituted for the amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in a mature papain (Protein Data Bank entry 1BQI), where the reference residue is at or near a residue selected from the group consisting of Asn18, Ser21, Asn64, Tyr67, Trp69, Gln112, Gln142, Asp158, Trp177, and Phe207.
- In certain embodiments the enzyme is a metalloprotease and the cysteine is substituted for the amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in the mature human matrix metalloprotease (Protein Data Bank entry 830C), where the reference residue is at or near a residue selected from the group consisting of Leu111, Phe175, Tyr176, Ser182, Leu184, Phe189, Tyr214, Asp231, Lys234, and Ile243.
- In certain embodiments the catalytic antagonist targeting moiety is directed against a target where the target is a molecule present on the surface of a cell (e.g., a. molecule forming a receptor, a ligand, a component of a cell wall, a component of a cell membrane, etc.). In certain embodiments the targeting moiety includes, but is not limited to an antigen, a carbohydrate, a nucleic acid, a lipid, a coordination complex, a sugar, a vitamin, a dendrimer, and a crown ether. In a particularly preferred embodiment the targeting moiety is a cognate ligand for a receptor or an enzyme. In another particularly preferred embodiment the targeting moiety is an inhibitor for a receptor or an enzyme.
- In certain preferred embodiments, the enzyme is a protease (e.g. a papain, a subtilisin, a pepsin, a trypsin, a metalloprotease, etc.) and the targeting moiety is a ligand selected from the group consisting of a carbohydrate, a vitamin or vitamin analog, an enzyme inhibitor, a peptide, a pharmaceutical that is a small organic molecule, and biotin. In another embodiment the enzyme is a protease and said targeting moiety is a receptor.
- In certain preferred embodiments, the enzyme is a protease (e.g. a papain, a subtilisin, a pepsin, a trypsin, a metalloprotease, etc.) and the targeting moiety is an enzyme inhibitor that is a pyrazole, a biotin, a ligand that binds a lectin (e.g. concanavalin A), a carbohydrate (e.g. thioethyl D-mannopyranoside). In one particularly preferred embodiment the targeting moiety specifically binds to a soil and the enzyme degrades a component of the soil.
- In another embodiment this invention provides a method of degrading a target molecule. The method involves contacting the target molecule with a catalytic antagonist comprising a targeting moiety that specifically binds to the target molecule the targeting moiety being attached to an enzyme that degrades the target molecule. In a preferred embodiment the degradation of the target molecule releases the antagonist thereby allowing the antagonist to bind and degrade another target molecule. In preferred embodiments, the targeting moiety is joined to the enzyme through the sulfur group on a cysteine. Preferred antagonist molecules include, but are not limited to the catalytic antagonist molecules described above.
- In still another embodiment, this invention provides an enzyme having altered substrate specificity (i.e. a “redirected enzyme). The enzyme preferably comprises a targeting moiety attached to a subsite comprising the substrate binding site of said enzyme. In preferred embodiments, the targeting moiety is coupled to said enzyme through to a sulfur of a cysteine in said subsite of said enzyme. The cysteine may be a native cysteine or a cysteine is substituted for a native amino acid that is not cysteine in the subsite of the enzyme. Preferred enzymes include, but are not limited to a protease, an esterase, an amidase, a peptidase, a lactamase, a cellulase, an oxidase, an oxidoreductase, a reductase, a transferase, a hydrolase, an isomerase, a ligase, a lipase, a phospholipase, a phosphatase, a kinase, a sulfatase, a lysozyme, a glycosidase, a glycosyltransferase, a nuclease, an aldolase, a ketolase, a lyase, a cyclase, a reverse transcriptase, a hyaluronidase, an amylase, a cerebrosidase and a chitinase.
- In particularly preferred embodiments, the enzyme is a serine hydrolase (e.g., a subtilisin). In a subtilisin, the cysteine is preferably subsitited for amino acids at or near a subsite selected from the group consisting of an S1 subsite, an S1′ subsite, and an S2 subsite. Particularly preferred sites for substitution of the cysteine in various enzymes include, but are not limited to those identified above. Similarly, particularly preferred targets and targeting moieties include those identified above. In certain embodiments the targeting moiety is an inhibitor for a receptor or an enzyme, in other embodiments the targeting moiety is selected from the group consisting of a growth factor, a cytokine, and a receptor ligand. In certain embodiments, the enzyme is a protease and the targeting moiety is a ligand selected from the group consisting of a carbohydrate, a vitamin or vitamin analog, an enzyme inhibitor, a peptide, a pharmaceutical that is a small organic molecule, and biotin. In one particularly preferred embodiment the enzyme is a protease (e.g. a subtilisin, a papain, a pepsin, etc.) and the targeting moiety is a receptor, enzyme inhibitor that is a pyrazole, a biotin, a ligand that binds a lectin (e.g. concanavalin A), or a carbohydrate (e.g. thioethyl D-mannopyranoside). In one embodiment the targeting moiety specifically binds to a soil and said enzyme degrades a component of the soil.
- In still yet another embodiment this invention provides methods of directing the activity of an enzyme to a specific target. The methods comprise providing an enzyme having altered substrate specificity said enzyme comprising a targeting moiety attached to a subsite within the substrate binding region of said enzyme; and contacting the target with the enzyme, whereby the enzyme specifically binds to the target thereby localizing the activity of the enzyme at the target. Preferred enzymes include, but are not limited to, the “redirected” enzymes described above.
- This invention also provides methods of enhancing the activity of a drug that acts as an inhibitor of a receptor or an enzyme. The methods involve coupling a hydrolase to said drug such that when said drug binds said receptor or enzyme, the hydrolase degrades the receptor or enzyme. In preferred embodiments, the method increases the dosage therapeutic window of said drug. In one particularly preferred embodiments the hydrolase is a serine hydrolase (e.g. a subtilisin). In certain preferred embodiments, the hydrolase is a metalloprotease, a cysteine protease, an aspartyl protease, and the like.
- This invention also provides a method of inhibiting an enzyme or a receptor. The method comprises contacting the enzyme or receptor with a chimeric molecule comprising a ligand that binds the enzyme or receptor attached to an enzyme that degrades the cognate ligand of the enzyme or receptor. The enzyme thus becomes linked to the enzyme or receptor where it is free to degrade the cognate ligand thereby preventing the cognate ligand from activating the receptor or acting as a substrate for the enzyme. In a preferred embodiment the chimeric molecule comprises a hydrolase (e.g. a protease) attached to an inhibitor of the enzyme or receptor. Preferred hydrolases include, but are not limited to a serine protease, a cysteine protease, an aspartyl protease, a pepsin-type protease, and a metalloprotease.
- In certain embodiments, this invention does not include catalytic antibodies, e.g. as described by Hifumi et al. (1999)J. Bioscience and Bioengineering, 88: 323.
- The term “catalytic antagonist”, as used herein refers to an enzyme that can inhibit the activity of a molecule that has a particular biological activity and/or simply degrade a molecule that has no particular biological activity. The inhibition can be a blocking or destroying of the function of the “target” molecule. In preferred embodiments, the inhibition or blockage is by partial or complete degradation of the target molecule. The “catalytic antagonist” is catalytic by virtue of the fact that the antagonist is not itself consumed or significantly altered (i.e., permanently changed) by its interaction with the target molecule. Thus, in preferred embodiments, the degradation of the target molecule ultimately results in the release of the catalytic antagonist so that it is free to attack another target molecule. The reaction is preferably sub-stoichiometric (ratio of catalytic antagonist to target is less than 1) and a single catalytic antagonist is free to degrade any number of target molecules.
- A “target molecule” refers to a molecule that is specifically bound by the catalytic antagonist or specifically directed enzymes described herein. Where a catalytic antagonist is employed the target molecule is partially or completely degraded by that antagonist.
- A “targeting moiety” refers to a moiety in the chimeric molecule that that specifically binds to the target molecule. Prior to coupling the targeting moiety to the enzyme, the targeting moiety is a targeting molecule. In preferred embodiments, the targeting moiety is one of a pair of cognate binding partners.
- The term “specifically binds”, when referring to the interaction of a targeting moiety and its cognate binding partner refers to a binding reaction which is determinative of the presence of the targeting moiety or the cognate molecule in the presence of a heterogeneous population of molecules (e.g., proteins and other biologics). Thus, for example, in the case of a receptor/ligand binding pair the ligand would specifically and/or preferentially select its receptor from a complex mixture of molecules, or vice versa. The binding may be by one or more of a variety of mechanisms including, but not limited to ionic interactions, covalent interactions, hydrophobic interactions, van der Waals interactions, etc.
- The terms “binding partner”, or a member of a “binding pair”, or “cognate ligand” refers to molecules that specifically bind other molecules to form a binding complex such as antibody/antigen, lectin/carbohydrate, nucleic acid/nucleic acid, receptor/receptor ligand (e.g. IL-4 receptor and IL-4), avidin/biotin, etc.
- The term ligand is used to refer to a molecule that specifically binds to another molecule. Commonly a ligand is a soluble molecule, e.g. a hormone or cytokine, that binds to a receptor. The decision as to which member of a binding pair is the ligand and which the “receptor” is often a little arbitrary when the broader sense of receptor is used (e.g., where there is no implication of transduction of signal). In these cases, typically the smaller of the two members of the binding pair is called the ligand. Thus, in a lectin-sugar interaction, the sugar would be the ligand (even if it is attached to a much larger molecule, recognition is of the saccharide).
- The terms “polypeptide”, “oligopeptide”, “peptide” and “protein” are used interchangeably herein to refer to a polymer of amino acid residues. The terms apply to amino acid polymers in which one or more amino acid residue is an artificial chemical analogue of a corresponding naturally occurring amino acid, as well as to naturally occurring amino acid polymers. The term also includes variants on the traditional peptide linkage joining the amino acids making up the polypeptide. Proteins also include glycoproteins (e.g. histidine-rich glycoprotein (HRG), Lewis Y antigen (LeY), and the like.).
- The terms “nucleic acid” or “oligonucleotide” or grammatical equivalents herein refer to at least two nucleotides covalently linked together. A nucleic acid of the present invention is preferably single-stranded or double stranded and will generally contain phosphodiester bonds, although in some cases, as outlined below, nucleic acid analogs are included that may have alternate backbones, comprising, for example, phosphoramide (Beaucage et al. (1993)Tetrahedron 49(10):1925) and references therein; Letsinger (1970) J. Org. Chem. 35:3800; Sprinzl et al. (1977) Eur. J. Biochem. 81: 579; Letsinger et al. (1986) Nucl. Acids Res. 14: 3487; Sawai et al. (1984) Chem. Lett. 805, Letsinger et al. (1988) J. Am. Chem. Soc. 110: 4470; and Pauwels et al. (1986) Chemica Scripta 26: 1419), phosphorothioate (Mag et al. (1991) Nucleic Acids Res. 19:1437; and U.S. Pat. No. 5,644,048), phosphorodithioate (Briu et al. (1989) J. Am. Chem. Soc. 111 :2321, O-methylphophoroamidite linkages (see Eckstein, Oligonucleotides and Analogues: A Practical Approach, Oxford University Press), and peptide nucleic acid backbones and linkages (see Egholm (1992) J. Am. Chem. Soc. 114:1895; Meier et al. (1992) Chem. Int. Ed. Engl. 31: 1008; Nielsen (1993) Nature, 365: 566; Carlsson et al. (1996) Nature 380: 207). Other analog nucleic acids include those with positive backbones (Denpcy et al. (1995) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 92: 6097; non-ionic backbones (U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,386,023, 5,637,684, 5,602,240, 5,216,141 and 4,469,863; Letsinger et al. (1988) J. Am. Chem. Soc. 110:4470; Letsinger et al. (1994) Nucleoside & Nucleotide 13:1597;
Chapters Chapters - The term “residue” as used herein refers to natural, synthetic, or modified amino acids.
- The term enzyme includes proteins that are capable of catalyzing chemical changes in other substances without being permanently changed themselves. The enzymes can be wild-type enzymes or variant enzymes. Enzymes within the scope of the present invention include, but are not limited to, proteases, esterases, amidases, peptidases, lactamases, cellulases, oxidases, oxidoreductases, reductases, transferases, hydrolases, isomerases, ligases, lipases, phospholipases, phosphatases, kinases, sulfatases, lysozymes, glycosidases, glycosyltransferases, nucleases, aldolases, ketolases, lyases, cyclases, reverse transcriptases, hyaluronidases, amylases, cerebrosidases, chitinases, and the like.
- A “mutant enzyme” is an enzyme that has been changed by replacing an amino acid residue with a cysteine (or other) residue.
- A “chemically modified” enzyme is an enzyme that has been derivatized to bear a substituent not normally found at that location in the enzyme. The derivatization typically is of a post translational modification, occasionally performed in vivo, but more typically performed ex vivo.
- A “chemically modified mutant enzyme” or “CMM” is an enzyme in which an amino acid residue has been replaced with another amino acid residue (preferably a cysteine) and the replacement residue is chemically derivatized to bear a substituent not normally found on that residue.
- The term “thiol side chain group”, “thiol containing group”, and “thiol side chain” are terms that can be used interchangeably and include groups that are used to replace the thiol hydrogen of a cysteine. Commonly the thiol side chain group includes a sulfur atom through which the thiol side chain group that is attached to the thiol sulfur of the cysteine. The “substituent” typically refers to the group remains attached to the cysteine through a disulfide linkage formed by reacting the cysteine with a methanesulfonate reagent as described herein. While the term substituent preferably refers just to the group that remains attached (excluding its thiol group), the substituent can also refer to the entire thiol side chain group. The difference will be clear from the context.
- The “binding site of an enzyme” consists of a series of subsites across the substrate binding surface of the enzyme (Berger & Schechter (1970)Phil. Trans. Roy Soc. Lond. B 257: 249-264). The substrate residues that correspond to the subsites are labeled P and the subsites are labeled S. By convention, the subsites are labeled S1, S2, S3, S4, S1′, and S2′. A discussion of subsites can be found in Siezen et al. (1991) Protein Engineering, 4: 719-737, and Fersht (1985) Enzyme Structure and Mechanism, 2nd ed. Freeman, New York, 29-30. The preferred subsites include S1, S1′, and S2.
- The phrase “amino acid ##” or “amino acid ## in the XX subsite” is intended to include the amino acid at the referenced position (e.g. amino acid 156 ofB. lentus subtilisin which is in the S1 subsite) and the amino acids at the corresponding (homologous) position in related enzymes.
- A residue (amino acid) of an enzyme is equivalent to a residue of a referenced enzyme (e.g.B. amyloliquefaciens subtilisin) if it is either homologous (i.e., corresponding in position in either primary or tertiary structure) or analogous to a specific residue or portion of that residue in B. amyloliquefaciens subtilisin (i.e., having the same or similar finctional capacity to combine, react, or interact chemically).
- In order to establish homology to primary structure, the amino acid sequence of the subject enzyme (e.g. a serine hydrolase, cysteine protease, aspartyl protease, metalloprotease, etc.) is directly compared to a reference enzyme (e.g.B. amyloliquefaciens subtilisin in the case of a subtilisin type serine protease) primary sequence and particularly to a set of residues known to be invariant in all enzymes of that family (e.g. subtilisins) for which sequence is known. After aligning the conserved residues, allowing for necessary insertions and deletions in order to maintain alignment (i.e., avoiding the elimination of conserved residues through arbitrary deletion and insertion), the residues equivalent to particular amino acids in the primary sequence of the reference enzyme (e.g. B. amyloliquefaciens subtilisin) are defined. Alignment of conserved residues preferably should conserve 100% of such residues. However, alignment of greater than 75% or as little as 50% of conserved residues is also adequate to define equivalent residues. Conservation of the catalytic triad, (e.g., Asp32/His64/Ser221) should be maintained for serine hydrolases.
- The conserved residues may be used to define the corresponding equivalent amino acid residues in other related enzymes. For example, the two (reference and “target”) sequences are aligned in order to produce the maximum homology of conserved residues. There may be a number of insertions and deletions in the “target” sequence as compared to the reference sequence. Thus, for example, a number of deletions are seen in the thermitase sequence as compared toB. amyloliquefaciens subtilisin (see, e.g. U.S. Pat. No. 5,972,682). Thus, the equivalent amino acid of Tyr217 in B. amyloliquefaciens subtilisin in thermitase is the particular lysine shown beneath Tyr217 in FIG. 5B-2 of the U.S. Pat. No. 5,972,682.
- The particular “equivalent” resides may be substituted by a different amino acid to produce a mutant carbonyl hydrolase since they are equivalent in primary structure.
- Equivalent residues homologous at the level of tertiary structure for a particular enzyme whose tertiary structure has been determined by x-ray crystallography, are defined as those for which the atomic coordinates of 2 or more of the main chain atoms of a particular amino acid residue of the reference sequence (e.g.B. amyloliquefaciens subtilisin) and the sequence in question (target sequence) (N on N, CA on CA, C on C, and O on O) are within 0.13 nm and preferably 0.1 nm after alignment. Alignment is achieved after the best model has been oriented and positioned to give the maximum overlap of atomic coordinates of non-hydrogen protein atoms of the enzyme in question to the reference sequence. The best model is the crystallographic model giving the lowest R factor for experimental diffraction data at the highest resolution available.
- Equivalent residues which are functionally analogous to a specific residue of a reference sequence (e.g.B. amyloliquefaciens subtilisin) are defined as those amino acids sequence in question (e.g. related subtilisin) which may adopt a conformation such that they will alter, modify or contribute to protein structure, substrate binding or catalysis in a manner defined and attributed to a specific residue of the reference sequence as described herein. Further, they are those residues of the sequence in question (for which a tertiary structure has been obtained by x-ray crystallography), which occupy an analogous position to the extent that although the main chain atoms of the given residue may not satisfy the criteria of equivalence on the basis of occupying a homologous position, the atomic coordinates of at least two of the side chain atoms of the residue lie with 0.13 nm of the corresponding side chain atoms of the reference sequence residue(s). The three dimensional structures would be aligned as outlined above. For an illustration of this procedure see U.S. Pat. No. 5,972,682.
- A “reference residue” refers to a residue that is specified in a particular enzyme and which serves as a “reference point” for identifying, e.g., as described above, equivalent residues in other members of the family of which the reference enzyme is a member. Thus, the phrase “the amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in the mature human protein X”refers to residues equivalent (or homologous) to the reference residue of protein X in other members of the same protein family. In addition, where the subject protein is protein X, the phrase refers to the reference residue itself.
- A “serine hydrolase” is a hydrolytic enzyme utilizing an active serine side chain to serve as a nucleophile in a hydrolytic reaction. This term includes native and synthetic serine hydrolases as well as enzymes engineered to perform the reverse reaction, e.g., for synthetic purposes. The family of serine peptidases is characterized by Bartlett and Rawlings (1994)Meth. Enzymol., 244: 19-61, Academic Press, S.D.
- The “alpha/beta serine hydrolases” are a family of serine hydrolyases based on structural homology to enzymes including wheat germ serine carboxypeptidase's II (see, e.g., Liam et al. (1992)Biochemistry 31: 9796-9812; Ollis et al. (1992) Protein Engineering, 5: 197-211).
- The term “aspartyl proteases”, also known as aspartic proteases, are proteases that are directly dependent on aspartic acid residues for catalytic activity. The family of aspartyl proteases is characterized in a number of publications known to those of skill in the art (see, e.g.,. Rawlings and Barrett, (1995)Meth. Enzymology, 248: 105-120, Academic Press, S.D.).
- The term “cysteine proteases” is used herein consistently with conventional usage of those of skill in the art. The family of cysteine proteases is characterized in a number of publications known to those of skill in the art (see, e.g., Rawlings and Barrett, (1994)Meth. Enzymology, 224: 461-486, Academic Press, S.D.).
- The term “metalloproteases” is used herein consistently with the conventional usage of those of skill in the art. The family of metalloproteases is characterized in a number of publications known to those of skill in the art (see, e.g., Rawlings and Barrett, (1995)Meth. Enzymology, 248: 183-228, Academic Press, S.D.)
- The “subtilisin type serine proteases” refer to a family of serine hydrolyases based on structural homology to enzymes derived fromBacillus subtilus, including subtilisin BPN′ (Bott et al. (1988) J. Biol. Chem. 263: 7895-7906; Siezen and Louise (1997) Protein Science 6: 501-523; Bartlett and Rawlings (1994) Meth. Enzymol., 244: 19-61, Academic Press, S.D.). Subtilisins are bacterial or fungal proteases which generally act to cleave peptide bonds of proteins or peptides. As used herein, “subtilisin” means a naturally-occurring subtilisin or a recombinant subtilisin. A series of naturally-occurring subtilisins is known to be produced and often secreted by various microbial species. Amino acid sequences of the members of this series are not entirely homologous. However, the subtilisins in this series exhibit the same or similar type of proteolytic activity. This class of serine proteases shares a common amino acid sequence defining a catalytic triad which distinguishes them from the chymotrypsin related class of serine proteases. The subtilisins and chymotrypsin related serine proteases have a catalytic triad comprising aspartate, histidine and serine. In the subtilisin related proteases the relative order of these amino acids, reading from the amino to carboxy terminus, is aspartate-histidine-serine. In the chymotrypsin related proteases, the relative order, however, is histidine-aspartate-serine. Thus, subtilisin herein refers to a serine protease having the catalytic triad of subtilisin related proteases.
- The “chymotrypsin serine protease family” refers to a family of serine hydrolyases based on structural homology to enzymes including gamma chymotrypsin (Birktoft and Blow. (1972)J. Molecular Biology 68: 187-240).
- A “dendritic polymer” is a polymer exhibiting regular dendritic branching, formed by the sequential or generational addition of branched layers to or from a core. The term dendritic polymer encompasses “dendrimers”, which are characterized by a core, at least one interior branched layer, and a surface branched layer (see, e.g., Petar et al. Pages 641-645 InChem. in Britain, (August 1994). A “dendron” is a species of dendrimer having branches emanating from a focal point which is or can be joined to a core, either directly or through a linking moiety to form a dendrimer. Many dendrimers comprise two or more dendrons joined to a common core. However, the term dendrimer is used broadly to encompass a single dendron.
- Dendritic polymers include, but are not limited to, symmetrical and unsymmetrical branching dendrimers, cascade molecules, arborols, dense star polymers, and the like. The PAMAM dense star dendrimers (disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,714,166) are symmetric, in that the branch arms are of equal length. The branching occurs at the nitrogen atom of a terminal amine group on a preceding generation branch. The lysine-based dendrimers are unsymmetric, in that the branch arms are of a different length. One branch occurs at the epsilon nitrogen of the lysine molecule, while another branch occurs at the alpha nitrogen, adjacent to the reactive carboxy group which attaches the branch to a previous generation branch.
- Even though not formed by regular sequential addition of branched layers, hyperbranched polymers, e.g., hyperbranched polyols, may be equivalent to a dendritic polymer where the branching pattern exhibits a degree of regularity approaching that of a dendrimer.
- As used herein, an “antibody” refers to a protein or glycoprotein consisting of one or more polypeptides substantially encoded by immunoglobulin genes or fragments of immunoglobulin genes. The recognized immunoglobulin genes include the kappa, lambda, alpha, gamma, delta, epsilon and mu constant region genes, as well as myriad immunoglobulin variable region genes. Light chains are classified as either kappa or lambda. Heavy chains are classified as gamma, mu, alpha, delta, or epsilon, which in turn define the immunoglobulin classes, IgG, IgM, IgA, IgD and IgE, respectively. A typical immunoglobulin (antibody) structural unit is known to comprise a tetramer. Each tetramer is composed of two identical pairs of polypeptide chains, each pair having one “light” (about 25 kD) and one “heavy” chain (about 50-70 kD). The N-terminus of each chain defines a variable region of about 100 to 110 or more amino acids primarily responsible for antigen recognition. The terms variable light chain (VL) and variable heavy chain (VH) refer to these light and heavy chains respectively.
- Antibodies exist as intact immunoglobulins or as a number of well characterized fragments produced by digestion with various peptidases. Thus, for example, pepsin digests an antibody below (i.e. toward the Fc domain) the disulfide linkages in the hinge region to produce F(ab)′2, a dimer of Fab which itself is a light chain joined to VH—CHl by a disulfide bond. The F(ab)′2 may be reduced under mild conditions to break the disulfide linkage in the hinge region thereby converting the (Fab′)2 dimer into an Fab′ monomer. The Fab′ monomer is essentially a Fab with part of the hinge region (see, Paul (1993) Fundamental Immunology, Raven Press, N.Y. for a more detailed description of other antibody fragments). While various antibody fragments are defined in terms of the digestion of an intact antibody, one of skill will appreciate that such fragments may be synthesized de novo either chemically, by utilizing recombinant DNA methodology, or by “phage display” methods (see, e.g., Vaughan et al. (1996) Nature Biotechnology, 14(3): 309-314, and PCT/US96/10287). Preferred antibodies include single chain antibodies, e.g., single chain Fv (scFv) antibodies in which a variable heavy and a variable light chain are joined together (directly or through a peptide linker) to form a continuous polypeptide.
- The term “carbohydrate” includes mono-, oligo- and poly-saccharides as well as substances derived from monosaccharides by reduction of the carbonyl group (alditols), by oxidation of one or more terminal groups to carboxylic acids, or by replacement of one or more hydroxy group(s) by an hydrogen atom, an amino group, a thiol group or similar heteroatomic groups. It also includes derivatives of these compounds. The term “sugar” is frequently applied to monosaccharides and lower oligosaccharides. Parent monosaccharides are polyhydroxy aldehydes H—[CHOH]n—CHO or polyhydroxy ketones H—[CHOH]n—CO—[CHOH]m—H with three or more carbon atoms. The generic term “monosaccharide” (as opposed to oligosaccharide or polysaccharide) denotes a single unit, without glycosidic connections to other such units. It also includes aldoses, dialdoses, aldoketoses, ketoses and diketoses, as well as deoxy sugars and amino sugars, and their derivatives, provided that the parent compound has a (potential) carbonyl group (see, e.g., McNaught (1996) Pure Appl. Chem. 68: 1919-2008)]. The smallest are monosaccharides like glucose, ribose and threose. Carbohydrates also include, but are not limited to, oligosaccharides and polysaccharides (e.g. starch, cellulose, glycogen) and carbohydrate analogues (e.g., those in which OH have been replaced by H, F, NH2 or NHC(O)CH3).
- The term “soil” or “stain” refers to the accumulation of foreign material on a substrate of interest (e.g. a textile). The “soil” or “stain” may have no biological activity, but may serve to discolor, and/or degrade the underlying substrate. The “soil” need not be visible to the naked eye. Deposition of foreign materials that, while not visible to the naked eye, but that create odors or support bacterial growth are also considered “soils” in the context of this application. Typical stains or soils include, but are not limited to grass stains, blood stains, milk stains, egg, egg white, and the like.
- The term “small organic molecule” refers to a molecule of a size comparable to those organic molecules generally used in pharmaceuticals. The term excludes biological macromolecules (e.g., proteins, nucleic acids, etc.). Preferred small organic molecules range in size up to about 5000 Da, more preferably up to 2000 Da, and most preferably up to about 1000 Da.
- The term “near” or “adjacent to”, when used to indicate a location with respect to a particular amino acid residue (e.g. “adjacent to residue 149”) refers to a residue covalently attached to the “reference residue”, either preceding or following that residue, or in van der Waals contact with the reference residue.
- FIG. 1 illustrates a variety of chimeric molecules of this invention utilizing dendrimers as targeting moieties.
- FIG. 2 illustrates SBL targeting an enzyme with an inhibitor.
- FIG. 3 illustrates
scheme 11 for synthesis of MTS-pyrazole 4. - FIG. 4 illustrates results of HLADH targeting assay for SBL-pyrazole chimeric molecules.
- FIG. 5A, FIG. 5B, FIG. 5C, and FIG. 5D illustrate results of HLADH degradation assay for SBL-pyrazole chimeric molecules.
- FIG. 6 shows HLADH activity for HLADH/AP mixtures with and without S166C- pyrazole.
- FIG. 7 shows AP activity for HLADH/AP mixtures with and without S166C-pyrazole.
- FIG. 8 shows HLADH activity for HLADH/AP mixtures with and without S166C-pyrazole.
- FIG. 9 shows AP activity for HLADH/AP mixtures with and without S166C-pyrazole.
- FIG. 10 shows HLADH degradation by substoichiometric pyrazole-CMMs.
- FIG. 11 shows HLADH degradation by pyrazole-CMMs in the presence of alkaline phosphatase
- FIG. 12 illustrates alkaline phosphatase degradation by pyrazole-CMMs in the presence of HLADH.
- FIG. 13 shows 11 mono- and disaccharide methanethiosulfonates that were prepared.
- FIG. 14A, FIG. 14B, and FIG. 14C illustrate selective lectin degradation by sugar-modified GG36-WT.
- FIG. 15A, FIG. 15B, FIG. 15B, and FIG. 15D illustrate time course plots of the formation of <3000 MW protein fragments during a lectin assay.
- FIG. 16 illustrates
synthesis scheme 7 for the synthesis of biotin-MTS reagent 1. - FIG. 17 illustrates a standard enzyme linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA)-technique for assaying targeting of biotinylated CMMs to anti-biotin.
- FIG. 18 illustrates a targeting assay for anti-biotin using using hapten modified subtilisins in a 96-well plate.
- FIG. 19 plot of anti-biotin degradation by biotin-CMM as a function of time.
- This invention provides novel chimeric molecules that exploit a fundamentally different mode of activity to avoid problems of dosage, activity and persistence problems often associated with the activity of chimeric molecules. In one embodiment, the chimeric molecules are catalytic antagonists of a target molecule. The catalytic antagonists of this invention preferably comprise a targeting moiety attached to an enzyme that degrades the molecule specifically bound by the targeting moiety. The catalytic antagonists of this invention thus bind to a target recognized by the targeting moiety (e.g. a receptor) the enzyme component of the chimera then degrades all or part of the target. This preferably resulting in a reduction or loss of activity of the target and release of the chimeric molecule. The chimeric molecule is then free to attack and degrade another target molecule.
- Thus, unlike typical, chimeric molecules in which the chimeric molecule is effective only once (e.g. due to expenditure of the effector activity, and/or internalization and/or lysis of the chimera) a chimeric molecule of this invention is free to attack and degrade essentially a limitless number of targets. In preferred embodiments, the antagonists of this invention are thus catalytic in nature being effectively regenerated (rendered available again) after degrading each substrate molecule (target). The activity of the catalytic antagonists of this invention is thus essentially sub-stoichiometric.
- As a consequence, the catalytic antagonists of this invention are effective in far lower concentrations than chimeric molecules or traditional inhibitors. Consequently formulations (e.g. detergents) comprising the catalytic inhibitors of this invention can utilize significantly lower concentrations of inhibitor and can be fabricated at lower cost. In in vivo applications, the catalytic inhibitors of this invention because they offer greater activity at lower concentration, are expected to show longer effective serum half-life and lower toxicities than “traditional” chimeric molecules.
- The catalytic antagonists of this invention are useful in a wide variety of contexts where it is desired to degrade a target molecule and/or inhibit the activity of that target molecule. Thus, for example, in ex vivo applications, the catalytic antagonists can be used to specifically target and degrade a particular molecule. Thus, for example, in cleaning operations, the chimeric molecules of this invention can be utilized to specifically target and degrade a component of a soil (e.g. a protein component, a lipid component, etc.). In chemical synthetic processes, or biochemical synthetic processes (e.g. in analytic or industrial preparations, in bioreactors, etc.) to specifically degrade particular preselected molecules. Thus, for example, where it is desired to eliminate a particular enzymatic activity in a bioreactor (e.g. a glycosylation) the catalytic antagonist of this invention comprises, as a targeting moiety, a substrate for the enzyme mediating the activity (e.g. a glycosyltransferase). The enzyme (receptor) in the reactor binds the targeting moiety and the enzymatic component of the chimera (e.g. a hydrolase) degrades the enzyme reducing or eliminating its activity and also freeing itself from the enzyme binding site whereby it is free to attack another target enzyme.
- The chimeric molecules of this invention having, e.g. targeting moieties directed against lectins present on bacterial surfaces attached to, e.g. lipases, or hydrolases, are effective antimicrobial agents and can be used in a wide variety of disinfectants.
- In biological systems (e.g. in vitro or in vivo) the chimeric molecules of this invention can be used to bind and antagonize/inhibit a wide variety of receptors and/or enzymes, and/or intermediary signaling molecules. A wide variety of drugs act by inhibiting the activity of cellular receptors. Thus, for example, antiestrogens (e.g. tamoxifen) bind to and block estrogen receptors, beta blockers (e.g. digoxin) are used in the management of hypertension and post myocardial infarction, histamine H2 receptor antagonists (cimetidine, ranitidine) are used in the treatment of esophageal reflux disease, selective serotonin (5-HT) reuptake inhibitors (e.g. Prozac, Zoloft, Paxil, etc.) are used in the treatment of depression, and so forth. Chimeric catalytic antagonists of this invention comprising, e.g. a cognate ligand bound by the target receptor or a non-cognate ligand (e.g., a mimetic or drug bound by the receptor), as targeting moiety attached to an enzyme that can degrade the receptor act as effective receptor antagonists.
- Unlike a simple competitive inhibitor that “temporarily” blocks the target receptor(s), the catalytic antagonists of this invention effectively degrade the receptor. Thus, once bound and degraded, the receptor is unlikely to function again, absent some repair mechanism. Thus at equal concentrations, the catalytic antagonists of this invention will produce a far greater degree of activity and/or duration of activity than “traditional” competitive inhibitors. It will also be appreciated that, in this context, an enzyme (e.g. an intracellular enzyme) can also be regarded as a receptor for its cognate substrate. Thus, catalytic antagonists of this invention can be used to degrade target enzymes as well. In this instance, it is preferably to use, as the targeting moiety, a molecule that is not degraded or altered by the target enzyme. Known competitive inhibitors of enzymes make good targeting moieties in this context.
- In still another embodiment this invention include chemical antagonists (e.g. of receptors and/or enzymes) comprising a targeting moiety that binds to the receptor or enzyme attached to an enzyme that degrades the cognate ligand that binds to that enzyme and/or receptor. The inhibitor of the enzyme or receptor binds and anchors the enzyme comprising the chimeric molecule to the target enzyme or receptor. When the cognate ligand of the receptor or enzyme approaches, the enzyme degrades is and thereby blocks its activity on the receptor. Again, the process is “catalytic” with no permanent change to the chimeric molecule.
- In preferred embodiments, the catalytic antagonists of this invention are chemically coupled chimeric molecules. The targeting moiety preferably coupled, directly or through a linker, to either terminus of the enzyme (the amino or carboxyl terminus or through an R group of the terminal amino acid), or more preferably, is coupled, directly or through a linker, to a non-terminal amino acid in the enzyme. In certain particularly preferred embodiments, the catalytic antagonists of this invention comprise a chemically modified mutant (CMM) enzyme. A chemically modified mutant enzyme is an enzyme in which a native amino acid residue is replaced with a different amino acid residue (e.g. cysteine, affording a reactive site suitable for coupling the targeting moiety. Thus, preferred chimeric molecules of this invention are chemically coupled molecules rather than fusion proteins.
- The use of chemically coupled targeting moieties in this invention affords a number of advantages. The targeting moiety is not limited to a peptide or protein, but rather can be any of a number of ligands including, but not limited to, known drugs, vitamins, carbohydrates, lectins, and the like. Because the targeting moieties are typically smaller than proteins, they are less immunogenic and show greater tissue penetration. In addition, because the targeting moieties are often various small organic molecules, they retain their conformation and specificity in a physiological context and are typically less subject to degradation in vivo. The chimeric molecules of this invention offer a number of other advantages. Because they are chemically conjugated using a “standard” chemistry, they are easier to make and/or to vary. In addition, the molecules are smaller than typical “therapeutic” fusion proteins (e.g. immunotoxins) and are expected to have increased serum half-life. In addition, because, in certain embodiments, the molecules actually destroy/degrade existing receptors and/or enzymes, a single dosage is expected to have a longer-lasting effect since the subject organisms must actually replace the receptor and/or enzyme to restore that functionality.
- In many applications, the catalytic antagonists of this invention can be regarded as enzymes that have been “redirected” so that they either act on a non-native substrate (for the enzymatic component) or, more typically, so that the enzymatic activity is localized at the site of the target molecule. Thus, in some embodiments, this invention provides an enzyme having altered substrate specificity where the enzyme is a component of a chimeric molecule comprising a targeting moiety attached to a subsite comprising the substrate binding site of the enzyme.
- Traditionally targeted chimeric molecules are designed to position the targeting moiety/domain some distance away from active sites of interest in the effector moiety. It was generally believed that a targeting moiety located too close to an active site of the effector moiety would interfere with proper functioning of the effector (e.g. via steric hindrance).
- It was a surprising discovery of this invention that targeting moieties comprising the chimeric molecules of this invention can be coupled to amino acid residues comprising a substrate binding site of the enzyme. Moreover, attachment of the targeting moiety to an amino acid residue in the substrate binding site of the enzyme results in the substrate binding site being closely juxtaposed to the target bound by the targeting moiety.
- Using chemically conjugated mutants according to the methods of this invention, provides a versatile method of directing a single enzyme to any target simply by changing the chemical moiety. This is a substantial advantage over traditional methods where extensive modification (e.g. by mutagenesis techniques) was required to make a particular target-specific enzyme.
- The activity of the enzyme is thus “redirected” in one or both of two ways: First the activity of the enzyme can be “spatially localized” by binding of the targeting moiety to a particular preselected target. Thus, the enzyme may be specifically directed to a particular cell type, a particular enzyme, a particular receptor, etc. Second, by virtue of alterations in the enzyme produced by the presence of the targeting molecule and/or by virtue of the fact that the targeting molecule brings the substrate binding site in close proximity to the target, the enzyme can show significant activity against a target that is not its usual substrate.
- The redirected enzymes are useful in a wide variety of contexts. For example, the targeting moiety can be selected to redirect/localize the enzyme to a particular target for selective degradation. For example, in the case of a detergent, the targeting moiety can be selected to specifically bind to a particular class of “soil” (e.g. egg) and thereby direct and appropriate degradative enzyme (e.g. a protease) to that substrate.
- In pharmaceutical applications, in some embodiments, the retargeted enzyme can comprise a targeting moiety that directs the enzyme to a particular target cell (e.g. a tumor cell) where the retargeted enzyme (e.g. a thymidine kinase (tk)) activates a particular drug (e.g. a cytotoxin such as ganclovir). In other embodiments the enzyme may be retargeted to a cell that contains an overabundance of a particular metabolite (e.g. as in storage diseases such as Tay Sachs disease). At the new site, the redirected enzyme affords the “missing” enzymatic activity thereby treating the condition. These examples are merely illustrative, and, along with others are discussed in greater detail below.
- It will be appreciated in view of the teachings provided herein that catalytic antagonists can be retargeted enzymes, but are not necessarily so. Conversely, retargeted enzymes may act as catalytic antagonists, but there are retargeted enzymes that are not necessarily catalytic antagonists.
- In any case, in preferred embodiments, the retargeted enzymes and catalytic antagonists are created by selecting a targeting moiety, selecting an enzyme (an effector moiety) and chemically conjugating the two to form a chimeric molecule.
- Selection of targeting moieties, enzymes and conjugating such is described in detail below.
- In preferred embodiments, virtually any cognate binding partner of a target (e.g. a receptor and/or an enzyme and/or a lectin) can be used as a targeting moiety in the molecules of this invention. In addition, molecules that are not cognate binding partners, but that are specifically bound by the target molecules (e.g. receptors or an enzymes) can also be used as targeting moieties in the chimeric molecules of this invention.
- The selection of the targeting moiety depends on the application for which the chimeric molecule (e.g. catalytic antagonist) is to be utilized. Targeting moieties can be grouped and/or identified according to a wide variety of classification schemes. Thus, for example they can be grouped according to type of molecule, e.g. a peptide, an oligopeptide, a peptidomimetic, an antibody, a hapten, an epitope, a carbohydrate, a monosaccharide, an oligosaccharide, a polysaccharide, a glycomimetic, a nucleic acid, a gene, a lipid, a coordination complex, a metal, a sugar, an enzyme, a zymogen, a coenzyme, a cofactor, a coenzyme analog, a cofactor analog, a vitamin, a vitamin analog, a crown ether, a crown ether analog, mono and polycyclic ligands, heterocyclic ligands, chiral ligands, enantiomerically enriched ligands, and any multivalent or dendrimeric variation of the above or, alternatively, they can be grouped according to the nature of the target.
- Preferred targets include, but are not limited to receptors, enzymes, and lectins. In some instances it is simple to refer to the targeting moiety that binds to one of these targets. Thus, for example serotonin or a serotonin analogue may be a targeting moiety. Similarly targeting moieties can be referred to/identified by the target to which they bind. Thus a serotonin analogue as targeting moiety is encompassed by a drug or compound that specifically binds to a serotonin receptor.
- By way of illustration, some preferred targets in the above categories are discussed below. The described embodiments, however, are illustrative in nature and not intended to be limiting.
- A) Targeting Moieties for Receptors
- Receptors provide highly effective targets, particularly for the catalytic antagonists of this invention. Receptors typically specifically bind a cognate ligand and are involved in a wide variety of biological processes. Typically, receptors mediate signaling or the influx or efflux of molecules from a cell. Particularly as transducers of signals, receptors are involved in a wide variety of processes including, but not limited to regulation of growth and morphology/differentiation, gene expression and production of particular molecules, cell proliferation, elements of the immune response, various biological cascades (e.g. the inflammatory response, the clotting response, etc.) and the like.
- As a consequence, receptors have long been recognized as good targets for drugs and a wide variety of drugs are agonists and/or antagonists of particular receptor activity (see, e.g., Table 1). Typically these drugs are relatively small organic molecule and, as such, are good candidates as targeting moieties for the chimeric molecules of this invention.
TABLE 1 Typical pharmacological agents and their mode of activity. Such pharmaceuticals make useful targeting moieties to specifically direct a catalytic antagonist of this invention to a target receptor. Activity Drug 5-HT1 Receptor Agonist Amerge 5-HT2 Receptor Antagonist Nexopamil (LU 49938) Ca2+ Channel blocker ACE Inhibitor Mavik ACE Inhibitor Prinivil ACE Inhibitor/Diuretic Accuretic Adjunct in Affective Disorders Management Alti-Tryptophan Alpha 1A Adrenoceptor Blocker Flomax Alpha Adrenergic Receptor Agonist Alphagan (relatively selective) Analgesic Nu-Mefenamic Analgesic-Antipyretic Advil Analgesic-Antipyretic Asaphen E.C. Analgesic-Antipyretic Motrin (Children's) Analgesic-Antipyretic-Decongestant Tylenol Decongestant Analgesic-Antitussive Codeine 15 mg & 30 mg Analgesic-Decongestant-Antihistamine Sinutab Nightime Extra Strength Androgen Testosterone Enanthate Injection Androgen Testosterone Propionate Injection Anesthetic-Sedative Propofol Injection Angiotensin II AT1 Receptor Blocker Avapro Angiotensin II AT1 Receptor Blocker Diovan Angiotensin-converting Enzyme Inhibitor Captril Antiandrogen Novo-Cyproterone Antiandrogen-estrogen Combination Diane - 35 Hormone Antianginal Agent Nitrolingual Pumpspray Antianginal Agent pms-Nifedipine Antianginal Agent Trinipatch 0.2, 0.4 & 0.6 Antiarrhythmic Nu-Sotalol Antiarrhythmic Rho-Sotalol Antiarrhythmic Sotzmol Anticholinergic Nu-Oxybutyn Anticholinergic-Antispasmodic agent Gen-Oxybutynin Anticoagulant Viprinex Anticoagulant-Low Molecular Weight Fraxiparine Heparin Anticonvulsant Deproic Anticonvulsant Novo-Clobazam Anticonvulsant Nu-Clonazepam Anticonvulsant Rho-Clonazepam Anticonvulsant Taro-Carbamazepine CR Antidepressant Apo-Moclobemide Antidepressant Effexor XR Antidepressant Gen-Nortriptyline Antidepressant Gen-Trazodone Antidepressant Novo-Nortriptyline Antidepressant Nu-Desipramine Antidepressant Nu-Nortriptyline Antidepressant Wellbutrin SR Antidepressant-Antiobsessional-Antibulimic Nu-Fluoxetine Antiepileptic Agent Cerebyx Antihistamine Benadryl Junior Strength Chewable Tablets Antihistamine-Decongestant Dimetapp Quick Dissolve Antihistamine-Decongestant Tavist-D Antihyperglycemic Nu-Metformin Antihyperglycemic Rho-Metformin Antihyperlipidemic Nu-Fenofibrate Antihypertensive Novo-Terazosin Antihypertensive Nu-Nifedipine-PA Antihypertensive Tarka Antihypertensive-Antianginal Gen-Diltiazem SR Antihypertensive-BPH Treatment Apo-Terazosin Antihypertensive-BPH Treatment Nu-Terazosin Antiparkinson Mirapex Antiparkinson Nu-Levocarb Antiparkinson Nu-Selegiline Antiparkinson Requip Antiparkinson Tasmar Antipsychotic Apo-Loxapine Antipsychotic Nu-Loxapine Antipsychotic Seroquel Antiretroviral Zerit Antirheumatic Ridaura Antispasmodic Ditropan Antithrombotic Lovenox Antitussive Benylin DM 12 Hour Antitussive Broncho-grippol-DM Anxiolytic Buspirex Anxiolytic Bustab Anxiolytic Gen-Buspirone Anxiolytic Novo-Poxide Anxiolytic Nu-Buspirone Anxiolytic-Sedative Nu-Bromazepam Beta2-adrenergic Stimulant Airomir Beta2-adrenergic Stimulant Nu-Salbutamol Solution Beta-adrenergic Blocker Nu-Acebutolol Beta-adrenergic Blocker pms-Atenolol Beta-adrenergic Blocker pms-Metoprolol-L Beta-adrenergic Blocker Rho-Atenolol Bronchodilator Gen-Salbutamol Respirator Solution Bronchodilator Nu-Ipratropium Bronchodilator Oxeze Turbuhaler Bronchodilator Quibron-T Calcium Channel Blocker Chronovera Carbonic Anhydrase Inhibitor Neptazane Chimeric Monoclonal Antiplatelet Antibody Reopro Corticosteroid Flovent Diskus Corticosteroid Novo-Flunisolide Corticosteroid Triamcinolone Diacetate Injectable Suspension Diuretic Demadex Diuretic Nu-Indapamide Estrogen Climara Gastrointestinal anti-inflammatory Salofalk Glucocorticoid Methylpred nisolone Sodium Succinate for Injection USP Hematinic Ferodan Hematopoietic Acti-B12 Hematopoietic Heracline Histamine H1 Receptor Antagonist Claritin Histamine H2 Receptor Antagonist Maalox H2 Acid Controller Histamine H2 Receptor Antagonist Ulcidine Histamine H2 Receptor Antagonist Zantac 75 Human Gonadotropin Pregnyl Human Gonadotropin Puregon Hypnotic Gen-Temazepam Hypnotic Nu-Temazepam Hypnotic Nu-Zopiclone Hypnotic pms-Temazepam Hypnotic-Anticonvulsant Rho-Nitrazepam Hypoglycemic Euglucon Hypoglycemic Novo-Gliclazide Hypoglycemic pms-Glyburide Leukotriene Receptor Antagonist Accolate Leukotriene Receptor Antagonist Singulair Lipid Metabolism Regulator Baycol Lipid Metabolism Regulator Lescol Muscle Relaxant Flexitec Muscle Relaxant Gen-Cycloprine Muscle Relaxant Liotec Muscle Relaxant Nu-Cyclobenzaprine Muscle Relaxant-Analgesic Acetazone Forte Muscle Relaxant-Analgesic Acetazone Forte C8 Muscle Relaxant-Analgesic Methoxacet Muscle Relaxant-Analgesic Methoxacet C1/8 Muscle Relaxant-Analgesic Methoxisal Muscle Relaxant-Analgesic Methoxisal-C Neuroleptic pms-Methotrimeprazine Neuroleptic-Antiemetic Droperidol Injection Neuromuscular Blocking Agent Atracurium Besylate Injection Neuromuscular Blocking Agent Atracurium Besylate Injection Nonsteroidal Anti-inflammatory Drug Apo-Etodolac Nonsteroidal Anti-inflammatory Drug Diclotec Nonsteroidal Anti-inflammatory Drug Fexicam Nonsteroidal Anti-inflammatory Drug Novo-Ketorolac Nonsteroidal Anti-inflammatory Drug Nu-Diclo-SR Nonsteroidal Anti-inflammatory Drug Nu-Ketoprofen-SR Nonsteroidal Anti-inflammatory Drug Nu-Tiaprofenic Nonsteroidal Anti-inflammatory Drug pms-Diclofenac Nonsteroidal Anti-inflammatory Drug Rhodiaprox Opioid Analgesic Pethidine Injection BP Oral Contraceptive Alesse 21 and 28 Pediculicide Para Platelet Aggregation Inhibitor Apo-Ticlopidine Platelet Aggregation Inhibitor Nu-Ticlopidine Platelet Aggregation Inhibitor Plavix Progestogen Nu-Megestrol Proton Pump Inhibitor Losec Retinoid Rejuva-A Selective Estrogen Receptor Modulator Evista Somatostatin Analogue Sandostatin Type II Alpha-reducatase Inhibitor Propecia Upper Gastrointestinal Motility Modifier Apo-Domperidone Upper Gastrointestinal Motility Modifier Novo-Domperidone Upper Gastrointestinal Motility Modifier Nu-Domperidone Upper Gastrointestinal Motility Modifier pms-Domperidone Vasoactive Agent Nu-Pentoxifylline-SR Vitamin & Mineral Supplement Calcium D 500 Vitamin & Mineral Supplement Caltrate Plus Vitamin & Mineral Supplement Hemarexin Vitamin Supplement Hormodausse Vitamin Supplement Sopalamine/3B Vitamin Supplement Sopalamine/3B Plus C - The targeting moiety, however, need not be a known pharmaceutical. There are a number of receptors for which inhibitors or agonists are known where the inhibitors or agonists are not approved pharmaceuticals.
- There is, as yet, no uniform classification for receptors. However, as indicated above, a great many receptors are signal transduction receptors and within this group signal-transduction receptors fall into three general classes:
- The first class includes receptors that penetrate the plasma membrane and have intrinsic enzymatic activity. Such receptors include, but are not limited to, those that are tyrosine kinases (e.g. PDGF, insulin, EGF and FGF receptors), tyrosine phosphatases (e.g. CD45 [cluster determinant-45] protein of T cells and macrophages), guanylate cyclases (e.g. natriuretic peptide receptors), , and serine/threonine kinases (e.g. are cAMP-dependent protein kinase (PKA), protein kinase C (PKC), MAP kinases, activin and TGF-β receptors). Additionally, several families of receptors lack intrinsic enzyme activity, yet are coupled to intracellular tyrosine kinases by direct protein-protein interactions.
- The proteins encoding receptor tyrosine kinases (RTKS) typically contain four major domains: an extracellular ligand binding domain, an intracellular tyrosine kinase domain, an intracellular regulatory domain, and a transmembrane domain. The amino acid sequences of the tyrosine kinase domains of RTKs are highly conserved with those of cAMP-dependent protein kinase (PKA) within the ATP binding and substrate binding regions. Some RTKs have an insertion of non-kinase domain amino acids into the kinase domain termed the kinase insert. RTK proteins are classified into families based upon structural features in their extracellular portions (as well as the presence or absence of a kinase insert) which include the cysteine rich domains, immunoglobulin-like domains, leucine-rich domains, Kringle domains, cadherin domains, fibronectin type III repeats, discoidin I-like domains, acidic domains, and EGF-like domains. Based upon the presence of these various extracellular domains the RTKs have been sub-divided into at least 14 different families. Representative RTKs include, but are not limited to I EGF receptor, NEU/HER2, HER3, insulin receptor, IGF-1 receptor, PDGF receptors, c-Kit, FGF receptors, vascular endothelial cell growth factor (VEGF) receptor, hepatocyte growth factor (HGF) and scatter factor (SC) receptors, the neurotrophin receptor family (trkA, trkB, trkC) and NGF receptor, and the like.
- The second class includes receptors that are coupled, inside the cell, to GTP-binding and hydrolyzing proteins (termed G-proteins). The G-protein coupled receptors (GPCRs) are a superfamily of integral membrane proteins that are typically characterized by seven hydrophobic domains which are of sufficient length (typically 20-28 amino acid residues) to span the plasma membrane. Examples of this class include, but are not limited to the -adrenergic receptors, odorant receptors and receptors for peptide hormones (e.g. glucagon, angiotensin, vasopressin and bradykinin).
- The third class includes receptors that are found intracellularly and that, upon ligand binding, migrate to the nucleus where the ligand-receptor complex directly affects gene transcription. These receptors include, but are not limited to steroid/thyroid hormone receptor superfamily (e.g. glucocorticoid, vitamin D, retinoic acid and thyroid hormone receptors). This is a class of proteins that reside in the cytoplasm and bind the lipophilic steroid/thyroid hormones. Upon binding ligand the hormone-receptor complex translocates to the nucleus and binds to specific DNA sequences termed hormone response elements (HREs). The binding of the complex to an HRE results in altered transcription rates of the associated gene.
- Ligands that bind such receptors are well known to those of skill in the art. These include, but are not limited to A2 receptor agonists (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,026,317), 5HT1 receptor agonists or antagonists (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,025,374 and 6,025,367), N-methyl-D-aspartate (NMDA) receptor blockers for the prevention of atherosclerosis (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,025,369), modulators of peroxisome proliferator activated receptor-gamma (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,022,897), endothelin receptor antagonists (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,022,886, 6,020,348), human growth hormone variants having enhanced affinity for human growth hormone receptor at site 1 (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,022,711), antagonists of the human neuronal nicotinic acetylcholine receptor (see, e.g, U.S. Pat. No. 6,020,335), platelet GPIIb/IIIa receptor antagonists (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,022,523), adenosine receptor agonists (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,020,321), interleukin receptor (e.g. IL-2R, IL4R, IL-6R, IL-8R, IL-10R, IL-13R, etc.) antagonists, binding agents specific for growth factor receptors (e.g. EGF, TGF and analogues or mimetics thereof), binding agents specific for IgA receptor (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,018,031), agonists of the strychnine insensitive glycine modulatory site of the N-methyl-D-aspartate receptor complex (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,017,957), integrin receptor antagonists (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,017,926), androgen receptor modulator compounds (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,017,924), PCP receptor ligands (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,017,910), azole peptidomimetics as thrombin receptor antagonists (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,017,890), NPY Y2-receptor agonists (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,017,879), receptor activators of NF-κB (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,017,729), antagonists of the TNF receptor, somatostatin receptor-binding agents (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,017,509), human histamine H2 receptor, bradykinin binding agents (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,015,812), glutamate receptor antagonist (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,015,800), imidazoline receptors, transferrin receptors, benzodiazepine receptor binding agents (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,015,544), gaba brain receptor ligands (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,013,799), neurotensin NT1 and NT2 receptors, CXCR2 receptors, CCR5 receptors, macrophage mannose receptors, and the like.
- Other receptors that provide good targets for the chimeric molecules of this invention include but are not limited to, SP-K receptor, substance K receptors,
tachykinin 2 receptors, α1-adrenoceptors subtype A, α1-adrenoceptors subtype B, α2-Adrenoceptors subtype A, β1-, β2-, β3-adrenoceptors δ receptors, κ receptors, μ receptors, ACTH receptors, angiotensin receptors, adenosine receptors, bombesin receptors, gastrin-releasing peptide receptors, bradykinin receptors, C5a receptors, Calcitonin gene-related peptide receptors, calcitonin receptors, CCK-A receptors. corticotropin releasing factor receptors, dopamine receptors, EP2 receptors, EP3 receptors, ETA receptors , ETB receptors, FSH receptors, GABA receptors, galanin receptors, glucagon receptors, glucagon-like peptide-1 receptors, gonadotropin receptors, growth hormone-releasing hormone receptors, histamine H1 receptors, histamine H2 receptors, leukotriene B4 receptors, melatonin receptors, MSH receptors, muscarinic M1, M2, M3, and M4 receptors, neurotensin receptors, parathyroid hormone receptors, pituitary adenylate cyclase-activating polypeptide receptors, platelet-activating factor receptors, prostacyclin receptors, P2U purinoceptors, P2Y purinoceptors, rhodopsins, secretin receptors, somatostatin receptors, SSTR receptors, VIP receptors, vasopressin receptors, estrogen receptors, neuropeptide receptors, T-cell receptors, and the like. - B) Targeting Moieties for Enzymes and Antibodies.
- In other embodiments, the targeting moieties used in the chimeric molecules of this invention are moieties specifically bound by enzymes or antibodies. A wide variety of enzymes, their substrates and competitive inhibitors thereof are known to those of skill in the art. Moreover, many of these enzymes provide good targets for drug in a wide variety of pathologies.
- For example, caspases are a remarkable and intricately regulated network of enzymes that can trigger cell suicide in animals from yeast and worms to humans. Caspases are known to mediate programmed cell death in a number of diseases, including ischemic brain injury, or stroke. It is believed that the cardiac cell death that occurs during heart “attack” is caused by activation of several caspases. In addition, it has been demonstrated administration of an experimental caspase inhibitor known as YVAD-cmk blocks this biochemical cascade and also protects heart tissue, dramatically reducing the amount of myocardial deaths by over 30 percent. Catalytic antagonists of this invention comprising caspase-specific agents as targeting moieties attached to a protease (enzyme) can specifically target and degrade the caspase. It is expected this will offer protection of heart tissue during and after myocardial infarction and brain tissue during and after stroke. Agents that specifically bind to caspases (e.g. YVAD-cmk, and various protected caspase substrates) are known to those of skill in the art.
- In another example, the enzyme GARFT (Glycinamide Ribonucleotide Formyl Transferase) is an enzyme in a biochemical pathway through which tumor cells synthesize purines, essential components of DNA. Blocking the action of GARFT inhibits purine synthesis and subsequent tumor DNA molecule construction. With the exception of liver cells, all normal human tissues can obtain purines via an alternative pathway (purine salvage pathway). Inhibitors of GARFT will show selectivity for tumor cells and less significant bone marrow toxicity than other chemotherapeutic agents. A catalytic antagonist of this invention comprising a GARFT targeting moiety attached to a protease capable of degrading GARFT is expected to show similar tumor selectivity. One suitable targeting moiety is AG2037 (produced by Agouron) which is in preclinical studies. AG2037 has been engineered using structure-based design to exhibit potent and selective inhibition of GARFT but to avoid binding to mFBP, a membrane protein believed to be important in the side-effects of earlier GARFT inhibitors. AG2037 is well tolerated in a variety of mouse cancer models and demonstrates broad-spectrum antitumor efficacy, at least equal to that of paclitaxel when studied in the same tumors grown in mice.
- In still another example, the intracellular enzyme, dihydroorotate dehydrogenase (DHODH) provides a good target. DHODH is the fourth sequential enzyme involved in the de novo biosynthesis of uridylate (UMP). Since activated T cells require rapid de novo pyrimidine biosynthesis, this enzyme is known to be critical for the activation of the immune response, making it a good target for intervention in transplantation and autoimmune disease. One compound that targets this enzyme, Leflunomide (Hoechst), has been approved by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) for the treatment of active rheumatoid arthritis in adults leflunomide, or related DHODH-specific agents can be used as a targeting moiety attached to an enzyme that degrades the DHODH enzyme and provides a similar therapeutic result. Another known inhibitor, Brequinar sodium, has shown efficacy in many animal models of immunosuppression, but was not successful in clinical trials for transplantation, apparently due to a narrow therapeutic window. When used as a targeting moiety in a catalytic antagonist of this invention, it is expected that the therapeutic window will be improved because the molecule will be effective in lower dosages. In general, it is believed that conversion of drugs that act as competitive inhibitors into catalytic antagonists in accordance with this invention will show an improved therapeutic window due to their higher efficacy at lower concentration.
- In still yet another example, the catalytic antagonists of this invention are useful in the treatment of hereditary emphysema. The inherited form of emphysema is called alpha-1 proteinase inhibitor deficiency or “alpha-one” for short. People with this disease have a deficiency in a major protein, alpha-1 proteinase inhibitor. Alpha-1 proteinase inhibitor is a major protein in the blood and is produced primarily in the liver cells but also by some white blood cells. It protects the lung by blocking the effects of powerful enzymes called elastases. Elastase is normally carried in white blood cells and protects the delicate tissue of the lung by killing bacteria and neutralizing tiny particles inhaled into the lung. Once the protective work of this enzyme is finished, further action is blocked by the alpha-1 proteinase inhibitor. Without alpha-1 proteinase inhibitor, elastase can destroy the air sacs of the lung.
- Thus, catalytic antagonists of this invention comprising an alpha-1 proteinase binding moiety attached (e.g. the drug called Prolastin) to, e.g. a protease, will degrade alpha-1 proteinase affording similar or better therapeutic benefit.
- Antibodies also provide useful targets for the catalytic antagonists of this invention. Thus, for example, a catalytic antagonist that targets and antagonizes (e.g. degrades) α-Gal epitope specific antibodies is expected to significantly reduce an immune response (e.g. to a xenotransplant). In one embodiment, then, the α-Gal epitope can be used as a targeting moiety in a chimera of this invention. It may be attached to a protease (e.g. a subtilisin, a pepsin, etc.) and when it is bound by the antibody it will degrade that antibody thereby inhibiting the antibody-mediated immune response.
- Similarly particularly where the xenotransplant is from a different species, the catalytic antagonist can use as a targeting moiety the MHC (or component thereof) of the xenotransplant. If the enzymatic component is a hydrolase (e.g. a protease), the catalytic inhibitor will specifically digest the receptor on effector cells of the immune system (e.g. cytotoxic T lymphocytes (CTLs) only on those cells specifically directed against the xenotransplant. The catalytic antagonists will thus confer specific tolerance to the xenograft without generally compromising the host immune system.
- Other antibodies that are good targets for the catalytic inhibitors of this invention are antibodies produced in auto-immune responses and/or other allergic responses. In these instances, the targeting moiety is a molecule bearing an epitope recognized by the antibodies mediating the autoimmune or allergic response. Degradation of the antibody by, e.g. a hydrolase attached to the targeting moiety will reduce the pathologic symptoms associated with the autoimmune response. Specific allergens and substrates recognized by antibodies in various autoimmune responses are well known to those of skill in the art and can readily incorporated into the chimeric molecules of this invention.
- While many of the illustrations provided above are directed to in vivo applications, the invention is not so limited. It is well recognized that it is desirable to inhibit enzymes and/or antibodies in a wide variety of ex vivo applications. These include, but are not limited to various cell cultures, bioreactors or fermentation systems, or various ex vivo synthetic processes (e.g. laboratory processes and/or commercial processes), antimicrobials/disinfectants, and the like.
- C) Targeting Moieties for Lectins and Sugars.
- In still other embodiments, targeting moieties are selected that bind to particular lectins. Lectins are proteins obtained from many plant, animal, and bacterial sources that have binding sites for specific mono or oligosaccharides. Lectins such as concanavalin A and wheat germ agglutinin are widely used as analytical and preparative agents in the study of glycoproteins.
- Lectins are also present on the surfaces of eukaryotic and bacterial cells. In eukaryotic cells, lectins are often involved in cell-cell interactions. In bacterial cells, lectins often mediate adhesion of the bacterium to its target/host and, in many cases, such adhesion is required for the bacterium to infect the host cell.
- In addition, bacterial adhesion and contamination of non-biological surfaces are serious problems in the medical, dental and food science fields. The most detrimental effects are encountered in medicine, where the failure of implanted or transdermal medical devices primarily results from surface-associated bacterial infections. Bacterial interaction/adhesion to a surface is often mediated by lectins (often referred to as adhesins). Bacteria adhering onto a surface frequently secrete an exopolysaccharide matrix in order to cement themselves to the surface. This slimy layer of bacteria embedded in a polysaccharide matrix is known as a biofilm. At the present time, there is no cure for biofilm infections in vivo because the bacteria are resistant to any anti-microbial or antibiotic treatment.
- Biofilm formation is also problematic in a wide variety of commercial synthetic systems. Often fermentation vessels and other bioreactors are contaminated by biofilms. Biofilms also growing in and contaminate apparatus used for many chemical processes particularly those involving “digestible” organic reagents. Thus, biofilms often contaminate filters, conduits, separators and other devices.
- In certain embodiments, the catalytic antagonists of this invention can be used to inhibit/degrade various lectins. Thus, for example, a catalytic antagonist comprising a sugar or oligosaccharide attached to a hydrolase will specifically target and degrade a lectin that binds the target molecule. Such a catalytic antagonist is illustrated in the examples.
- Degradation of lectins/adhesins on a bacterial surface will interfere with the bacteria's ability to bind to a surface and thereby prevent the bacterium from entering a host cell or from forming a biofilm.
- In a related embodiment, it is known that many bacteria and bacterial toxins bind to ganglioside, an acid glycosphingolipid and invade host cells. The best known of these is the cholera toxin, an enterotoxin produced by.Vibrio cholerae, which is known to bind ganglioside GM1. Other ganglioside-binding bacterial toxins include Tetanus toxin (GD1b), botulinum toxins (GT1b and GQ1b) and delta toxin produced by Clostridium perfringens (GM2). Shiga toxin produced by Shigella dysenteriae and Vero toxin produced by enterohaemorrhagic E. coli bind to neutral glycosphingolipids having an alpha-1,4 galabiose moiety in the sugar chain, such as galabioside (Ga2Cer) and ceramide trihexoside (Gb3Cer).
- Many pathogenic bacteria also bind to glycosphingolipids of host cell surface for colonization and infection. Thus, uropathogenicE. coli which cause urinary tract infections can bind to glycosphingolipids having an alpha-1,4 galabiose moiety at the non-reducing end of the sugar chain (Gb3Cer, etc). Uropathogenic E. coli can also bind to globoside (Gb4Cer) and Forssman glycolipid, both of which have an alpha-1,4 galabiose moiety internally in a sugar chain. E. coli binds to glycosphingolipids by pili that exist on the bacterial cell surface and are similar to fibers or hairs. On the top of pili, there is an adhesin characterized as a lectin. Several types of adhesin, with respect to their sugar specificity, have been identified. They are the type I adhesin of E. coli that are mannose specific, type P adhesin, also of E. coli, specific for alpha-1,4 galabiose moiety, and type S adhesin of E. coli, specific for sialylgalactose moiety. It was reported that the amino acid sequence of P-adhesin is similar as that of Shiga toxin because both recognize alpha-1,4 galabiose moiety of glycosphingolipid. Propionibacterium, which causes skin disease, recognizes the lactosyl moiety of glycosphingolipids as a binding epitope. These bacteria can bind strongly to lactosylceramide and also bind to isoreceptors such as asialo GM1 (GA1) and asialo GM2 (GA2). Because almost all glycosphingolipids contain a common lactosyl moiety, Propionibacterium may be assumed to bind almost all glycosphingolipids. However, the bacteria cannot bind to any glycosphingolipids composed of a dihydroxy base and nonhydroxy fatty acid in ceramide, even though these contain a lactosyl moiety. This fact indicates that the binding epitope of the bacteria also depends on the ceramide structure in addition to the lactosyl moiety in sugar chain. Neisseria gonorrhoeae, which cause gonorrhoea, also bind glycosphingolipids having a lactosyl moiety.
- In view of the foregoing, catalytic antagonists having targeting moieties that specifically bind various glycosphingolipids and/or various adhesins (e.g. mannose specific type I adhesin ofE. coli, alpha-1,4 galabiose specific type P adhesin of E. coli, and sialylgalactose type S adhesin of E. coli) attached to enzymes that degrade the glycosphingolipids (e.g. glycosidases, cerebrosidases, etc.) will act to prevent bacterial infections and are expected to provide effective therapeutics to block acute effects of bacterial-produced toxins (e.g. cholera toxin).
- Lectins, particularly membrane glycoproteins, are also implicated in various inflammatory processes (e.g. inflammatory processes associated with rheumatoid arthritis, arthritis, septic shock, myocardial infarction., etc.). For example Lec-CAMs or selectins are expressed on the surfaces of endothelium, leukocytes and platelets and influence leukocyte-endothelial adhesion at sites of inflammation. GMP-140 (P-selectin) stored in Weibel-Palade bodies of endothelial cells and a platelet granules, when stimulated by TNF-αIL-1 is transported within minutes to the cell surface and participates in interactions between endothelium, platelets, neutrophils. ELAM-1 (E-selectin) is synthesized de novo by stimulated endothelium e.g. by TNF-α/IL-1, and enhances later recruitment of leukocytes. LAM-1 (L-selectin) regulates lymphocyte binding to high endothelial lymph node venules, the surface of neutrophils and lymphocytes to localize these cells to injury.
- In addition, the integrins, a family of adhesion molecules composed of heterodimers of α and β subunits; act in regulation of cell-matrix and cell-cell adhesion. These molecules are transmembrane in structure, thus linking or “integrating” exterior/surface stimuli to the internal cell cytoskeleton. β2 integrins: also known as CD11/CD18 molecules confer adhesion specificity, mediate activation of phagocytic cells by chemotactic stimuli.
- The surface expression of integrins e.g. MO-1, leukocyte function antigen-1 (LFA-1) and gp150,95; assist in localization of phagocytes to injury sites; deficiency states result in enhanced susceptibility to bacterial infection.
- The intercellular adhesion molecule-1 (ICAM-1): assists in localization of leukocytes to tissue injury; expressed on surface of cytokine stimulated endothelium and leukocytes; binds to LFA-1 and MO-1 present on cell membranes of neutrophils and macrophages. The vascular cell adhesion molecule-1 (VCAM-1): binds VLA-4 leukocyte receptor on lymphocytes, monocytes, eosinophils, basophils.
- All of these molecules also offer suitable targets for the catalytic antagonists of this invention. The forgoing illustrations of lectin-directed catalytic antagonists of this invention are intended to be illustrative and not limiting. Numerous other lectin targets will be known to those of skill in the art.
- It will be appreciated that the target and targeting moieties described herein (and others) can be reversed. Thus, instead of a sugar, the targeting moiety can be a lectin that will specifically direct the catalytic antagonist (or redirected enzyme) to a sugar or sugar-bearing target. Thus, the molecules can be directed to the sugars present on and characteristic of particular bacteria. In one embodiment, the sugar-targeted catalytic antagonist will make an effective microbicide.
- As indicated above, such molecules can be targeted by using simple sugars, or oligosaccharides and the like as targeting moieties in the chimeric molecules of this invention. In addition, dendrimers can also be used as targeting moieties. Thus, multiple functionalization of the enzyme (e.g. either a catalytic antagonist or a redirected enzyme) can be achieved using dendrimeric targeting moieties whereby multiple branched linking structures can be employed to create a polyfunctionalized enzyme (chimeric molecule).
- For instance, multiple glycosylation, including multiple mannose-containing chimeras and varied sugar moieties can be created. This could confer the benefit of increased affinity for, and increased binding affinity between, lectins and the targeted enzyme (e.g. a hydrolase). This would also permit multiple concurrent targeting of sites, for instance by incorporating multiple biotin molecules into a targeting moiety that would elicit multiple concurrent biotin-avidin interactions. The dendrimer targeting moieties (before coupling to the enzyme) would preferably include methanethiosulfonates with simple branching such as:
- derived from pentaerythritol, to very complex branched dendrimer reagents as illustrated in FIG. 1. Highly branched molecules or dendrimers were first synthesized by Vogtle in 1978 (Buhleier et al (1978)Synthesis, 178). The attachment of identical building blocks that contain branching sites to a central core may be achieved with a high degree of homogeneity and control Each branch contains a functional group which, after chemical alteration, may be connected to yet another branching building block. In this manner, layer after layer of branching rapidly generates highly functionalized molecules (Bosman et al (1999) Chem. Rev., 99: 1665-1688).
- D) Targeting other “Miscellaneous Ligands.
- Using the teaching provided herein, a wide variety of other moieties for targeting by the chimeric molecules of this invention will be apparent to those of skill in the art. For example, the redirected enzymes describe herein can be used in a variety of drug delivery strategies. The targeting moiety can be directed to specifically bind to a particular cell type or tissue (e.g. a tumor cell). The enzymatic component can be selected for an activity that converts a (e.g. non-toxic prodrug) to an active form (e.g. a cytotoxin). The retargeted enzyme of this invention thus localizes the activity of the prodrug/drug to the cells bound by the chimeric molecule. Numerous cell-specific markers are known to those of skill in the art. These include, but are not limited to the LewisY antigen (tumor cells), the G250 antigen (renal cell carcinoma cells), the IL-13 receptor (tumor cells) and the like. One example of a suitable enzyme for use in this application is a thymidine kinase (e.g.,Herpes simplex thymidine kinase (HSVTK) or Varicella zoster thymidine kinase (VZVTK)). thymidine kinase assists in metabolizing antiviral nucleoside analogues to their active form are therefore useful in activating nucleoside analogue precursors (e.g., AZT or ddC) into their active form. In addition, tk-containing cells are killed when contacted with ganclovir.
- Thus, in one embodiment, the redirected enzyme of this invention can be a thymidine kinase targeted, for example to a cell expressing a CCR5 and/or a CCR3 receptor (and hence likely to be susceptible to HIV infection). The tk re-directed to these cells can activate AZT or ddC precursors into their active form.
- In another embodiment, the tk enzyme can be directed to a tumor cell (e.g. via a tumor specific antigen). Treatment with ganclovir then results in death of the tumor cell.
- Other examples of prodrugs that can be converted to their active form using the redirected enzymes of this invention include, but are not limited to prodrugs of 5-FU or inhibitors of dihydropyrimidine dehydrogenase (DPD) (GW 776C85).
- Still another example is the prodrug phosphenytoin, a relatively soluble prodrug that is converted by phosphatase to relatively insoluble phenytoin an active. anticonvulsant. Similarly, depivefrin is converted by esterase to epinephrine, an adrenergic, useful in the treatment of glaucoma.
- The re-directed enzymes of this invention can also act as “self-protected” polypeptides particularly when utilized as in vivo therapeutics. In such an embodiment, the organic molecule (e.g. the targeting moiety) component of the chimeric molecule can sterically shield and protect the effector (enzyme) component of the chimeric molecule. The idea of this is that bulky groups attached near to key positions on the chimeric molecule would hinder the attack of another reagent on, e.g. cleavage sites in the remainder of the chimera and therefore prolong its lifetime. For example, sugars on proteins increase their stability to proteinases, i.e., the proteinase can't get in to cleave its preferred amide bond because a sugar is blocking it (see, e.g., Rudd et al. (1994)Biochemistry, 33: 17-22). In certain embodiments, the organic molecule can perform “double duty” providing both a targeting functionality as well as a protective function.
- In still another embodiment, the re-directed enzymes of this invention can be utilized in enzyme replacement therapy, particular in the treatment of storage diseases. Storage diseases are caused by the increased accumulation of metabolic products (e.g., lipids, proteins, and complex carbohydrates) due to either the inactivity of an enzyme that degrades the products or the hyperactivity of an enzyme that creates the products. Storage disease include but are not limited to glycogen storage disease I, GM1 gangliosidoses, MPS IV B (Morquio B), GM2 gangliosidoses (O, B, AB, B1 variants), Niemann-Pick disease (A, B, and C), Metachromatic leukodystrophy (arylsulfatase A and SAP-1 deficient), Krabbe disease, Fabry disease, Gaucher disease, Farber disease, Wolman disease (cholesterol ester storage disease), MPS I (Hurler and Scheie syndromes), MPS II (Hunter syndrome), MPS III A, C, and D (Sanfilippo A, C, and D), PS III B (Sanfilippo B), MPS IV A (Morquio A), MPS VI (Maroteaux-Lamy syndrome), MPS VII (beta-glucuronidase deficiency), Multiple sulfatase deficiency, Mucolipidosis I (Sialidosis), Mucolipidosis II & III, alpha-Mannosidosis, beta-Mannosidosis, Fucosidosis, Sialic acid storage disease, Galactosialidosis, Aspartylglucosaminuria Cystinosis. Storage diseases can be treated by supplementing the “missing” enzymatic activity.
- For example, Gaucher's disease can be treated by use of a glucocerebrosidase targeted to spleen cells. Similarly, superoxide dismutase can be targeted to the liver as an anti-oxidant, and so forth.
- Virtually any enzyme can be utilized in the chimeric molecules of this invention. Where the chimeric molecule is a catalytic antagonist, enzymes are selected that are capable of degrading the substrate specifically bound by the targeting moiety. Such enzymes include, but are not limited to proteases, cellulases, nucleases (exo- and endo-), amylases, lipases, aldolases, ketolases, glycosidases, and the like.
- Where the chimeric molecule is an enzyme whose activity is directed to a new location and/or substrate, the enzyme can be , but need not necessarily be an enzyme that degrades its substrate. Thus, in addition to proteases, cellulases, nucleases (exo- and endo-), amylases, lipases, aldolases, ketolases, glycosidases, and the like, the redirected enzymes can also include enzymes such as isomerases, oxidases, oxidoreductases, ligases, transferases, and the like.
- Preferred enzymes for use in the catalytic antagonists of this invention are the hydrolases. Particularly preferred enzymes for use in the catalytic antagonists of this invention are the serine hydrolases. The serine hydrolases are a class of hydrolytic enzymes characterized by a hydrolytic enzymes that posses a catalytic triad composed of a serine, histidine and a carboxylate amino acid (either aspartic or glutamic acid), and which catalyze the hydrolysis, and microscopic reverse reactions thereof, of carboxylic acid derivatives including, but not restricted to, esters, peptides and amides.
- Preferred serine hydrolases comprising this invention include the trypsin-chymotrypsin proteases, the subtilisin proteases, and the alpha/beta hydrolases. In a particularly preferred embodiment the enzyme is protease, more preferably a subtilisin (e.g. aBacillus lentis subtilisin). Subtilisin is a serine endoprotease (MW ˜27,500) which is secreted in large amounts from a wide variety of Bacillus species. The protein sequence of subtilisin has been determined from at least four different species of Bacillus (see, e.g., Markland et al. (1971) pages 561-608 In: The Enzymes, ed. Boyer P. D., Acad Press, New York, Vol. III, pp.; Nedkov et al. (1983) Hoppe-Seyler's Z. Physiol. Chem. 364: 1537-1540). The three-dimensional crystallographic structure of subtilisin BPN′ (from B. amyloligoefaciens) to 2.5 Å resolution has also been reported (Wright et al. (1969) Nature 221, 235-242; Drenth et al. (1972) Eur. J. Biochem. 26: 177-181. These studies indicate that although subtilisin is genetically unrelated to the mammalian serine proteases, it has a similar active site structure. The x-ray crystal structures of subtilisin containing covalently bound peptide inhibitors (Robertus, et al. (1972) Biochemistry 11: 2439-2449), product complexes (Robertus et al. (1972) Biochemistry 11: 4293-4303), and transition state analogs (Matthews et al (1975) J. Biol. Chem. 250: 7120-7126; Poulos et al. (1976) J. Biol. Chem. 251, 1097-1103), which have been reported have also provided information regarding the active site and putative substrate binding cleft of subtilisin. In addition, a large number of kinetic and chemical modification studies have been reported for subtilisin (Philipp et al. (1983) Mol. Cell. Biochem. 51:5-32; Svendsen (1976) Carlsbera Res. Comm. 41: 237-291; Markland, Id.) as well as at least one report wherein the side chain of methionine at residue 222 of subtilisin was converted by hydrogen peroxide to methionine-sulfoxide (Stauffer et al. (1965) J. Biol. Chem. 244: 5333-5338).
- Other particularly preferred hydrolases for use in this invention include, but are not limited to α/β hydrolases, trypsin/chymotryspsin families of serine hydrolase enzymes, aspartyl proteases, cysteine proteases, metalloproteases, lysozymes and other glycosidases etc.
- In preferred embodiments, the chimeric catalytic antagonists and/or redirected enzymes of this invention are made by chemically conjugating the desired enzyme (directly or through a linker) to the targeting moiety. While many strategies are known for preparing chemically conjugated chimeric molecules (see, e.g., European Patent Application No. 188,256; U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,671,958, 4,659,839, 4,414,148, 4,699,784; 4,680,338; 4,569,789; 4,589,071; 4,545,985 and 4,894,443; Borlinghaus et al. (1987)Cancer Res. 47: 40714075; Thorpe et al. (1991) Monoclonal Antibody-Toxin Conjugates: Aiming the Magic Bullet, Thorpe et al., (1982) Monoclonal Antibodies in Clinical Medicine, Academic Press, pp. 168-190; Waldmann (1991) Science, 252: 1657, and the like), in a preferred embodiment, the targeting moiety is derivatized/functionalized with a reactive group that can react with an available R group (e.g. NH2, N, NH, OH, COOH, SH, etc.) on an amino acid residue comprising the enzyme. In particularly preferred embodiments, the targeting moiety is derivatized as a methanethiosulfonate reagent that can then react with the —SH in a cysteine to provide the targeting moiety coupled in place of the thiol hydrogen on the cysteine. The coupling can be direct or through a linker.
- In certain embodiments, the cysteine to which the targeting moiety is attached is a native cysteine in the enzyme, however, in preferred embodiments the cysteine is a cysteine substituted for a different native amino acid residue in the enzyme. The enzyme so modified is, optionally, referred to as a mutant enzyme. Chimeric molecules of this invention in which the targeting molecule is chemically coupled to a mutant enzyme are, optionally, referred to as Chemically Modified Mutants (CMMs).
- Typically, once the targeting moiety and the enzyme that are to be coupled are selected, e.g., as described above, the location (residue) in the enzyme for attachment of the targeting moiety is identified. Where this residue is not already a cysteine, a cysteine is substituted for the native residue. The targeting moiety, or a linker attached thereto, is derivatized as a methanethiosulfonate which can then be reacted with the cysteines —SH group as described herein. Detailed protocols for the preparation of mutant enzymes and the coupling of a targeting moiety are provided below and in the examples.
- A) Production of Mutant Enzymes for Chemical Modification.
- 1) Selection of Residues for Modification.
- In general, virtually any residue of the enzyme can be selected for mutagenesis (e.g. substitution of a cysteine) and chemical modification to introduce a targeting moiety, as long as the modification retains the desired level of activity of the subject enzyme. Typically this is accomplished by making the substitution at a location that does not block critical substrate interactions or drastically alter folding/conformation of the subject enzyme.
- Suitable sites for introduction of a targeting moiety can be determined by substituting cysteine, and optionally an attached targeting moiety, and assaying the enzymes for the desired activity. With the current advances in combinatorial chemistry and high throughput screening systems such modifications and screening can be accomplished with only routine experimentation.
- In a preferred embodiment, however, residues for modification/substitution in the enzyme (e.g. serine hydrolase) are rationally selected. Preferred sites include sites not in critical conformation determining regions and sites disposed away from the subsite(s) of the enzyme. However, in other preferred embodiments, particularly where it is desired to enhance, or otherwise alter, substrate specificity and/or activity, preferred amino acid residues selected for modification include residues expected to be important discriminatory sites near, adjacent to or within the substrate binding region of the enzyme. Such residues are determined from mutagenesis experiments where the subsite residues are systematically mutagenized and the effect of such mutagenesis on binding specificity and/or enzymatic activity is determined. In addition, important residues can be identified from inspection of crystal structures of the enzyme alone or in complex with subtrate, substrate analogues or inhibitors and/or from predicted protein folding or protein-protein interactions determined using protein modeling software (e.g., Quanta, Cerius, Insight (Molecular Simulations Inc.) and Frodo (academic software). Side chains situated to alter interaction at subsites defined by Berger and Schechter can be selected based on the crystallographic models of the enzymes and extrapolated to homologous enzymes if necessary if structural information on a specific enzyme is unavailable. InB. lentus subtilisin sites 62, 156, 166, 217 and 222 are important substrate specificity determining sites. Additional related sites include position 96, 104, 107, 189 and 209 in subtilisin and homologous positions in related enzymes. In preferred embodiments, such residues typically lie in the S1, S2, S4, S1′, S2′, or S3′ subsites although it will be appreciated that in certain cases, alteration of residues in other subsites can also produce dramatic effects.
- In one particularly preferred embodiment, where the serine hydrolase is a subtilisin-type serine hydrolase, preferred residues for mutation include, but are not limited to residues at or near residues 156 and 166 in the S1 subsite, residues 217 and 222 in the S1′ subsite, residue 62 in the S2 subsite, and Leu96, Val104, Ile107, Phe189 and Tyr209 or residues at or near homologous positions other subtilisin-type serine proteases (preferably positions within subsites).
- In another preferred embodiment, where the serine hydrolase is a trypsin-chymotrypsin type serine hydrolase, preferred residues for mutation include, but are not limited to, residues at or near residues Tyr94, Leu99, Gln175, Asp189, Ser190, Gln192, Leu111, Phe175, Tyr176, Ser182, Leu184, Phe189, Tyr214, Asp231, Lys234, and Ile243 of trypsin (Protein Databank Entry 1TPP) or residues at or near homologous positions of other chymotrypsin-type (trypsin-chymotrypsin-type) serine proteases (preferably positions within subsites).
- In still another preferred embodiment, where the serine hydrolase is an alpha/beta serine hydrolase, preferred residues for mutation include, but are not limited to, residues at or near the following residues: Trp104, Thr138, Leu144, Val154, Ile189, Ala 225, Leu278 and Ile185, where these are residues ofCandida antartica lipase (Protein Data Bank entry 1tca) or residues at homologous positions of other alpha/beta type serine hydrolases (preferably positions within subsites).
- Preferably the amino acids replaced in the enzyme by cysteines are selected from the group consisting of asparagine, leucine, methionine, or serine. More preferably the amino acid to be replaced is located in or near a subsite of the enzyme preferably the S1, S1′ or S2 subsites. More preferably, in a subtilisin the amino acids to be replaced are N62, L217, M222, S156,S166, site 104, site 107 (S4), site 96 (S2), site 189(S2′) and site 209 (S1′/S3′) or their homologues where the numbered position corresponds to naturally occurring subtilisin fromBacilus amyloliquefaciens or to equivalent amino acid residues in other subtilisins such as Bacillus lentus subtilisin.
- The chimeric molecules of this invention are not limited to serine hydrolases. In addition to other enzymes, in particularly preferred embodiments, this invention includes other chimeric proteases. Such proteases include, but are not limited to aspartyl proteases, cysteine proteases, metalloproteases, and the like.
- Where the protease is aspartyl protease such as pepsin, preferred residues for mutation include, but are not limited to, amino acid(s) corresponding (e.g. at a homologous position) to a residue at or near the following residues Tyr9, Met12, Gln13, Gly76, Thr77, Phe111, Phe 117, Ser127, Ile 128, Ser130, Tyr189, Ile213, Glu239, Met245, Gln 287, Met 289, Asn290, Leu291, and Glu294, where these “reference” residues are residues in the mature human pepsin (Protein Data Bank entry 1PSN).
- Where the protease is cysteine protease, preferred residues for mutation include, but are not limited to, amino acid(s) corresponding (e.g. at a homologous position) to a residue at or near the following residues Asn18, Ser21, Asn64, Tyr67, Trp69, Gln112, Gln142. Asp158, Trp177, and Phe207, where these reference residues are residues in the mature papain (Protein Data Bank entry 1BQI).
- Where the protease is metalloprotease, preferred residues for mutation include, but are not limited to, amino acid(s) corresponding (e.g. at a homologous position) to a residue at or near the following residues Leu111, Phe175, Tyr176, Ser182, Leu184, Phe189, Tyr214, Asp231, Lys234, and Ile243, where these reference residues are residues in the mature human matrix metalloprotease (Protein Data Bank entry 830C).
- 2) Introduction of Cysteine.
- The substitution of a cysteine for one or more native residue(s) in the enzyme (e.g. serine hydrolase) can be accomplished using routine methods well known to those of ordinary skill in the art. In one preferred embodiment, the mutants described herein are most efficiently prepared by site-directed mutagenesis of the DNA encoding the wild-type enzyme of interest (e.g.Bacillus lentis subtilisin). Techniques for performing site-directed mutagenesis or non-random mutagenesis are known in the art. Such methods include, but are not limited to alanine scanning mutagenesis (Cunningham and Wells (1989) Science, 244, 1081-1085), oligonucleotide-mediated mutagenesis (Adellman et al. (1983) DNA, 2, 183), cassette mutagenesis (Wells et al. (1985) Gene, 344: 315) and binding mutagenesis (Ladner et al. WO 88/06630).
- In one embodiment of the present invention, the substitute amino acid residue (e.g. cysteine) is introduced into the selected position by oligonucleotide-mediated mutagenesis using the polymerase chain reaction technique. In this approach, the gene encoding the desired native enzyme (e.g. subtilisin) is carried by a suitable plasmid. More preferably, the plasmid is an expression vector, e.g., a plasmid from the pBR, pUC, pUB, pET or pHY4 series. The plasmid can be chosen by persons skilled in the art for convenience or as desired.
- For site-directed mutagenesis, the fragment containing the selected mutation site is cleaved from the gene encoding the subject enzyme by restriction endonucleases and is used as the template in a modified PCR technique (see, Higuchi et al. (1988)Nucleic Acid Res., 16, 7351-7367). For each target substitution, an oligonucleotide containing the desired mutation is used as a mismatch primer to initiate chain extension between 5′ and 3 PCR flanking primers. The process includes two PCR reactions. In the first PCR, the mismatch primer and the 5′ primer are used to generate a DNA fragment containing the desired base substitution. The fragment is separated from the primers by electrophoresis. After purification, it is then used as the new 5′ primer in a second PCR with the 3′ primer to generate the complete fragment containing the desired base substitution. After confirmation of the mutation by sequencing, the mutant fragment is then inserted back to the position of the original fragment.
- In another approach, a cassette mutagenesis method may be used to facilitate the construction and identification of the cysteine mutants of the present invention. First, the gene encoding the serine hydrolase is obtained and sequenced in whole or in part. Then the point(s) at which it is desired to make a mutation of one or more amino acids in the expressed enzymes is identified. The sequences flanking these points are evaluated for the presence of restriction sites for replacing a short segment of the gene with an oligonucleotide which when expressed will encode the desired mutants. Such restriction sites are preferably unique sites within the serine hydrolase gene so as to facilitate the replacement of the gene segment. However, any convenient restriction site which is not overly redundant in the hydrolase gene may be used, provided the gene fragments generated by restriction digestion can be reassembled in proper sequence. If restriction sites are not present at locations within a convenient distance from the selected point (e.g., from 10 to 15 nucleotides), such sites are generated by substituting nucleotides in the gene in such a fashion that neither the reading frame nor the amino acids encoded are changed in the final construction. The task of locating suitable flanking regions and evaluating the needed changes to arrive at two convenient restriction site sequences is made routine by the redundancy of the genetic code, a restriction enzyme map of the gene and the large number of different restriction enzymes. If convenient flanking restriction site is available, the above method need be used only in connection with the flanking region which does not contain a site.
- Mutation of the gene in order to change its sequence to conform to the desired sequence is accomplished e.g., M13 primer extension in accord with generally known methods. Once the gene is cloned, the restriction sites flanking the sequence to be mutated are digested with the cognate restriction enzymes and the end termini-complementary oligonucleotide cassette(s) are ligated into the gene. The mutagenesis is enormously simplified by this method because all of the oligonucleotides can be synthesized so as to have the same restriction sites, and no synthetic linkers are necessary to create the restriction sites.
- A suitable DNA sequence computer search program simplifies the task of finding potential 5′ and 3′ convenient flanking sites. In preferred embodiments, any mutation introduced in creation of the restriction site(s) are silent to the final construction amino acid coding sequence. For a
candidate restriction site 5′ to the target codon a sequence preferably exists in the gene that contains at least all the nucleotides but for one in therecognition sequence 5′ to the cut of the candidate enzyme. For example, the blunt cutting enzyme SmaI (CCC/GGG) would be a good 5′ candidate if a nearby 5′ sequence contained NCC, CNC, or CCN. Furthermore, if N needs to be altered to C this alteration preferably leaves the amino acid coding sequence intact. In cases where a permanent silent mutation is necessary to introduce a restriction site one may want to avoid the introduction of a rarely used codon. A similar situation of SmaI would apply for 3′ flanking sites except the sequence NGG, GNG, or GGN must exist. The criteria for locating candidate enzymes are most relaxed for blunt cutting enzymes and most stringent for 4 base overhang enzymes. In general many candidate sites are available. - A particularly preferred of method of introducing cysteine mutants into the enzyme of interest is illustrated with respect to the subtilisin gene fromBacillus lentus (“SBL”). In a preferred embodiment, the gene for SBL is cloned into a bacteriophage vector (e.g. M13mp19 vector) for mutagenesis (see, e.g. U.S. Pat. No. 5,185,258). Oligonucleotide-directed mutagenesis is performed according to the method described by Zoller et al. (1983) Meth. Enzymol., 100: 468-500. The mutated sequence is then cloned, excised, and reintroduced into an expression plasmid (e.g. plasmid GG274) in the B. subtilis host. PEG (50%) is added as a stabilizer.
- The crude protein concentrate thus obtained is purified by first passing through a Sephadex™ G-25 desalting matrix with a pH 5.2 buffer (e.g. 20 mM sodium acetate, 5 mM CaCl2) to remove small molecular weight contaminants. Pooled fractions from the desalting column are then applied to a strong cation exchange column (e.g. SP Sepharose™ FF) in the sodium acetate buffer described above and the SBL is eluted with a one step gradient of 0-200 mM NaCl acetate buffer, pH 5.2. Salt-free enzyme powder is obtained following dialysis of the eluent against Millipore purified water and subsequent lyophilization.
- The purity of the mutant and wild-type enzymes, which are denatured by incubation with a 0.1 M HCl at 0° C. for 30 minutes is ascertained by SDS-PAGE on homogeneous gels (e.g. using the Phast™ system from Pharmacia, Uppsala, Sweden). The concentration of SBL is determined using the Bio-Rad (Hercules, Calif.) dye reagent kit which is based on the method of Bradford (1976)Anal. Biochem., 72: 248-254). Specific activity of the enzymes is determined as described below and in the examples.
- One of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that the protocol described above can be routinely modified, if necessary, for use with other enzymes. Other protocols for site-directed modification of proteins are well know to those of skill in the art and can be found, for example, in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,932,419 and 5,789,166, 5,705,479, 5,635,475, 5,556,747, 5,354,670, 5,352,779, 5,284,760, and 5,071,743.
- In addition, kits for site-directed mutagenesis are commercially available (see, e.g. Transfomer™ Site-Directed Mutagenesis Kit available from Toyobo).
- 3) Optimization of Coupling Site.
- A number of particularly preferred sites for introduction of the cysteine and coupling the targeting moiety are indicated herein. The positions are indicated with respect to a “reference” enzyme and “homologous” sites in related enzymes in the same family can be determined, e.g. as described herein. It may, however, be desired to optimize, coupling sites for a particular enzyme, targeting moiety combination.
- Because this invention utilizes chemically coupled targeting moieties this can be accomplished with relative ease and, at most, routine experimentation. Cysteines can be introduced, e.g. into positions near the reference site of interest, and then the targeting moiety can be readily conjugated as described herein. The resulting chimera can then be tested for the desired activity.
- The entire protein need not be re-engineered for each variation and, because particularly preferred sites are already taught herein, only a relatively few positions need be explored to optimize any particular chimeric molecule.
- 4) Other Coupling Strategies.
- In preferred embodiments, chemical coupling of the targeting moiety is to a cysteine, either naturally occurring in the subject enzyme or introduced (e.g. via site-directed mutagenesis. The chimeric molecules of this invention, however, need not be limited to molecules conjugated through cysteines. In certain embodiments the conjugation can be through virtually any other amino acid (e.g., a serine, a glycine, a tyrosine, etc.). The conjugation can be through the existing R group (using other coupling chemistries), or alternatively a sulfhydryl group (SH) can be introduced (linked) to the R group and the targeting moiety, derivatized as a methanethiosulfonate reagent, can be coupled, e.g. as illustrated in the examples.
- 5) Expression of the Mutated Enzyme.
- In a preferred embodiment, the mutated enzyme is expressed from a heterologous nucleic acid in a host cell. The expressed enzyme is then isolated and, if necessary, purified. The choice of host cell and expression vectors will to a large extent depend upon the enzyme of choice and its source.
- A useful expression vector contains an element that permits stable integration of the vector into the host cell genome or autonomous replication of the vector in a host cell independent of the genome of the host cell, and preferably one or more phenotypic markers that permit easy selection of transformed host cells. The expression vector may also include control sequences encoding a promoter, ribosome binding site, translation initiation signal, and, optionally, a repressor gene, a selectable marker or various activator genes. To permit the secretion of the expressed protein, nucleotides encoding a signal sequence may be inserted prior to the coding sequence of the gene. For expression under the direction of control sequences, a gene or cDNA encoding a mutated enzyme to be used according to the invention is operably linked to the control sequences in the proper reading frame.
- Vectors containing the mutant genes obtained by site-directed mutagenesis are then used respectively to transform suitable host cells and expressed. Suitable host cells include bacteria such asE. coli or Bacillus, yeast such as S. cerevisiae, mammalian cells such as mouse fibroblast cell, or insect cells. Preferably, a bacterial expression system is used. Most preferably, the host is Bacillus. Protein expression is performed by processes well known in the art according to factors such as the selected host cell and the expression vector to culture the transformed host cell under conditions favorable for a high-level expression of the foreign plasmid.
- Methods of cloning and expression of peptides are well known to those of skill in the art. See, for example, Sambrook, et al. (1989)Molecular Cloning: a Laboratory Manual (2nd Ed., Vols. 1-3, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory), Berger and Kimmel (1987) Methods in Enzymology, Vol. 152: Guide to Molecular Cloning Techniques, Academic Press, Inc. San Diego, or Ausubel et al. (1987) Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Greene Publishing and Wiley-Interscience, New York.
- As indicated above, one particularly preferred expression system is plasmid GG274 which is then expressed in aB. subtilis host.
- B) Coupling the Targeting Moiety to the Enzyme.
- 1) Selection of Substitutents for Modifying Mutated Residues.
- A wide variety of targeting moieties can be coupled to the cysteine(s) introduced into the subject enzyme (e.g. serine hydrolase). As indicated above, the targeting moiety is selected depending on the desired use of the enzyme. As further indicated above, suitable targeting moieties include, but are not limited to, moieties that are bound by receptors, targeting moieties that are bound by antibodies and enzymes, targeting moieties that are bound by lectins, and various other targeting moieties. In certain particularly preferred embodiments, the targeting moieties are drugs or prodrugs that are specifically bound by a receptor and/or an enzyme.
- 2) Coupling Targeting Moieties to the Cysteine.
- The R group on cysteines provides a convenient relatively reactive thiol group (—SH) that can be exploited for coupling a desired targeting moiety to the cysteine. In a preferred embodiment, the targeting moiety of interest is provided, derivatized as a methanethiosulfonate reagent which, when reacted with the cysteine, results in the substituent of interest covalently coupled to the cysteine by a disulfide linkage (—S—S—).
- In a preferred embodiment, chemical modification with the methanethiosulfonate reagent(s) is carried out as described by Berglund et al. (1997)J. Am. Chem. Soc., 119: 5265-5255 and DeSantis et al. (1998) Biochemistry, 37: 5968-5973. Briefly, 200 μL of a 1 M solution of the methanethiosulfonate (MTS) reagent is added to a solution (5-10 mg/mL, 3.5 mL) of the cysteine mutant in 70 mM CHES, 5 mM MES, 2 mM CaCl2, pH 9.5. The MTS reagent is added in two portions over 30 minutes. Reaction mixtures are kept at 20° C. with continuous end-over-end mixing. Reactions are monitored by following the specific activity (e.g. with suc-AAPF-pNA) and by tests for residual free thiol (e.g. with Ellman's reagent). Once the reaction is complete, the reaction mixture is loaded on a Sephadex™ PD-10 G25 column with 5 mM MES and 2 mM CaCl2, pH 6.5. The protein fraction is then dialyzed against 1 mM CaCl2 and the dialysate is lyophilized. In a particulary preferred embodiment the fraction is dialyzed against pH 6.5 MES then flash frozen.
- In certain instances, where the targeting moiety that is to be coupled to the cysteine, bears reactive groups the reactive groups may be derivatized with, appropriate blocking/protecting groups to prevent undesired reactions during the coupling. Similarly, where the serine hydrolase contains one or more cysteines that are not to be derivatized, the cysteines may be replaced with other amino acids (e.g. via site directed mutagenesis) and/or the thiol group(s) on these cysteines may be derivatized with appropriate protecting groups (e.g. (e.g. benzyl, trityl, tert-butyl, MOM, acetyl, thiocarbonate, thiocarbamate, and others). The use of blocking/protecting groups is well know to those of skill in the art (see, e.g.,Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis” Theodora W. Greene and Peter G. M. Wuts Third Edition, Wiley-Interscience, Toronto, (1999), pp 454-493.)
- While in particularly preferred embodiments, a cysteine is introduced/substituted into the enzyme, in certain embodiments, other amino acids (e.g. lysine, histadine, etc.) may be introduced, and in certain embodiments, the targeting moiety may be coupled to these residues.
- Derivatization of a number of targeting moieties and their coupling to mutant enzymes is illustrated in the examples provided herein.
- C) Screening Chemically Chimeric Colecules for Desired Activity.
- The chimeric molecules of this invention are typically screened for the activity or activities of interest. The activity of interest depends on the desired use of the chimeric molecule. Thus, for example, in the case of catalytic antagonists of this invention, the chimeric molecule may be assayed for two properties: 1) The ability to reduce or eliminate the activity of the target, e.g., where the target is biologically active, or simply to partially or fully degrade the target, e.g. where the target is not biologically active; and 2) the ability to release from the target after the target is degraded and to bind and degrade another target. Alternatively, the chimieric molecule may simply be assayed for activity (e.g. the ability to perform degradations) in a substoichiometric manner.
- The details of the particular assay, will vary with the target of the chimeric molecule. Many assays for the degradation of various molecules (e.g. proteins, carbohydrates, nucleic acids, etc.) and/or the inhibition of various receptors and/or antibodies are well known to those of skill in the art. For example, in one embodiment, activity of a molecule on a cell surface receptor can be determined by providing a cell expressing the receptor and measuring the activity of the receptor in the presence or absence of the chimeric molecule. Receptor assays are commonly performed in oocytes (e.g. Xenopus oocytes) into which an RNA encoding the subject receptor is inserted. Receptor activity is monitored by measuring electrochemical activity (e.g. via patch clamps, etc.), uptake of receptor substrates, and the like. Such methods are well known to those of skill in the art and described in detail, for example, Racke et al. (1993)FEBS Letters 333(1,2):132-136. Assays for ligand binding, alteration of enzyme activity, and the like are also well known to those of skill in the art. In addition, a number of suitable assays are provided in the examples.
- From the foregoing discussion myriad applications/uses of the chimeric molecules of this invention will be apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art. Moreover, a number of specific embodiments and applications are described in the discussion of targeting moieties. By way of further illustration, however, a number of specific, particularly preferred embodiments are discussed below.
- A) Therapeutics Based on Targeted Destruction
- As indicated above, the catalytic antagonists of this invention can be used as therapeutic in a wide number of pathologies including, but not limited to inhibitors of viral infection and/or replication, inhibitors of bacterial infection and/or biofilm formation, modulators of an immune response, modulators of an autoimmune response, inhibitors of an inflammatory response, and the like. More generally, as indicated above, the catalytic antagonists of this invention can be used to replace existing pharmaceuticals where the pharmaceutical acts by inhibiting and/or antagonizing a receptor.
- It was explained above, that a wide variety of pharmaceuticals act as antagonists of receptors or receptor mediated activity. These pharmaceuticals typically specifically bind a particular receptor and or enzyme. The use of such pharmaceuticals as targeting moieties in catalytic antagonists of this invention where they are attached to an enzyme (e.g. a serine hydrolase) that degrades the target receptor and/or enzyme essentially renders the drug catalytic. Thus, instead of acting in a stoichiometric manner (a single drug molecule blocks/antagonizes a single receptor), when converted into catalytic antagonists, the new drug acts in a substoichiometic manner (a single molecule can antagonize an essentially unlimited number of receptors). Moreover, in contrast to the drug alone (where the receptor often regains activity when the drug is released), a receptor bound by a catalytic antagonist of this invention is degraded (thereby releasing the catalytic antagonist to act on another receptor). Because the receptor is degraded it does not recover its activity. The catalytic antagonists are thus expected to provide greater efficacy at a lower dosage and to provide longer lasting activity at a particular dosage.
- Thus, in one embodiment, this invention provides methods of improving the activity of a drug. The methods involve attaching the drug to an enzyme capable of degrading the target (e.g. receptor) to which the drug binds. Preferred enzymes in this context include hydrolases and even more preferably include proteases (e.g. serine proteases, metalloproteases, cysteine proteases, aspartyl proteases, etc.).
- It was explained above, however, that the targeting moieties need not be limited to drugs. A wide variety of other targeting moieties are suitable as well and provide catalytic antagonists useful in a wide variety of therapeutic contexts. Thus, for example, in one embodiment, the targeting moiety can be a molecule that specifically binds to the CCR5 and/or CXCR2 receptors, commonly found on lymphocytes (e.g. T-cells). CCR5 and CXCR2 receptors are implicated in the infection of a cell by HIV and persons defective in one or more of these receptors typically demonstrate resistance to HIV infection. Targeted destruction/inhibition of either or both of these receptors, e.g. by a catalytic antagonist comprising a CCR5 and/or CXCR2 specific targeting agent attached to a suitable hydrolase (e.g. subtilisin) will increase the target cell's resistance to HIV infection.
- In another embodiment, glycosidases involved in N-linked protein glycosylation can be specifically targeted (e.g. using an Aza-sugar targeting moiety) attached to a suitable hydrolase (e.g. subtilisin, pepsin, etc.). Such a catalytic antagonist will be of use in the treatment of HIV, herpes, other viruses, and various cancers.
- Catalytic antagonists comprising a sugar targeting moiety attached to a suitable hydrolase (e.g. subtilisin, pepsin, etc.) will be useful in the treatment of a wide variety of conditions, including inflammatory responses (e.g. associated with arthritis, septic shock, myocardial infarction, etc.), bacterial binding to cells and subsequent infection (e.g.H. pylori infection associated with ulcers). Where the targeting moiety is a Galα(1,4)Gal pathogenic E. coli infections can be blocked. In addition, lectin-directed catalytic antagonists can be used to inhibit biofilm formation in vivo or ex vivo.
- In still another embodiment the targeting moiety can be a sialic acid sugar (or mimetics such as Rilenza (Glaxo-Wellcome) or the like). When attached to a suitable hydrolase (e.g. subtilisin) the catalytic antagonist can specifically target the sialidase activity of viruses such as influenza.
- The chimeric catalytic antagonists of this invention can also be used to specifically target hyperproliferative and/or invasive cells (e.g. metastatic cells). Various enzymes (e.g. especially matrix metalloproteases) are known to be highly active in invasive cells. These enzymes can be specifically targeted using a number of targeting moieties (e.g. crown ethers). When attached to suitable hydrolase (e.g. a subtilisin) the catalytic antagonist will degrade the target enzyme (e.g. metalloprotease) and thereby interfere with or eliminate the ability of a cell to invade, e.g. a basement membrane, thereby slowing the progression of a cancer.
- The catalytic antagonists of this invention can also be used to target and alter a variety of immune processes. Thus, for example, by using a target directed at a T-cell receptor, e.g. by using a MHC complex from a xenotransplant, it is possible to inhibit immune cells that mount an immune response directed against that antigen. In a related embodiment, alpha-Gal epitope disaccharide (Galα(1,3)Gal) can be used as a targeting moiety and (e.g. when attached to a subtilisin) can bind to and specifically inhibit alpha-Gal epitope specific antibodies thereby mitigating host rejection of a xenograft. Similarly, known allergens (e.g. various pollens or epitopes present on such allergens) can be used as targeting moieties to target and inhibit T-cells and/or antibodies that specifically recognize such antigens. This will mitigate allergic reactions against such allergens.
- B) Drug Delivery Strategies
- As indicated above, the chimeric molecules can be used in various drug delivery strategies to specifically target a therapeutic activity to a cell, organ, or tissue of interest. In certain embodiments, as described above, enzymes capable of converting prodrugs to their active form are attached to a targeting moiety (e.g. a tumor cell specific moiety) that localizes them to the site of desired activity (e.g. a tumor cell), various prodrugs are known to those of skill in the art and include, but are not limited to ganclovir activated by thymidine kinase, phosphenytoin converted to phenytoin by a phosphatase, depivefrin is converted to epinephrine by an esterase and the like.
- Another example of a “drug delivery” strategy uses the targeted chimeric molecule to deliver an enzyme having an activity that supplements an absent, typically endogenous activity. Thus, for example, glucocerebrosidase may be directed, e.g. to spleen cells in the treatment of Gaucher's or Tay-Sachs disease. Similarly superoxide dismutase may be attached to liver cell specific targeting moieties so that it is targeted to liver tissue where it can provide anti-oxidant activity.
- C) Other Embodiments.
- In other particularly preferred embodiments, the chimeric molecules of this invention can be used to target and destroy particular preselected molecules whether or not they have a biological activity. Thus, for example, components of various soils or stains (e.g. milk, blood, eggs, grass stains, oil stains, etc.) can be specifically targeted. For example, avidin/egg protein can be specifically targeted by using a biotin as a targeting moiety to specifically directed, e.g. a protease to the site. The stain is degraded/digested and thereby released from the underlying substrate. Such specifically targeted chimeras are particularly in various cleaning formulations.
- The therapeutic chimeric molecules of this invention, (e.g. the therapeutic catalytic antagonists) are useful for intravenous, parenteral, topical, oral, or local administration (e.g., by aerosol or transdermally). Particularly preferred modes of administration include intra-arterial injection, more preferably intra-peritoneal intra-hepatic artery injection or, where it is desired to deliver a composition to the brain, (e.g., for treatment of brain tumors) a carotid artery or an artery of the carotid system of arteries (e.g., occipital artery, auricular artery, temporal artery, cerebral artery, maxillary artery, etc.). The chimeric molecules are typically combined with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier (excipient) to form a pharmacological composition. Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers can contain a physiologically acceptable compound that acts, for example, to stabilize the composition or to increase or decrease the absorption of the agent. Physiologically acceptable compounds can include, for example, carbohydrates, such as glucose, sucrose, or dextrans, antioxidants, such as ascorbic acid or glutathione, chelating agents, low molecular weight proteins, compositions that reduce the clearance or hydrolysis of the anti-mitotic agents, or excipients or other stabilizers and/or buffers.
- Other physiologically acceptable compounds include wetting agents, emulsifying agents, dispersing agents or preservatives which are particularly useful for preventing the growth or action of microorganisms. Various preservatives are well known and include, for example, phenol and ascorbic acid. One skilled in the art would appreciate that the choice of a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, including a physiologically acceptable compound depends, for example, on the route of administration of the chimeric molecule and on the particular physio-chemical characteristics of the agent.
- The pharmaceutical compositions can be administered in a variety of unit dosage forms depending upon the method of administration. For example, unit dosage forms suitable for oral administration include powder, tablets, pills, capsules and lozenges. It is recognized that the chimeric molecules, when administered orally, are preferably protected from digestion. This is typically accomplished either by complexing the subject molecule with a composition to render it resistant to acidic and enzymatic hydrolysis or by packaging the chimeric molecule agent in an appropriately resistant carrier such as a liposome. Means of protecting compounds from digestion are well known in the art (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,391,377 describing lipid compositions for oral delivery of therapeutic agents).
- Certain chimeric molecules of this invention may be only marginally soluble in aqueous solutions. In a preferred embodiment, these compositions are either delivered directly to the desired site (e.g. by injection, cannulization, or direct application during a surgical procedure) or they are solubilized in an acceptable excipient.
- The pharmaceutical compositions of this invention are useful for topical administration e.g., in surgical wounds to treat incipient tumors, neoplastic and metastatic cells and their precursors. In another embodiment, the compositions are useful for parenteral administration, such as intravenous administration or administration into a body cavity or lumen of an organ. The compositions for administration will commonly comprise a solution of the chimeric molecule agent dissolved in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, preferably an aqueous carrier for water-soluble chimeric molecules. A variety of carriers can be used, e.g., buffered saline and the like. These solutions are sterile and generally free of undesirable matter. These compositions may be sterilized by conventional, well known sterilization techniques. The compositions may contain pharmaceutically acceptable auxiliary substances as required to approximate physiological conditions such as pH adjusting and buffering agents, toxicity adjusting agents and the like, for example, sodium acetate, sodium chloride, potassium chloride, calcium chloride, sodium lactate and the like.
- The concentration of chimeric molecule in these formulations can vary widely, and will be selected primarily based on fluid volumes, viscosities, body weight and the like in accordance with the particular mode of administration selected and the patient's needs. Actual methods for preparing administrable compositions will be known or apparent to those skilled in the art and are described in more detail in such publications asRemington's Pharmaceutical Science, 15th ed., Mack Publishing Company, Easton, Pa. (1980).
- Dosages for typical chemotherapeutics are well known to those of skill in the art. Moreover, such dosages are typically advisorial in nature and may be adjusted depending on the particular therapeutic context, patient tolerance, etc. Single or multiple administrations of the compositions may be administered depending on the dosage and frequency as required and tolerated by the patient. In any event, the composition should provide a sufficient quantity of the proteins of this invention to effectively treat the patient.
- In the case of therapeutic chimeric molecules dosage for a typical pharmaceutical composition for intravenous administration would be about 0.01 to per patient per day. Dosages from 0.1 up to about 1000 mg per patient per day may be used, particularly when the drug is administered to a secluded site and not into the blood stream, such as into a body cavity or into a lumen of an organ.
- In certain embodiments, this invention provides kits for the creation and/or use of the chimeric molecules of this invention. In one embodiment the kits comprise one or more containers containing one or more targeting moieties derivatized as methanesulfonates for coupling to a cysteine in an enzyme. In addition or alternatively the kits may comprise one or more enzymes, more preferably mutant enzymes having an inserted cysteine ready for coupling to a methanesulfonate derivatized targeting moiety. When provided in this manner the kits enable one or ordinary skill in the art to assemble the desired chimeric molecule for a particular use. Thus, for example one typically kit may include a multiplicity of methanesulfonate derivatized targeting moieties and one or more enzymes suitable for coupling. The desired enzyme is then reacted (as described herein) with the desired targeting moiety to produce the desired chimeric molecule. Such kits may additional comprise one or more of the reagents utilized in a typical coupling reaction.
- In another embodiment, this invention provides one or more chimeric molecules (e.g. catalytic antagonists and/or redirected enzymes) of this invention. The chimeric molecules can be provided as a dry (e.g. lyophilized powder) or in solution and/or as an emulsion. In certain embodiments the chimeric molecules are provided in, or along with, a pharmacological excipient and, optionally, may be provided in a unit dosage format.
- The kits may optionally include any reagents and/or apparatus to facilitate the uses described herein. Such reagents include, but are not limited to buffers, organic solvents, labels, labeled antibodies, bioreactors, cells, etc.
- In addition, the kits may include instructional materials containing directions (i.e., protocols) for the assembly of chimeric molecules of this invention and/or for the use thereof. While the instructional materials typically comprise written or printed materials they are not limited to such. Any medium capable of storing such instructions and communicating them to an end user is contemplated by this invention. Such media include, but are not limited to electronic storage media (e.g., magnetic discs, tapes, cartridges, chips), optical media (e.g., CD ROM), and the like. Such media may include addresses to internet sites that provide such instructional materials.
- The following examples are offered to illustrate, but not to limit the claimed invention. The following examples detail the construction and evaluation of a number of chimeric molecules of this invention. In particular, Examples 1-4 demonstrates the highly specific selectivity of a catalytic antagonist of this invention in which the targeting moiety is a known enzyme inhibitor. Examples 5 through 7 detail the construction and evaluation of chimeric molecules in which the chimeric molecules are targeted to the binding protein lectin concanavalin A. Examples 8 through 10 detail the construction and evaluation of chimeric molecules in which the chimeric molecules are targeted to the binding protein avidin. Examples 11 and 12 detail the construction and evaluation of chimeric molecules in which the chimeric molecules are targeted to a monoclonal anti-biotin antibody IgG. Example 13 details the respective stoichiometry of these examples.
- In order to direct SBL towards various enzyme targets for their degradation, we decided to attach specific inhibitors for those enzymes to SBL by our combined site directed mutagenesis chemical modification (CMM) approach FIG. 2).
- In a preferred embodiment the inhibitor(s) chosen as targeting moieties for this approach are strong inhibitor(s)/degraders of the target enzyme, but are poor inhibitors of the CMM. In this example, alcohol dehydrogenase (ADH), which is strongly inhibited by 4-pyrazole derivatives, was chosen as the target enzyme and the inhibitors chosen as targeting were pyrazoles known to inhibit ADH. The modified CMM in this case was a subtilisin (SBL).s
- In one embodiment, horse liver alcohol dehydrogenase (HLADH) was chosen as the target enzyme. Several 4-substituted pyrazoles are described as reasonable selective inhibitors of HLADH (Theorell and Yonetani (1963)Biochem. Z., 388: 537-553; Theorell et al. (1969) Acta Chem. Scand., 23: 255-260; Tolf et al. (1979) Acta Chem. Scand. B 33: 483-487; Tolf et al. (1982) Acta Chem. Scand. B, 36: 101-107). Pyrazole derivatives with long hydrophobic alkyl substituents in 4-position inhibit HLADH activity especially strongly. The binding affinity of this substituent and hence the inhibitory power of the 4-pyrazole increases as the alkyl chain length increases up to six carbon atoms. 4-hexylpyrazole is known to inhibit horse liver alcohol dehydrogenase (LADH) with KI=0.5 nm. Therefore, we decided to synthesize a pyrazole-MTS reagent bearing a methanesulfonyl-hexyl side chain at the 4-position. The synthesis of the MTS-pyrazole reagent. is illustrated by scheme 11 (FIG. 3).
- Synthesis of the MTS-Pyrazole
- Halogen-metal exchange of 4-iodopyrazole (1) with n-BuLi, and subsequent coupling with an excess of 1,6-dibromohexane (2) provided 4-(6-bromo)-hexylpyrazole (3). Attempts to purify
compound 3 were only partially successful. Reaction ofcrude bromide 3 with sodium methanethiosulfonate furnished the MTS-pyrazole 4 in 16% overall yield. Although the overall yield was low, no attempts towards optimization were made as this would have probably required the use of protecting groups. Therefore, the MTS-pyrazole 4 can be synthesized in a straightforward two step reaction sequence as outlined in scheme 11 (FIG. 3). - Inhibition of SBL-WT by Pyrazole
- To determine how much modification with a pyrazole will influence the catalytic activity of SBL we carried out KI measurements for SBL-WT using the method of Waley (Waley (1982) Biochem. J., 205: 631) with our standard substrate suc-AAPFpNA and standard conditions (pH 8.6, 0.1 M Tris with 0.005
% Tween pyrazole 4 failed due to the insolubility of the pyrazole compound. - Modification and Characterization of the Pyrazole-CMMs
- N62C, L217C, S166C, and S156C mutants were modified with the MTS-
pyrazole reagent 4 by reaction at pH 9.5 following the standard protocol. In all cases the resulting enzymes were active after modification and the data for amidase kinetics (substrate suc-AAPFpNA) and ESMS are shown in Table 2.TABLE 2 vKinetic constants for pyrazole-CMMs Pyrazole- Amidase Kinetics ESMS CMM kcat KM kcat/KM Calc. Found S166C 10.4 ± 0.2 0.46 ± 0.03 22.7 ± 1.4 26896 26900 S156C 59.8 ± 1.5 0.65 ± 0.05 92.2 ± 7.2 26896 26897 N62C 97.9 ± 2.3 0.90 ± 0.05 109 ± 6.6 26869 26868 L217C 61.3 ± 1.0 0.87 ± 0.04 70.2 ± 3.1 26870 ???-a GG36-WT 153 ± 4 0.73 ± 0.05 209 ± 15 26698 26694 - Although it has the smallest KM value among all pyrazole-CMMs, the S166C-S5-Pyrazole CMM shows the lowest kcat/KM; about 9 times smaller than for SBL-WT.
- The kcat of the S156- and L217C-S-Pyrazole CMM were both very similar and about 2.5 times smaller than for the WT enzyme. Their substrate binding properties, however, were fairly different: S156C-S-Pyrazole bound better than SBL-WT whereas the KM of L217C-S-Pyrazole is larger than that of the WT enzyme.
- N62C-S-Pyrazole is slightly more active than the other pyrazole CMMs and its kcat is just 1.5 times smaller compared to SBL-WT. However it had the largest KM among all pyrazole-CMMs and its kcat/KM was about 2 times smaller compared to SBL-WT.
- 4-(6-Methanethiosulfonyl)hexylpyrazole (MTS-Pyrazole) (4)
- n-Butyl lithium (2.5 M solution in hexanes, 12.4 mL, 30.9 mmol) was added dropwise to a solution of 4-iodopyrazole (1) (2.00 g, 10.3 mmol) in THF (40 mL) at −78° C. under N2. After 0.5 h a solution of 1,6-dibromohexane (2) (5.03 g, 20.6 mmol) in THF (40 mL) was added slowly. When the addition was complete, the reaction mixture was allowed to warm up to rt and was stirred overnight. Water (50 mL) was added, the layers were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted with AcOEt (4×50 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with brine (50 mL) and dried (MgSO4). Evaporation of the solvent and subsequent drying under vacuum furnished 5.03 g crude product as a brown oil. Separation by flash chromatography (silica gel, hexanes:AcOEt, gradient elution, 95:5 to 55:45) provided 0.810 g (34%) 4-(6-bromo)-hexylpyrazole (3) as a yellow oil; 1H NMR (CDCl3, 300 MHz) δ1.35-1.48 (m, 4H), 1.51-1.63 (m, 2H), 1.79-1.90 (m, 2H), 2.50 (t, J1′,2′7.5 Hz, 2H, H-1′), 3.40 (t, J5′,6′ 7.0 Hz, 2H, H-6′), 7.42 (s, 2H, H-3, H-5), 11.5 (s, 1H, NH); 13C NMR (CDCl3, 75.5 MHz) δ 23.9, 28.0, 28.4, 30.8, 32.8, 34.1 [(CH2)6], 120.9 (C-4) 132.6* (C-3, C-5), *signal has double intensity. Both NMR spectra contain additional signals due to impurities. Bromo-
compound 3 was not further purified and characterized. Furthermore 2.41 g (48%)dibromide 2 could be reisolated. - NaSSO2Me (0.319 g, 2.38 mmol) was added to a solution of crude bromide 2 (0.400 g, max. 1.73 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) and the resulting solution heated under nitrogen at 50° C. After 16 h water (10 mL) and AcOEt (10 mL) were added, the layers were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted with AcOEt (4×10 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with brine (10 mL) and dried (MgSO4). Evaporation of the solvent and subsequent drying under vacuum furnished 0.350 g crude product as a yellow oil. Separation by flash chromatography (silica gel, hexanes : AcOEt, gradient elution, 8:2 to 0:1) furnished 0.215 g (16% over two steps) 4-(6-methanethiosulfonyl)-hexylpyrazole (4) as a colourless solid, mp 68-70; IR (KBr) 3170, 3165 (NH), 3065, 3024 (arC—H), 2932, 2854 (C—H), 1306, 1122 (S—SO2) cm−1; 1H NMR (CDCl3, 300 MHz) δ 1.35-1.47 (m, 4H), 1.52-1.62 (m, 2H), 1.70-1.79 (m, 2H), 2.48 (t, J1′,2′ 7.5 Hz, 2H, H-1′), 3.14 (t, J5′,6′ 7.5 Hz 2H, H-6′), 3.30 (s, 3H, CH3SO2), 7.40 (s, 2H, H-3, H-5), 11.5 (s, 1H, NH); 13C NMR (CDCl3, 75.5 MHz) δ 23.6, 28.0, 28.2, 30.4, 36.1 [(CH2)5], 50.3 (CH3SO2), 120.4 (C-4), 132.3* (C-3, C-5), *signal has double intensity; HRMS m/z (EI) Found 263.0882 (M+H+); C10H19N2O2S2 requires 263.0888.
- Standard Modification Protocol
- General Procedure for Modification of SBL Mutants Stored as Flash-frozen Solutions:
- A 1.25 mL frozen aliquot of the mutant enzyme (N62C, L217C or S166C) containing approximately 25 mg of enzyme was thawed and added to 1.25 mL of Modifying Buffer (see below) in a polypropylene test-tube. To this solution was added 100 μL of a 0.2 M MTS reagent solution The mixture was sealed, vortexed and placed on an end-over-end rotator at room temperature. When the modification was complete (determined by a specific activity assay, using succinyl-AlaAlaProPhe-p-nitroanilide [ε410=8800 M−1 cm−1](Bonneau et al. (1991) J Am. Chem. Soc. 119: 1026-1030.) as substrate in 0.1 M Tris-HCl buffer containing 0.005
% Tween - Modifying Buffer: pH 9.5: 140 mM CHES, 2 mM CaCl2
- pH 7.5: 140 mM HEPES, 2 mM CaCl2
- pH 5.5: 140mM MES, 2 mM CaCl2
- Quench Buffer: Reactions at pH 7.5-9.5: 5
mM MES 1 mM CaCl2 pH 6.5 - Reactions at pH 5.5: 5
mM MES 1 mM CaCl2 pH 5.5 - The free thiol content of all CMMs, was determined spectrophotometrically by titration with Ellman's reagent in phosphate buffer 0.25 M, pH 8.0. In all cases no free thiol was detected. Modified enzymes were analyzed by nondenaturing gradient (8-25%) gels at pH 4.2, run towards the cathode, on the Pharmacia Phast-system and appeared as a single band. Prior to ES-MS analysis CMMs were purified by FPLC (BioRad, Biologic System) on a
Source 15 RPC matrix (17-0727-20 from Pharmacia) with 5% acetonitrile, 0.01% TFA as the running buffer and eluted with 80% acetonitrile, 0.01% TFA in a one step gradient. - General Procedure for Modification of SBL Mutants Stored as Lyophilized Powders:
- This procedure is only used with S156C, which is stored as a lyophilized powder to prevent dimerization. Into a polypropylene test tube was weighed about 25-30 mg of lyophilized S156C. This was dissolved in the following modifying buffers (2.5 mL):
- pH 9.5: 70 mM CHES, 2 mM CaCl2
- pH 7.5: 70 mM HEPES, 2 mM CaCl2
- pH 5.5: 70 mM MES, 2 mM CaCl2
- MTS reagent was added and the reaction then proceeded as for flash-frozen mutant solutions, using the appropriate quench buffer.
- General Method for Amidase Kinetics Analysis of SBL Conjugates
- Michaelis-Menten constants were measured at 25(±0.2)° C. by curve fitting (GraFit® 3.03) of the initial rate data determined at nine concentrations (0.125 mM-3.0 mM) of succinyl-AAPF-pNA substrate in 0.1 M Tris-HCl buffer containing 0.005
% Tween - General Method for Esterase Kinetics Analysis of SBL Conjugates
- Specificity constants determined using the low substrate approximation were measured indirectly using Ellman's reagent (ε412=13600 M−1cm−1) using 15 or 30 μM succinyl-AAPF-SBn as substrate in 0.1 M Tris.HCl, containing 0.005 vol % Tween-80, 1 vol % 37.5 mM Ellman's reagent in DMSO, pH 8.6.
- Michaelis-Menten constants were measured at 25° C. by curve fitting (Grafit® 3.03) of the initial rate data determined at eight concentrations (31.25 μM-2.0 mM) of the succinyl-AAPF-SBn substrate, followed indirectly using Ellman's reagent in 0.1 M Tris.HCl, containing 0.005 vol % Tween-80, 1 vol % 37.5 mM Ellman's reagent in DMSO, pH 8.6.
- Targeting of pyrazole-CMMs to HLADH will be evident from reduction in ADH activity due to inhibition by the pyrazole moiety of the CMM.
- Hence, the catalytic activity of HLADH in absence and presence of the pyrazole-CMMs was investigated. Controls were carried out with SBL-WT. The amount of CMM and WT used was calculated for equal amounts of active enzyme as determined by PMSF titration. Cyclohexanol was used as HLADH substrate and NAD+ as cofactor. FIG. 4 shows the results of this “Targeting Assay”.
- As expected, SBL-WT did not influence the activity of HLADH significantly, whereas all pyrazole-CMMs inhibit HLADH. The most efficient inhibition was caused by S156C-S-Pyrazole, the only CMM with surface exposed side chain. N62C-S-Pyrazole and L217C-S-Pyrazole demonstrated very similar inhibition power. Surprisingly, S166C-S-Pyrazole inhibited HLADH quite strongly, even though its modified side chain is buried in the S1 pocket. This may be rationalized in terms of the pyrazole moiety adopting a conformation where it bends outside the binding pocket. These results clearly demonstrate the ability of our modified enzymes to target another enzyme via an inhibitor.
- Targeted association of CMMs with HLADH via the pyrazole inhibitor should lead to selective hydrolysis. If hydrolysis of the HLADH takes place, the oxidoreductase activity of the HLADH should be diminished or eradicated after a certain time of incubation with our CMMs. To demonstrate this, the “Targeting Assay” as described above was carried out again after 4 h incubation. Remaining HLADH activity was determined by addition of cyclohexanol as substrate. The results are shown in FIG. 5.
- Experimental for HLADH Targeting Assay
- Six cuvettes were filled as shown in Table 3.
TABLE 3 Setup for HLADH targeting assay. Cuvette Buffera/ Cyclohexaneb/ NAD+c/ HLADHd/ Inhibitor-Enzymee/ No. μL μL μL μL μL 1 2535 300 150 15 — 2 2435 300 150 15 100 of SBL-WTf (1.072 mg/mL, 64%) 3 2435 300 150 15 100 of S156C-S-Pyrazole (0.686 mg/mL) 4 2496 300 150 15 39.0 of S166C-S-Pyrazole (1.76 mg/mL) 5 2508 300 150 15 27.2 of N62C-S-Pyrazole (2.52 mg/mL) 6 2483 300 150 15 52.0 of L217C-S-Pyrazole (1.32 mg/mL) - Before addition of HLADH the cuvette was equilibrated in the spectrophotometer for two minutes. HLADH was added and A340 was measured every 20 s over a period of 300 s. The measurements were carried out in duplicate. The results ar own in Table 4.
TABLE 4 Results for HLADH targeting assay. Time [s] control SBL-WT S156CMM S166CMM N62CMM L217CMM 10 0.058 0.053 0.050 0.046 0.055 0.050 30 0.150 0.145 0.121 0.122 0.145 0.138 50 0.239 0.234 0.185 0.191 0.230 0.221 70 0.326 0.320 0.242 0.254 0.311 0.300 90 0.409 0.403 0.294 0.314 0.389 0.377 110 0.489 0.483 0.343 0.370 0.463 0.450 130 0.567 0.561 0.388 0.423 0.535 0.520 150 0.642 0.636 0.431 0.474 0.604 0.588 170 0.716 0.709 0.472 0.522 0.671 0.654 190 0.787 0.780 0.511 0.569 0.736 0.717 210 0.856 0.849 0.547 0.614 0.799 0.779 230 0.924 0.916 0.583 0.658 0.860 0.839 250 0.990 0.982 0.617 0.700 0.919 0.898 270 1.054 1.046 0.650 0.741 0.977 0.955 290 1.117 1.108 0.681 0.781 1.034 1.011 310 1.178 1.169 0.712 0.821 1.089 1.065 - Experimental for HLADH Targeting Assay
- Six eppendorf vials were filled as shown in Table 5.
TABLE 5 Setup for HLADH targeting assay. Vial Buffera/ NAD+b/ HLADHc/ Inhibitor-Enzymee/ Number μL μL μL Decoyd μL 1 535 150 15 — — 2 435 150 15 100 — 3 435 150 15 — 100 of SBL-WTf (1.072 mg/mL, 64%) 4 335 150 15 100 100 of SBL-WTf (1.072 mg/mL, 64%) 5 435 150 15 — 100 of S156C-S-Pyrazole (0.686 mg/mL) 6 335 150 15 100 100 of S156C-S-Pyrazole (0.686 mg/mL) 7 496 150 15 — 39.0 of S166C-S-Pyrazole (1.76 mg/mL) 8 396 150 15 100 39.0 of S166C-S-Pyrazole (1.76 mg/mL) 9 508 150 15 — 27.2 of N62C-S-Pyrazole (2.52 mg/mL) 10 408 150 15 100 27.2 of N62C-S-Pyrazole (2.52 mg/mL) 11 483 150 15 — 52.0 of L217C-S-Pyrazole (1.32 mg/mL) 12 383 150 15 100 52.0 of L217C-S-Pyrazole (1.32 mg/mL) - These solutions were incubated at 35° C. in a thermostat-controlled water bath for 4 h 650 μL solution of each eppendorf vial was mixed with 2 mL Assay buffer in a cuvette. After two minutes of equilibration in the spectrophotometer and autozeroing, cyclohexanol (300 μL) was added and A340 was measured every 20 s over a period of 300 s. The measurements were carried out in duplicate and are shown in Table 6.
TABLE 6 Results for HLADH targeting assay. SBL-WT S156CMM S166CMM N62CMM L217CMM time [s] Controla 1b 2c 1b 2c 1b 2c 1b 2c 1b 2c 10 0.053 0.032 0.037 −0.011 −0.010 −0.010 −0.008 0.009 0.014 0.013 0.028 30 0.140 0.097 0.104 −0.010 −0.010 −0.010 −0.009 0.024 0.046 0.051 0.081 50 0.224 0.159 0.169 −0.010 −0.009 −0.009 −0.008 0.040 0.075 0.088 0.135 70 0.304 0.219 0.231 −0.010 −0.008 −0.008 −0.006 0.056 0.106 0.126 0.184 90 0.382 0.280 0.292 −0.009 −0.008 −0.006 −0.005 0.072 0.136 0.162 0.234 110 0.456 0.338 0.351 −0.008 −0.007 −0.005 −0.004 0.088 0.165 0.198 0.283 130 0.528 0.392 0.408 −0.009 −0.006 −0.004 −0.003 0.103 0.195 0.233 0.332 150 0.598 0.448 0.466 −0.007 −0.005 −0.002 −0.002 0.119 0.224 0.268 0.378 170 0.667 0.501 0.520 −0.006 −0.004 −0.001 0.000 0.134 0.253 0.301 0.423 190 0.734 0.554 0.574 −0.005 −0.004 0.001 0.002 0.149 0.282 0.336 0.469 210 0.797 0.607 0.625 −0.005 −0.003 0.002 0.004 0.164 0.310 0.368 0.515 230 0.860 0.655 0.676 −0.004 −0.002 0.003 0.005 0.179 0.338 0.401 0.558 250 0.921 0.705 0.727 −0.003 −0.001 0.005 0.007 0.194 0.366 0.433 0.601 270 0.983 0.753 0.778 −0.002 −0.000 0.007 0.008 0.209 0.393 0.466 0.644 290 1.041 0.801 0.822 −0.002 0.001 0.009 0.011 0.224 0.420 0.497 0.687 310 1.096 0.845 0.871 −0.000 0.002 0.011 0.012 0.238 0.448 0.528 0.725 - In order to direct subtilisins (e.g. SBL) towards various enzyme targets for their degradation we decided to attach specific inhibitors for those enzymes to the subtilisin by our combined site directed mutagenesis chemical modification (CMM) approach as illustrated in FIG. 3.
- Our preliminary target has been HLADH, which is inhibited by pyrazoles. The ability of pyrazole-CMMs to selectively destroy HLADH in the presence, and in the absence, of the decoy protein, scrambled RNase A, was also explored (see examples below).
- This example describes further experiments in the presence of an active enzyme, alkaline phosphatase (AP), as a potential decoy protein. This mimics the in vivo situation where several enzymes are present in a cell, and where we are targeting the destruction of one enzyme (HLADH) while leaving the others (e.g. AP) unaffected
- Digestion experiments were performed using S166C-pyrazole as a representative CMM. The concentrations of species in the digestion mixtures (when present) were:
HLADH 2.62 μM (1.0 eq. of active sites*) AP 2.74 μM (1.05 eq. of active sites*) S166C-pyrazole 3.40 μM (1.3 eq. of active sites) - HLADH activity was monitored by periodically withdrawing a portion of the digestion mixture, and assessing the ability of the aliquot to oxidize cyclohexanol to cyclohexanone. The reaction course was monitored by observing the change of NAD+ to NADH at 340 nm as cyclohexanol was oxidized.
- Alkaline phosphatase (AP) activity was monitored by periodically withdrawing a portion of the digestion mixture, and assessing the ability of the aliquot to hydrolyze p-nitrophenyl phosphate to inorganic phosphate and p-nitrophenolate. The reaction course was monitored by observing the appearance of p-nitrophenolate at 405 nm.
- Results
- Six vials were prepared containing S166C-pyrazole, AP and/or HLADH. The HLADH (Table 7) and AP (Table 8) activities of each vial (where applicable) were periodically assayed (see experimental).
TABLE 7 HLADH activity after incubation relative to initial activity. HLADH activity after incubation* % HLADH activity as % of initial (0 h) value vial 0 h 1 h 2 h 3 h 72 h AP + HLADH + no S166C- 100 117 108 109 114 pyrazole AP + HLADH + S166C- pyrazole 100 22 19 16 2 HLADH alone 100 108 74 69 89 HLADH + S166C- pyrazole 100 54 33 30 3 -
TABLE 8 Alkaline phosphatase activity after incubation relative to initial value. AP activity after incubation* AP activity as % of initial (0 h) value vial 0 h 1 h 2 h 3 h 72 h AP + HLADH + no S166C- 100 89 77 91 88 pyrazole AP + HLADH + S166C- pyrazole 100 66 82 74 94 AP alone 100 94 94 # # AP + S166C- pyrazole 100 85 88 # # - The data are also represented graphically in FIG. 6, FIG. 7, FIG. 8, and FIG. 9.
- The data (Table 7), FIG. 6, and FIG. 8) show that HLADH activity remains constant when assayed alone or in the presence of AP. Also, AP activity is basically unaffected in the presence of S166C-pyrazole CMM (as predicted; Table 2, FIG. 3 and FIG. 5). But the activity of HLADH in the presence of S166C-pyrazole CMM is rapidly and totally lost (Table 1, FIG. 2, and FIG. 4).
- Furthermore, AP and HLADH do not interfere with each others activities or catalytic functions (Table 7, Table 8, FIG. 6, FIG. 7, FIG. 8, and FIG. 9)
- Materials/
- pH 9.0 0.1 M Glycine-NaOH Buffer with 1 mM Mg2+ and 0.1 mM Zn2+(pH 9.0 Assay Buffer):
- Glycine (0.1 mol) was dissolved in water (ca. 800 mL), and MgCl2 (1 mL of a 1 M solution in MQ water) and ZnCl2 (1 mL of a 0.1 M solution in MQ water) were added. The pH was adjusted to 9.0 with ca. 5 M NaOH solution, and the mixture was made up to 1 L.
- pH 7.4 0.05 M TRIS-HCl Buffer (pH 7.4 TRIS):
- A solution of TRIS was neutralized to pH 7.4, and was then diluted to 0.05 M.
- pH 7.8 0.05 M Triethanolamine-HCl Buffer with 3 M NaCl, 0.1 mM Mg2+ and 0.01 mM Zn2+(pH 7.8 Buffer):
- Triethanolamine (0.05 moles, 7.5 g), NaCl (3 moles, 175.5 g), MgCl2 (0.1 mL of 1 M solution) and ZnCl2 (0.1 mL of 1M solution) were dissolved in MQ water (ca. 900 mL). The pH was adjusted to 7.4 with ca 2N HCl and the resulting solution made up to 1 L.
- pH 8.6 ca. 0.1 M TRIS-HCl Buffer with 0.05% Tween, 1 mM Mg2+ and 0.1 mM Zn2+(pH 8.6 Buffer):
- MgCl2 (0.1 mL of a 1 M solution in MQ water) and ZnCl2 (0.1 mL of a 0.1 M solution in MQ water) were added to a 100 mL volumetric flask, and the flask was made up to the mark with pH 8.6 0.1 M TRIS-HCl buffer containing 0.05% Tween.
- HLADH Solution:
- Horse liver alcohol dehydrogenase (Sigma A-9589, EC 1.1.1.1, 8 mg of ca. 50% w/w protein) was dissolved in pH 7.4 TRIS (0.8 mL) to give a 10 mg/mL solution.
- Alkaline Phosphatase (AP) Solution:
- Alkaline phosphatase (Boehringer Mannheim 713 023, EC 3.1.3.1, ca. 950 μL as received in 50% w/v glycerol: buffer) was diluted with pH 7.8 buffer (ca. 15 mL), and was concentrated at 4° C. to 10-20% of its original volume using a Centriprep concentrator. A further 15 mL of pH 7.8 buffer was added, and the sample was concentrated once more. This process was repeated a further 3 times using pH 9.0 assay buffer for dilutions. After the third concentration the concentrate (ca. 1.85 mL) was collected and was stored on ice. This procedure was necessary to remove glycerol, which is a substrate for HLADH.
- NAD+ Solution:
- 33.2 mg/mL of NAD+ was dissolved in pH 9.0 assay buffer.
- Cyclohexanol Solution:
- 10 mg/mL of cyclohexanol in pH 9.0 assay buffer.
- p-Nitrophenyl Phosphate Solution (PNPP Solution):
- A tablet containing 20 mg of p-nitrophenyl phosphate (Sigma N-2765) was dissolved in pH 8.6 buffer (20 mL).
- Pyrazole-CMM:
- S166C-pyrazole (1.76 mg/mL) in MES storage buffer (p H 5.8 10 mM MES, 2 mM CaCl2).
- Assaying HLADH Activity
- Six eppendorf vials were filled as shown in Table 9:
TABLE 9 Setup for HLADH activity assay. Assay pyrazole- vial Contents label buffer/μL NAD+/μL HLADH/μL AP/μL CMM/ μL 1 AP + HLADH no CMM 100 150 15 435 0.0 2 AP + HLADH + CMM 61 150 15 435 39.0 3 AP only 26.5 0 0 43.5 0.0 4 HLADH only 535 150 15 0 0.0 5 HLADH + CMM 496 150 15 0 39.0 6 AP + CMM 22.6 0 0 43.5 39.0 - The vials were incubated at 35° C. for the times indicated in the tables below. Aliquots were periodically withdrawn in order to assay the HLADH and alkaline phosphatase activities as time progressed.
- A portion of solution (65 μL) was withdrawn from an incubation vial and was then injected into a micro-cuvette containing pH 9.0 assay buffer (200 μL). The cuvette was incubated at 25° C. for 2 minutes, and then cyclohexanol solution (30 μL) was added. The absorbance at 340 nm was then monitored for 300 s, and the O.D. change per second up to 0.2 absorbance units was recorded.
- Assaying Alkaline Phosphatase Activity
- A portion (20 μL) was withdrawn from an incubation vial and was then injected into pH 8.6 buffer (980 μL). The mixture was vortexed. 10 μL was the removed from the mixture, and was injected into a cuvette containing 990 μL of PNPP solution incubated at 25° C. The absorbance change at 405 nm was monitored for 150 s, and the O.D. change per second up to 1 Absorbance unit was recorded.
- Stoichiometry:
- Experiments were performed using 2 eq. HLADH dimer (4 eq. active sites) to 1 eq. pyrazole-CMM or WT-SBL as illustrated in Table 10.
TABLE 10 Stoichiometry. HLADH (ca. 79 kD for the dimer) SBL or pyrazole-CMM (ca. 27 kD) 2 eq. dimer (4 eq. active sites) 1 eq. (SBL/CMM is a monomer) 1.42 μM dimer (2.84 μM active sites) 0.71 μM (SBL/CMM is a monomer) - Conditions:
- The reactions were performed at pH 9.0, 0.1 M glycine-NaOH with 0.005
% Tween 80, 35° C. - Results:
- HLADH solutions were incubated in the presence of WT-SBL, S166C-pyrazole or S156C-pyrazole. A control experiment was performed in the absence of any SBL-based enzyme (HLADH alone). The HLADH activities of the four mixtures were periodically assayed (see experimental)—see Table 11.
TABLE 11 HLADH activities after incubation with or without pyrazole-CMMs. % HLADH activity compared to the initial “HLADH alone” value* HLADH + HLADH + HLADH + HLADH WT S166C- S156C- time/h alone SBL pyrazole pyrazole 0 100 97 89 67 1 99 89 65 21 3 98 82 49 12 20 93 70 17 5 - Discussion:
- The initial drop in HLADH activity caused on addition of the pyrazole-CMMs reflects the ability of the CMMs to target and thus inhibit HLADH. S156C-pyrazole and, to a lesser extent, S166C-pyrazole clearly cause dramatic reductions in HLADH activity on incubation. The pyrazole-CMMs were used in less than stoichiometric amounts with respect to HLADH—4 eq. HLADH active sites: 1 eq. pyrazole-CMM-but they rapidly caused a greater than 25% diminution of HLADH activity. Indeed, in the case of S156C-pyrazole, HLADH activity is seen to drop from 67% to 5% over 20 h, representing a 13.5-fold reduction of HLADH activity over-and-above the maximum inhibitory effect of the pyrazole moiety. WT-SBL causes a mere 1.4-fold reduction of HLADH activity over the same 20 h period, despite its enhanced amidase specific activity when compared to the pyrazole-CMMs.
- Summary:
- Pyrazole-CMMs are seen to target and to catalytically destroy HLADH.
- pH 9.0 0.1 M Glycine-NaOH Buffer with 0.005% Tween 80 (pH 9.0 Assay Buffer):
- Glycine (0.1 mol) was dissolved in water (ca. 800 mL). A solution of Tween 80 (50 mL of a 0.1% v/v in MQ water) was added, and the pH was adjusted to 9.0 with ca. 5 M NaOH solution. The mixture was made up to 1 L with MQ water.
- pH 7.4 0.05 M TRIS-HCl Buffer (pH 7.4 TRIS):
- TRIS (302.9 mg, 2.5 mmol) was dissolved in MQ water (ca. 40 mL). The pH was adjusted to 7.4 with ca. 1 M HCl solution, and the volume of the mixture was made up to 50 mL with MQ water.
- HLADH Solution:
- Horse liver alcohol dehydrogenase (Sigma A-9589, Lot 58H7004, EC 1.1.1.1, 8.45 mg of 52.4% w/w protein—according to manufacturer's Biuret titration) was dissolved in pH 7.4 TRIS (0.845 mL) to give a 5.24 mg/mL solution of active protein.
- Checking HLADH Concentration:
- HLADH (50 μL) solution was added to pH 7.4 TRIS (450 μL) to give a tenfold diluted solution. Bradford (Bio-Rad) protein determination was performed on this diluted sample, and yielded a protein concentration of 0.616 mg/mL. This translates to a concentration of 6.16 mg/mL in the original HLADH stock. We assume the lower value of 5.24 mg/mL to be correct in order to ensure that protein concentration is more likely to be under-rather than overestimated.
- NAD+ Solution:
- NAD+ (332 mg) was dissolved in pH 9.0 assay buffer (10 mL) to give a 33.2 mg/mL solution.
- Cyclohexanol Solution:
- Cyclohexanol (100 mg) was dissolved in pH 9.0 assay buffer (10 mL) to give a 10 mg/mL solution.
- Subtilisin Solutions:
- WT-SBL (1.88 mg of dry powder, 73% w/w active protein) was dissolved in pH 5.8, 10 mM MES, 2 mM CaCl2 “storage buffer” (500 μL) to give a 2.74 mg/mL solution of active WT-SBL. S156C-pyrazole and S166C-pyrazole were previously titrated with PMSF: their concentrations were 2.5 mg/mL and 3.62 mg/mL respectively.
- HLADH Hydrolysis Assay:
- Four 5 mL falcon tubes were filled according to Table 12
TABLE 12 Preparation of reaction mixtures. Tube pH 9.0 assay NAD+ solutionb HLADH SBL/ no. buffera (μL) (μL) solutionc (μL) CMM d1 2140 600 60 not added 2 2120 600 60 WT-SBL 19.52 μL 3 2125 600 60 S166C- pyrazole 14.80 μL 4 2119 600 60 S156C- pyrazole 21.4 μL - The tubes were kept on ice until the HLADH activity of each tube had been assayed in order to give a “time zero” value for each tube (see below for assay protocol). The tubes were then incubated on a water bath at 35° C. Periodically, 700 μL of reaction mixture with withdrawn from each falcon tube, the aliquots were placed in individual eppendorf tubes, and the eppendorf tubes were stored on ice. The content of each eppendorf tube was then assayed for HLADH activity (see below).
- Assaying HLADH Activity:
- A portion of reaction mixture (650 μL) was injected into a cuvette containing pH 9.0 assay buffer (2.00 mL). The cuvette was incubated at 25° C. for 2 minutes, and then cyclohexanol solution (300 μL) was added. After a 10 s delay, the absorbance at 340 nm was monitored for 300 s. Tthe O.D. change per second up to 0.2 absorbance units was used to calculate an initial rate.
- Results.
- The results are summarized in Table 13.
TABLE 13 HLADH activities during HLADH hydrolysis experiment (raw data). (slope at 340 nm in units of O.D. units per second) × 1000* HLADH + HLADH + HLADH + HLADH WT S166C- S156C- incubation alone SBL pyrazole pyrazole time/h (tube 1) (tube 2) (tube 3) (tube 4) 0 5.14 4.99 4.56 3.43 1 5.07 4.56 3.36 1.05 3 5.05 4.22 2.53 0.61 20 4.76 3.58 0.88 0.26 - Stoichiometry
- Experiments were performed using 2 eq. HLADH dimer (4 eq. active sites) to 1 eq. pyrazole-CMM or WT-SBL; alkaline phosphatase from calf intestine was used as an “active-enzyme” decoy protein in all experiments. Alkaline phosphatase from calf intestine is composed of two isozymes of molecular weights 66 and 68 kD per subunit. Both isozymes are dimers, thus we assume an approximate molecular weight of 134 kD for each dimer in our calculations. The stoichiometries used are shown in Table 14.
TABLE 14 Stoichiometries used HLADH targeting assay. HLADH (ca. 79 kD Alkaline WT-SBL or Pyrazole-CMM for the dimer) phosphatase (AP) (ca. 27 kD) (ca. 134 kD for each dimer) 2 eq. dimer (4 eq. 2 eq. dimer (4 eq. 1 eq. (SBL/CMM is a active sites) active sites) monomer) 1.42 μM dimer 1.42 μM dimer 0.71 μM (SBL/CMM is a (2.84 μM active sites) (2.84 μM active monomer) sites) - Conditions.
- pH 9.0, 0.1 M glycine-NaOH with 0.005
% Tween - Four experiments were performed simultaneously: all four experiments were performed with HLADH and AP present in each of the four vials (i.e. they are in direct competition as substrates for hydrolysis). In addition, each vial contained one of: buffer (no SBL added), WT-SBL, S156C-pyrazole or S166C-pyrazole.
- Results:
- Vials that each contained a mixture of HLADH and alkaline phosphatase were incubated in the presence of WT-SBL, S166C-pyrazole or S156C-pyrazole. A control experiment was performed in the absence of any SBL-based enzyme (no SBL). The HLADH and Alkaline phosphatase activities of the four mixtures were periodically assayed in order to determine the fidelity of the CMMs toward HLADH vs. Alkaline phosphatase (see experimental)—see Table 15, Table 16, FIG. 11 and FIG. 12. (Data are also presented relative to “no SBL added” time=0 h values in the appendix to demonstrate the inhibitory effects of the pyrazole CMMs on HLADH)
TABLE 15 HLADH activities after incubation with or without pyrazole-CMMs. % HLADH activity* compared to the time = 0 h value for each experiment SBL derivative (if added) time/h no SBL WT-SBL S156C-pyrazole S166C- pyrazole 100 100 100 100 1 109 103 45 93 3 112 99 33 46 19.5 95 79 2 41 -
TABLE 16 AP activities after incubation with or without pyrazole-CMMs. % alkaline phosphatase activity* compared to the time = 0 h value for each experiment SBL derivative (if added) time/h no SBL WT-SBL S156C-pyrazole S166C- pyrazole 0 100 100 100 100 1 98 100 93 104 3 94 97 96 99 19.5 88 91 85 90 - Discussion.
- Alkaline phosphatase is clearly not very susceptible to hydrolysis by WT-SBL or Pyrazole-CMMs. HLADH activity is not significantly diminished on incubation in the absence of SBL or in the presence of WT-SBL. However, in the presence of S156C-pyrazole or S166C-pyrazole HLADH activity is seen to diminish rapidly.
- Summary.
- Pyrazole-CMMs are seen to target and to catalytically destroy HLADH in the presence of alkaline phosphatase. Alkaline phosphatase is unaffected by the hydrolytic action of WT-SBL and Pyrazole-CMMs.
- Materials
- pH 9.0 0.1 M Glycine-NaOH Buffer with 0.005
% Tween - Glycine (0.1 mol) was dissolved in water (ca. 800 mL). Magnesium chloride solution (1 mL of a 1 M solution) and zinc chloride solution (1 mL of a 0.1 M solution) were added to the glycine solution. A solution of Tween 80 (50 mL of a 0.1% v/v in MQ water) was added to the mixture, and the pH was adjusted to 9.0 with ca. 5 M NaOH solution. The mixture was made up to 1 L with MQ water.
- pH 9.0 0.1 M Glycine-NaOH Buffer with 1 mM Mg2+ and 0.1 mM Zn2+(pH 9.0 Dialysis Buffer).
- Glycine (0.1 mol) was dissolved in water (ca. 800 mL). Magnesium chloride solution (1 mL of a 1 M solution) and zinc chloride solution (1 mL of a 0.1 M solution) were added to the glycine solution, and the of the mixture pH was adjusted to 9.0 with ca. 5 M NaOH solution. The mixture was made up to 1 L with MQ water.
- pH 7.4 0.05 M TRIS-HCl Buffer (pH 7.4 TRIS)
- TRIS (302.9 mg, 2.5 mmol) was dissolved in MQ water (ca. 40 mL). The pH was adjusted to 7.4 with ca. 1 M HCl solution, and the volume of the mixture was made up to 50 mL with MQ water.
- pH 7.4 0.05 M TRIS-HCl Buffer with 1 mM Mg2+ and 0.1 mM Zn2+(pH 7.4 Dialysis Buffer)
- TRIS (6.057 g, 0.05 mol) was dissolved in MQ water (ca. 800 mL). Magnesium chloride solution (1 mL of a 1 M solution) and zinc chloride solution (1 mL of a 0.1 M solution) were added to the TRIS solution, and the of the mixture pH was adjusted to 7.4 with ca. 1 M HCl solution. The mixture was made up to 1 L with MQ water.
- pH 8.6 ca. 0.1 M TRIS-HCl Buffer with 0.05% Tween, 1 mM Mg2+ and 0.1 mM Zn2+(PH 8.6 Buffer)
- MgCl2 (0.1 mL of a 1 M solution in MQ water) and ZnCl2 (0.1 mL of a 0.1 M solution in MQ water) were added to a 100 mL volumetric flask, and the flask was made up to the mark with pH 8.6 0.1 M TRIS-HCl buffer containing 0.05% Tween (standard amidase kinetics buffer).
- HLADH Solution
- Horse liver alcohol dehydrogenase (Sigma A-9589, Lot 58H7004, EC 1.1.1.1, 3.77 mg of 52.4% w/w protein—according to manufacturer's Biuret titration) was dissolved in pH 7.4 TRIS (0.377 mL) to give a 5.24 mg/mL solution of active protein.
- NAD+ Solution
- NAD+ (39.15 mg) was dissolved in pH 9.0 assay buffer (1.179 ML) to give a 33.2 mg/mL solution.
- Cyclohexanol Solution
- Cyclohexanol (100 mg) was dissolved in pH 9.0 assay buffer (10 mL) to give a 10 mg/mL solution.
- Subtilisin Solutions.
- WT-SBL (1.88 mg of dry powder, 73% w/w active protein) was dissolved in pH 5.8, 10 nM MES, 2 mM CaCl2 “storage buffer” (500 μL) to give a 2.74 mg/mL solution of active WT-SBL. This solution was diluted four-fold with pH 5.8, 10 mM MES, 2 mM CaCl2 “storage buffer” to give a 0.685 mg/mL solution.
- S156C-pyrazole and S166C-pyrazole were previously titrated with PMSF: their concentrations were 2.5 mg/mL and 3.62 mg/mL respectively. These stock solutions were diluted four-fold with pH 5.8, 10 mM MES, 2 mM CaCl2 “storage buffer” to give 0.63mg/mL and 0.91 mg/mL solutions of S156C-pyrazole and S166C-pyrazole, respectively.
- p-Nitrophenyl Phosphate Solution (PNPP Solution).
- Two tablets, each containing 20 mg of p-nitrophenyl phosphate (Sigma N-2765), were dissolved in pH 8.6 buffer (40 mL). The solution was stored on ice.
- Dialysis of Alkaline Phosphatase.
- Two vials of Calf intestinal alkaline phosphatase (Sigma P-7923, Lots 128H1210 and 17H0204) were mixed with pH 7.4 dialysis buffer (0.5 mL). The mixture was dialysed against 2×500 mL pH 7.4 dialysis buffer (1×4 h then 1× overnight) and then 2×500 mL pH 9.0 dialysis buffer (2×2 h). The total protein concentration was then determined using the Bradford technique (Bio-Rad), and was found to be 2.36 mg/mL.
- Experimental Details
- Four 1.5 mL Eppendorf tubes were filled according to Table 22.
TABLE 17 Preparation of reaction mixtures. NAD+ HLADH AP SBL/ pH 9.0 assay solutionb solutionc solutiond CMMe - Tube no. buffera (μL) (μL) (μL) (μL) if added 1 479 150 15 56.4 Nothing added 2 459 150 15 56.4 WT- SBL 19.52 μL 3 457 150 15 56.4 S156C- pyrazole 21.4 μL 4 464 150 15 56.4 S166C- pyrazole 14.80 μL - The tubes were kept on ice until aliquots had been withdrawn from each tube to establish initial HLADH and alkaline phosphatase activities. These activities were used to give “time zero” values for each tube (see below for assay protocols). The tubes were then incubated on a water bath at 35° C. Periodically, aliquots of reaction mixture were withdrawn from each eppendorf tube in order to assay HLADH and alkaline phosphatase activities.
- Assaying HLADH Activity
- A portion of solution (65 μL) was withdrawn from an incubation vial and was then injected into a micro-cuvette containing pH 9.0 assay buffer (200 μL). The cuvette was incubated at 25° C. for 2 minutes, and then cyclohexanol solution (30 μL) was added. The absorbance at 340 nm was then monitored for 120 s, and the O.D. change per second up to 0.2 absorbance units was recorded.
- Assaying Alkaline Phosphatase Activity
- A portion (10 μL) was withdrawn from an incubation vial and was then injected into pH 8.6 buffer (490 μL). The mixture was vortexed. 10 μL was the rremoved from the mixture, and was injected into a cuvette containing 990 μL of PNPP solution incubated at 25° C. The absorbance change at 405 nm was monitored for 120 s, and the O.D. change per second up to 1.0 Absorbance unit was recorded.
- Results.
- The results are illustrated in Table 18 and Table 19
TABLE 18 HLADH activities during HLADH/alkaline phosphatase competitive hydrolysis experiments (raw data). (slope at 340 nm in units of O.D. incubation units per second) × 1000* time/h no SBL WT-SBL S156C-pyrazole S166C- pyrazole 0 5.13 5.09 2.76 4.58 1 5.57 5.25 1.25 4.25 3 5.73 5.05 0.90 2.09 19.5 4.88 4.01 0.06 1.88 -
TABLE 19 Alkaline phosphatase activities during HLADH/alkaline phosphatase competitive hydrolysis experiments (raw data). incubation (slope at 405 nm in units of O.D. units per second) × 1000* time/h no SBL WT-SBL S156C-pyrazole S166C- pyrazole 0 8.04 7.78 8.05 7.48 1 7.85 7.79 7.52 7.77 3 7.56 7.52 7.76 7.41 19.5 7.11 7.09 6.83 6.77 - The contamination of animal feed by certain lectins substantially reduces their nutritional value (Gatel (1994)Animal Feed Sci. Technl45: 317-348; Mogridge et al. (1996) J. Animal Sci. 74: 1897-1904; Pusztai et al. (1997) G. Brit. J. Nutrition 77, 933-945). In particular contamination of soy-based feeds by mannose-binding lectins prevents the effective use of crude feed without substantial purification.
- With the aim of preparing glycosylated CMMs useful for the we have prepared 11 mono- and disaccharide methanethiosulfonates (FIG. 13) bearing different carbohydrates which allow the preparation of a large number glycosylated CMMs for use, e.g. as lectin-directed proteases. A number of chemically modified enzymes having chemically conjugated carbohydrate moieties are described in PCT Application WO 00001712 entitled “Chemically modified proteins with a carbohydrate moiety.
- This example describes a highly effective lectin assay that has allowed us to start a screen of the ability of sugar-modified CMMs to degrade the lectin Concanavalin A in the manner shown schematically below (FIG. 14A, FIG. 14B, and FIG. 14C).
- S156C-sugar CMMs which contain surface exposed sugar groups were chosen initially. For each assay, biotinylated lectin was incubated with glyco-CMM and compared with samples incubated with GG36-WT. To allow comparison, equal amounts of active enzyme were used. These samples were also incubated both with and without the decoy protein disulfide scrambled-RNaseA, in order to measure the selectivity of these enzymes for the lectin over the decoy.
- Small protein fragments (<3000 Da), the products of proteolysis, were separated from larger proteins using a size-exclusion membrane. Fragments of lectin are labeled with biotin whereas non-lectin fragments are unlabelled. By monitoring both the levels of biotinylated fragments released, using a HABA/Avidin test, and total protein fragment concentration, using A280, we can qualitatively judge both the amount of lectin degradation and selectivity for lectin over decoy. The results of initial screens are shown in FIG. 15A and FIG. 15B, FIG. 15C, and FIG. 15D.
- It is clear that both GG36-WT and the two CMMs S156C-S-EtMan (FIG. 15A and FIG. 15B) and S156C-S-EtMan(Ac)4 (FIG. 15C, and FIG. 15D are able to rapidly degrade lectin concanavalin A. The higher rate of hydrolysis by GG36-WT is consistent with its higher kcat/KM value towards Suc-AAPF-pNA (kcat/KM for GG36 of 209 s−1mM−1, as compared with 112 and 85 s−1mM−1 for S156C-S-Et-Man and S156C-S-EtMan(Ac)4, respectively).
- A more detailed examination of FIG. 15A-FIG. 15D reveals that
- a) Released Biotin levels (indicating lectin degradation) are similar to each other. The presence of decoy reduces slightly both the level of GG36-WT and S156C-S-EtMan degradation.
- b) GG36-WT in the presence of decoy produces 18% more total protein after 210 min. than without. In contrast, S166C-S-EtMan in the presence of decoy produces only 7% more total protein—therefore the greater selectivity of S156C-S-EtMan reduces total protein absorption changes by 11%.
- c) Again, released Biotin levels (indicating lectin degradation) are similar to each other.
- d) Both GG36-WT and S156C-S-EtManAc produce more total protein after 210 min. in the presence of decoy than without (under these conditions, 7% more for WT and 5% more for S156C-S-EtManAc). These similar levels indicate little or no selectivity of S156C-S-EtManAc for Concanavalin A.
- This slight but exciting creation of selectivity of S156C-S-EtMan is consistent with the introduction of an unprotected mannose group—since this is the natural ligand of concanavalin A. The lower/lack of selectivity shown by fully protected S156C-S-EtMan(Ac)4 is consistent with the importance of the unprotected hydroxyl groups of mannose for correct recognition by lectins.
- Experimental
- Ten disposable eppendorf vials were filled as shown in Table 20.
TABLE 20 Lectin assay design. Lectin- Assay Concanavalin Vial Buffera/ Ab/ Decoy Proteinc/ Enzyme/ Number μL μL μL μL 1 900 100 — — 2 890 100 10 — 3 900 100 — 10 of glyco- CMM 4 900 100 — 10 of glyco- CMM 5 890 100 10 10 of glyco- CMM 6 890 100 10 10 of glyco- CMM 7 900 100 — 10 of WT d8 900 100 — 10 of WT d9 890 100 10 10 of WT d10 890 100 10 10 of WTd - These solutions were warmed to 35° C. in a thermostat-controlled water bath. After the indicated incubation time, the contents of the appropriate vials were each placed in the top of a Centricon-SR3 Concentrator (Amicon, MWCO 3000, previously cleaned by 2 mL of Milli Q water centrifuged at 3750 rpm for 90 min.) and centrifuged at 3750 rpm for 60 min. The resulting filtrates were then assayed as shown in Table 21 and Table 22.
TABLE 21 Assay of filtrates for S156C-S-EtMan (Enzyme Concentrations 2.58 mg/mL) HABA/ HABA/ HABA/ % of Max Avidin Avidin Avidin Incub. Biotin Total % of Max Total Vial Beforea/ Afterb/ Diff./ Time/ Release/ Protein/ Biotin/ Protein/ No. Abs Abs Abs min A280 c Absd Abs Abs Abs 1 1.006 0.726 0.28 60 0.003 — — — — 2 1.004 0.719 0.285 60 0.003 — — — — 3 1.012 0.665 0.347 60 0.033 0.062 0.03 45 54 4 1.009 0.597 0.412 210 0.042 0.127 0.039 93 70 5 1.01 0.662 0.348 60 0.022 0.063 0.019 46 34 6 1 0.6 0.4 210 0.046 0.115 0.043 84 77 7 1.014 0.649 0.365 60 0.028 0.08 0.025 58 45 8 0.998 0.576 0.422 210 0.049 0.137 0.046 100 82 9 1.012 0.659 0.353 60 0.035 0.068 0.032 50 57 10 1.007 0.591 0.416 210 0.059 0.131 0.056 96 100 -
TABLE 22 Assay of filtrates for S156C-S-EtMan(Ac)4 (Enzyme Concentration 2.40 mg/mL) HABA/ HABA/ HABA/ % of Max Avidin Avidin Avidin Incub. Biotin Total % of Max Total Vial Beforea/ Afterb/ Diff./ Time/ Release/ Protein/ Biotin/ Protein/ No. Abs Abs Abs min A280 c Absd Abs Abs Abs 1 0.983 0.717 0.266 60 0.002 — — — — 2 0.982 0.711 0.271 60 0.009 — — — — 3 0.98 0.633 0.347 60 0.027 0.079 0.021 35 31 4 1.002 0.559 0.443 210 0.06 0.175 0.054 78 79 5 0.991 0.628 0.363 60 0.034 0.095 0.028 42 41 6 1.004 0.548 0.456 210 0.063 0.188 0.057 84 84 7 0.998 0.606 0.392 60 0.041 0.124 0.035 55 51 8 1.003 0.511 0.492 210 0.069 0.224 0.063 100 93 9 1.001 0.651 0.35 60 0.038 0.082 0.032 37 47 10 1.013 0.54 0.473 210 0.074 0.205 0.068 92 100 - In addition to S156C-S-EtMan and S156C-S-EtMan(Ac)4 reported earlier the lectin assay was performed for other glycosylated CMMs. Furthermore the selectivity of S156C-S-EtMan at higher levels of decoy protein was investigated. The data showed that as for S-EtManAc the other sugars glucose, galactose and lactose showed little or no selectivity. By challenging S156C-S-EtMan with 5-fold higher levels of decoy protein the selectivity of this mannosylated CMM was decreased to approximately a difference of about 12% in total protein levels with and without decoy.
-
Lectin Assay Method 1. - Ten disposable eppendorf vials were filled as shown in Table 23:
TABLE 23 Lectin assay method 1Lectin-Assay Decoy Vial Buffera/ Concanavalin Ab/ Proteinc/ Enzyme/ No. μL μL μL μL 1 900 100 — — 2 890 100 10 — 3 900 100 — 10 of glyco- CMM 4 900 100 — 10 of glyco- CMM 5 890 100 10 10 of glyco- CMM 6 890 100 10 10 of glyco- CMM 7 900 100 — 10 of WT d8 900 100 — 10 of WT d9 890 100 10 10 of WT d10 890 100 10 10 of WTd - These solutions were warmed to 35° C. in a thermostat-controlled water bath. After the indicated incubation time, the contents of the appropriate vials were each placed in the top of a Centricon-SR3 Concentrator (Amicon, MWCO 3000, previously cleaned by 2 mL of Milli Q water centrifuged at 3750 rpm for 90 min.) and centrifuged at 3750 rpm for 60 min. The resulting filtrates were then assayed as shown in Table 24, Table 25, and Table 26.
TABLE 24 Assay of filtrate (S156C-S-EtβGlc (Enzyme Concentration 2.29 mg/mL)) HABA/ HABA/ HABA/ % of Max Avidin Avidin Avidin Incub. Biotin Total % of Max Total Vial Beforea/ Afterb/ Diff./ Time/ Release/ Protein/ Biotin/ Protein/ No. Abs Abs Abs min A280 c Absd Abs Abs Abs 1 0.989 0.779 0.21 60 0.003 — — — — 2 1.011 0.789 0.222 60 0.009 — — — — 3 0.992 0.637 0.355 60 0.025 0.14 0.019 53 29 4 1.024 0.545 0.479 210 0.068 0.264 0.062 100 95 5 1.011 0.63 0.381 60 0.038 0.166 0.032 63 49 6 0.995 0.566 0.429 210 0.068 0.214 0.062 81 95 7 0.999 0.604 0.395 60 0.036 0.18 0.03 68 46 8 1.003 0.554 0.449 210 0.062 0.234 0.056 89 86 9 1.037 0.648 0.389 60 0.042 0.174 0.036 66 55 10 0.996 0.568 0.428 210 0.071 0.213 0.065 81 100 -
TABLE 25 Assay of filtrate (S156C-S-EtGal (Enzyme Concentration 1.73 mg/mL)) % of HABA/ HABA/ HABA/ % of Max Avidin Avidin Avidin Incub. Biotin Total Max Total Vial Beforea/ Afterb/ Diff./ Time/ Release/ Protein/ Biotin/ Protein/ No. Abs Abs Abs min A280 c Absd Abs Abs Abs 1 0.995 0.77 0.225 60 −0.004 — — — — 2 1.002 0.768 0.234 60 −0.007 — — — — 3 1.011 0.629 0.382 60 0.02 0.152 0.026 67 37 4 0.975 0.531 0.444 210 0.055 0.214 0.061 94 87 5 1.005 0.621 0.384 60 0.028 0.154 0.034 68 49 6 0.978 0.543 0.435 210 0.063 0.205 0.069 90 99 7 1.018 0.652 0.366 60 0.01 0.136 0.016 60 23 8 1.01 0.553 0.457 210 0.048 0.227 0.054 100 77 9 1.011 0.666 0.345 60 0.014 0.115 0.02 51 29 10 0.997 0.563 0.434 210 0.064 0.204 0.07 90 100 -
TABLE 26 Assay of filtrate S156C-S-EtLac (Enzyme Concentration 2.25 mg/mL). % of HABA/ HABA/ HABA/ % of Max Avidin Avidin Avidin Incub. Biotin Total Max Total Vial Beforea/ Afterb/ Diff./ Time/ Release/ Protein/ Biotin/ Protein/ No. Abs Abs Abs min A280 c Absd Abs Abs Abs 1.006 0.77 0.236 60 −0.006 — — — — 2 0.994 0.762 0.232 60 −0.002 — — — — 3 0.993 0.684 0.309 60 0.008 0.075 0.012 35 15 4 1.023 0.584 0.439 210 0.04 0.205 0.044 95 56 5 0.994 0.676 0.318 60 0.013 0.084 0.017 39 22 6 1 0.578 0.422 210 0.068 0.188 0.072 87 91 7 1.014 0.655 0.359 60 0.012 0.125 0.016 58 20 8 1.012 0.562 0.45 210 0.047 0.216 0.051 100 65 9 1.001 0.674 0.327 60 0.014 0.093 0.018 43 23 10 1.006 0.57 0.436 210 0.075 0.202 0.079 94 100 - Control Without Lectin.
- The assay was performed as for
method 1 except 100 μL aliquots of concanavalin replaced by 100 μL of Milli Q water. Results are shown in Table 27.TABLE 27 Assay of filtrate. Control without lectin. HABA/ HABA/ HABA/ % of Max Avidin Avidin Avidin Incub. Biotin Total % of Max Total Vial Beforea/ Afterb/ Diff./ Time/ Release/ Protein/ Biotin/ Protein/ No. Abs Abs Abs min A280 c Absd Abs Abs Abs 1 1.004 0.768 0.236 60 −0.005 — — — — 2 1 0.77 0.23 60 −0.008 — — — — 3 0.998 0.768 0.23 60 −0.008 −0.003 −0.001 −1 −1 4 1 0.774 0.226 210 −0.007 −0.007 0 −3 0 5 1.023 0.78 0.243 60 0.004 0.01 0.011 5 14 6 1.02 0.783 0.237 210 0.007 0.004 0.014 2 18 7 1.018 0.774 0.244 60 −0.005 0.011 0.002 5 3 8 1.001 0.774 0.227 210 −0.002 −0.006 0.005 −3 6 9 1.006 0.769 0.237 60 0.008 0.004 0.015 2 19 10 1.004 0.771 0.233 210 0.012 −2.8E−17 0.019 0 24 -
Lectin Assay Method 2. - Ten disposable eppendorf vials were filled as shown in Table 28.
TABLE 28 Design of lectin assay 2.Lectin- Vial Assay Concanavalin Ab/ Decoy Proteinc/ Enzyme/ No. Buffera/μL μL μL μL 1 900 100 — — 2 850 100 50 — 3 900 100 — 10 of glyco- CMM 4 900 100 — 10 of glyco- CMM 5 850 100 50 10 of glyco- CMM 6 850 100 50 10 of glyco- CMM 7 900 100 — 10 of WT d8 900 100 — 10 of WT d9 850 100 50 10 of WT d10 850 100 50 10 of WTd - All further determinations were carried out as for
Method 1 and the results are shown in Table 29.TABLE 29 Assay of filtrate S156C-S-EtMan (Enzyme Concentrations 2.58 mg/mL) HABA/ HABA/ HABA/ % of Max Avidin Avidin Avidin Incub. Biotin Total % of Max Total Vial Beforea/ Afterb/ Diff./ Time/ Release/ Protein/ Biotin/ Protein/ No. Abs Abs Abs min A280 c Absd Abs Abs Abs 1 0.969 0.76 0.209 60 −0.003 — — — — 2 0.982 0.756 0.226 60 0.005 — — — — 3 0.975 0.649 0.326 60 0.018 0.108 0.017 52 21 4 0.97 0.562 0.408 210 0.048 0.19 0.047 92 57 5 0.99 0.685 0.305 60 0.03 0.087 0.029 42 35 6 0.988 0.589 0.399 210 0.068 0.181 0.067 87 82 7 0.983 0.637 0.346 60 0.028 0.128 0.027 62 33 8 0.974 0.549 0.425 210 0.053 0.207 0.052 100 63 9 0.978 0.659 0.319 60 0.037 0.101 0.036 49 44 10 0.982 0.599 0.383 210 0.083 0.165 0.082 80 100 - In order to exploit the powerful binding of biotin to avidin as a model system to clearly demonstrate the targeting strategy the biotin-
MTS reagent 1 was synthesized. - In the synthetic strategy chosen (FIG. 16, scheme 7) we chose the carboxylic acid group of biotin as the point at which to introduce methanethiosulfonate as previous studies have shown that functionalization of this part of the molecule preserves affinity for avidin (Green (1975)Adv. Protein Chem. 29: 85-133; Green (1990) Meth. Enzymol. 184: 51-67).
- Initial attempts to reduce the N-
hydroxysuccinamide ester 3 using NaBH4 (Islam et al. (1994) J. Med. Chem., 37: 293-304.), synthesized from (+)-biotin (2) in 61% yield according to literature methods (Chaturvedi et al. (1984) J. Med. Chem., 27: 1406-1410), gave only a poor 15% yield of (+)-biotinol (4). In contrast, direct reduction of (+)-biotin (2) with LiAlH4 gave 4 in a reasonable 69% yield (Flaster and Kohn (1981) Heterocycl. Chem. 18: 1425-1436). The use of ether as a solvent is crucial to the success of this reduction as THF gave only a very low yield of (+)-biotinol (4). - Biotinol (4) was elaborated, according to our established preparative procedure, to the target biotin-MTS via the corresponding primary mesylate and bromide. The use of MsCl led to only a moderate yield of mesylate as a result of competing formation of primary chloride. Consequently, biotinol (4) was treated with mesylic anhydride in pyridine/DCM, then LiBr in refluxing acetone and finally NaSSO2Me in DMF to give target biotin-MTS1 in 54% yield over 3 steps (37% overall yield from (+)-biotin (2)). Attempts to scale up this synthesis gave reduced yields.
- (+)-Biotinol (4) via Hydroxysuccinamide Ester (3).
- 1,1′-Dicarbonylimidazole (360 mg, 2.22 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of (+)-biotin (2) (540 mg, 2.2 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) under N2 and the resulting solution heated until evolution of CO2 ceased (approx 30 min.). The solution was cooled to RT and stirred for a further 2 h, during which time a white solid precipitated from solution. A solution of N-hydroxysuccinimide (260 mg, 2.26 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) was added and the mixture stirred. After a further 6 h, the reaction solvent was removed and the residue recrystallized first from propan-2-ol (mp 187-187° C.) and then DMF/propan-2-ol to give 3 (457 mg, 61%) as a white solid.; mp 197-201° C. (DMF/propan2-ol) [lit., Becker et al. (1971) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., USA, 68: 2604-2607, mp 196-200° C.; lit., Parameswaran (1990) Org. Prep. Proc. Intl. 22: 119-121,
mp 210° C.]; 1H NMR (d6-DMSO, 200 MHz) 1.43-1.70 (m, 4H), 2.52-2.90 (m, 9H), 3.07-3.14 (m, 4H, H-4), 4.17 (dd,J 6 Hz,J 4 Hz, 1H, H-3a), 4.32 (dd,J 6 Hz,J 7 Hz, 1H, H-6a), 6.39, 6.45 (s —2,1H —2, H-1, H-3). - NaBH4 (50 mg, 1.32 mmol) was added to a suspension of 3 (170 mg, 0.5 mmol) stirred in THF/HMPA (40: 1, 41 mL) under nitrogen. After 4.5 h the volume of reaction solvent was reduced and the resulting residue quenched with water. The residue was dried further under vacuum and purified by flash chromatography (MeOH: CHCl3, 1: 19) to give 4 (17 mg, 15%) as a white solid.
- 5-([3aS-(3aα,4β,6aα)]-Hexahydro-2-oxo-1H-thieno[3,4-d]imidazol-4-yl)pentyl methanethiosulfonate [(+)-Biotin MTS] (1).
- (+)-Biotin (2) (196 mg, 0.8 mmol) was dissolved in pyridine (5 mL) by careful warming at 80° C. under nitrogen. The resulting solution was added dropwise to a suspension of LiAlH4 (196 mg, 5.15 mmol) in freshly distilled dry ether (25 mL) under nitrogen. After 30 min. the resulting mixture was heated to reflux. After a further 40 min., tlc (MeOH:CHCl3, 1:9) showed the formation of a major product (Rf 0.35) from starting material (Rf 0.45). The reaction was cooled and remaining LiAlH4 quenched by the dropwise addition of water. After effervescence had ceased more water (100 mL) was added and the solvent removed. The residue was dried overnight under vacuum and then purified by flash chromatography (MeOH:CHCl3, 1:19) to give (+)-biotinol [3aS-(3aα,4β,6aα)]-Tetrahydro-4-(5-hydroxypentyl)-1H-thieno[3,4-d]imidazol-2(3H)-one (4) (128 mg, 69%) [53906-36-8] as a white solid; mp 168-172 [lit., U.S. Pat. No. 2,489,237, mp 174.5-175.5 (MeOH)]; [α]28 D=+91.2 (c 0.43, MeOH) [lit., [α]25 D=+84.7 (
c 1, MeOH)]; 1H NMR (CD3OD, 400 MHz) δ 1.42-1.48 (m, 4H), 1.52-1.63 (m, 3H), 1.72-1.75 (m, 1H), 2.71 (d, J6,6′12.6 Hz, 1H, H-6), 2.93 (dd, J6′,6a 4.9 Hz, J6,6 ′12.8 Hz, 1H, H-6′), 3.32 (qu, J 4.8 Hz, 1H, H-4), 3.56 (t, J 6.5 Hz, 2H, CH 2OH), 4.31 (dd, J3a,4 4.4 Hz, J3a,6a 7.8 Hz, 1H, H-3a), 4.51 (dd, J6′,6a 4.9 Hz, J3a,6a 7.9 Hz, 1H, H-6a). - Ms2O (78 mg, 0.45 mmol) was added to a solution of 4 (80 mg, 0.35 mmol) in pyridine/DCM (1:1, 4 mL) under nitrogen. After 14 h the solvent was removed. The residue was dissolved in CHCl3 (30 mL), washed (water (10 mL), brine (10 mL)), dried (MgSO4), filtered and the solvent removed. The residue was purified by flash chromatography (MeOH:CHCl3, 1:50) to give the mesylate [3aS-(3aα,4β,6aα)]-Tetrahydro-4-[5-(methanesulfonyl)pentyl]-1H-thieno[3,4-d]imidazol-2(3H)-one (83 mg, 77%) as a yellow oil; a scale up provides the mesylate as a pale yellow solid; mp 134-136; IR (film) 3432 (NH), 1702 (amide I), 1636 (amide II) cm−1; 1H NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.45-1.47 (m, 4H), 1.67-1.79 (m, 4H), 2.75 (d, J6,6′12.8 Hz, 1H, H-6), 2.92 (br d, J 9.4 Hz, 1H, H-6′), 3.02 (s, 3H, CH3SO2−), 3.15-3.19 (m, 1H, H-4), 4.24 (t, J 6.4 Hz, 2H, CH 2OMs), 4.32 (dd, J3a,4 4.8 Hz, J3a,6a 7.3 Hz, 1H, H-3a), 4.51 (m, 1H, H-6a); 13C NMR (CDCl3, 50 MHz) δ 25.4, 28.3, 28.5, 28.8, 37.4, 40.5, 55.5 ((CH2)4, C-4, C-6, CH3SO2−), 60.3, 62.1 (C-3a, C-6a), 70.1 (CH2OMs), 163.6 (C-2).
- LiBr (80 mg, 0.92 mmol) was added to a solution of mesylate (40mg, 0.13 numol) in acetone (2 mL) under nitrogen and the resulting solution heated under reflux. After 14 h, tlc (MeOH:CHCl3, 1:9) showed the conversion of starting material (Rf 0.3) to product (Rf 0.45). The solvent was removed and the residue partitioned between ether (30 mL) and water (10 mL). The aqueous fraction was further extracted with CHCl3 (30 mL—2) in which the bromide is more soluble. The organic fractions were combined, dried (MgSO4), filtered and the solvent removed to give the crude bromide [3aS-(3aα,4β,6aα)]-Tetrahydro-4-(5-bromopentyl)-1H-thieno[3,4-d]imidazol-2(3H)-one (28 mg, 74%) as a yellow oil, which was used directly in the next step. A scale up provides the product as a pale yellow solid; mp 157-159.
- NaSSO2Me (15 mg, 0.11 mmol) was added to a solution of crude bromide (24 mg, 0.08 mmol) in DMF (2 mL) and the resulting solution heated under nitrogen at 50° C. After 19 h, tlc (MeOH:CHCl3, 1:9) showed the formation of a major product (Rf 0.35) from starting material (Rf 0.45). The solvent was removed and the residue purified by repeated flash chromatography (MeOH:CHCl3 1:19 then 3:97) to give 1 (25 mg, 94%, 37% from (+)-biotin (2)) as an amorphous solid; a scale up provides 1 as a pale yellow solid; [α]D 26+42.1 (c, 0.62 in CHCl3); IR (film) 3215 (NH), 1699 (C═O), 1310, 1129 (S—SO2) cm−1; 1H NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ 1.45-1.47 (m, 4H), 1.62-1.70 (m, 2H), 1.72-1.80 (m, 2H), 2.75 (d, J6,6′ 13.0 Hz, 1H, H-6), 2.93 (br d, J 9.3 Hz, 1H, H-6′), 3.13-3.19 (m, 3H, H-4, —CH2S—), 3.34 (s, 3H, CH3SO2—), 4.33 (dd, J3a,4 4.2 Hz, J3a,6a 7.1 Hz, 1H, H-3a), 4.53 (dd, J6′,6a 4.9 Hz, J3a,6a 6.8 Hz, 1H, H-6a); 13C NMR (CDCl3, 100 MHz) δ 28.4, 28.5, 28.6, 29.4, 36.4, 40.6, 55.6 ((CH2)4, C-4, C-6, —CH2S—), 50.9 (CH3SO2—), 60.6, 62.4 (C-3a, C-6a), 163.5 (C-2); HRMS m/z (FAB+): Found 325.0755 (M+H+); C11H20N2O3S3 requires 325.0714.
- Preparation of the Biotin-CMMs
- Biotin-
MTS reagent 1 was used to prepare the biotinylated CMMs of N62C, L217C, S166C, and S156C mutants, by reaction at pH 9.5 following the standard protocol. In all cases the resulting enzymes are active after modification. - Amidase Kinetics of the Biotin-CMMs
- The data for amidase kinetics and ESMS are shown in Table 30.
TABLE 30 Kinetic Constants for Biotin-CMMs. (+)-Biotin- Amidase Kinetics ESMS CMM kcat KM kcat/KM Calc. Found S166C 56.3 1.4 1.00 0.05 56.1 3.3 26958 26967 S156C 75.4 2.2 0.83 0.06 91.1 7.2 26958 26968 N62C 122 1.8 1.06 0.04 115 4.4 26931 26936 L217C 60.3 0.8 0.72 0.02 83.4 3.1 26932 26936 GG36-WT 153 4 0.73 0.05 209 15 26698 26694 - All biotin-CMMs had a smaller catalytic activity than SBL-WT (kcat/KM=209 15).
- The values for the S156C-S-Biotin CMM and the L217C-S-Biotin CMM were similar and showed a decreased kcat compared to SBL-WT, whereas the change in KM is negligible.
- Modification of the S166C mutant with the biotin-MTS reagent gave, compared to SBL-WT, a four times lower kcat/KM. The S166C-S-Biotin CMM also had the lowest kcat/KM of all the biotinylated CMMs. Both kcat and KM are altered for this CMM.
- The N62C-S-Biotin CMM had a slightly decreased kcat compared to SBL-WT and has the highest KM of all the biotin-CMMs, however it was still the most active of these biotinylated CMMs.
- Esterase Kinetics of the Biotin-CMMs
- Esterase kinetics was carried out for the biotin-CMMs according to the standard protocol with suc-AAPF-SBn as substrate. The results are shown in Table 31.
TABLE 31 Esterase Kinetics for Biotin-CMMs (+)-Biotin-Esterase Kinetics CMM kcat KM kcat/KM S166C 489 41.0 0.59 0.14 830 212 S156C 825 42.7 0.68 0.10 1221 187 N62C 422 27.3 0.21 0.05 1973 497 L217C 432 52.5 0.35 0.15 1229 559 GG36-WT 1940 180 0.54 0.07 3560 540 - The kcat/KM results for esterase activity follow the same trend compared to amidase kinetics.
- The S1 66C-S-Biotin CMM shows the smallest kcat/KM, which is about four times lower than for SBL-WT.
- The biotin-CMMs have an approximately four fold lower kcat compared to SBL-WT with the S156C-S-Biotin CMM as the only exception. The kcat of the S156C-S-Biotin CMM is about two fold lower than for SBL-WT and therefore two fold higher compared to the other biotin-CMMs. However, S156C-S-Biotin CMM is not the most active of all biotinylated CMMs since it has also the highest KM value. The kcat/KM of S156C-S-Biotin CMM and L217C-S-Biotin CMM are very similar, about 3-fold lower than for SBL-WT, although kcat and KM show big differences.
- The KM values of the biotin-CMMs were slightly higher for the S166C-S-Biotin CMM and the S156C-S-Biotin CMM compared to SBL-WT. Whereas, the values for the N62C-S-Biotin CMM and the L217C-S-Biotin CMM are about two times smaller compared to SBL-WT.
- The N62C-S-Biotin CMM has the lowest KM of all the biotinylated CMMs, and is 2.6 fold lower than SBL-WT. Although it also has the lowest kcat of the biotin-CMMs, it has the highest catalytic activity, which is still 1.8 fold lower then SBL-WT.
- Targetting a Binding Protein—Targeting and Hydrolysis of Avidin with Biotin-CMMs
- It is known from the literature that biotinylated proteins will bind to avidin only when the biotin is separated from the surface of the macromolecule to which it is covalently linked by at least five methylene groups (Green (1970)Meth. Enzymol. 18A: 418-424). Furthermore, Wilchek et al. observed that proteolytic enzymes are not able to cleave avidin. Even when the proteases is biotinylated, avidin is not cleaved (Bayer et al. (1990) Biochemistry, 29: 11274-11279).
- Our goal in this project is not only to establish targeting of our new biotin-CMMs to avidin but also to demonstrate that the CMMs are capable of catalyzing avidin proteolysis. SBL-WT, which it is not able to complex avidin but may hydrolyze avidin in an unselective process, is used for comparison.
- The colorimetric method previously used to demonstrate lectin degradation with glycosylated CMMs was adapted, to assay the ability of the synthesized biotin-CMMs to target avidin. We measured the release of HABA from HABA/avidin reagent which was detected by an increase of absorbance at 500 nm. All biotinylated CMMs were examined and the amount of CMM used was corrected for equal catalytic activity compared to each other based on kcat/KM with suc-AAPF-pNA. Therefore, differences between the capability of our biotin-CMMs to target to avidin can be discussed.
- In order to investigate the ability of our biotin-CMMs not only to target avidin but also to hydrolyze, we decided to separate the assay for targeting and the assay for hydrolysis of avidin with our biotinylated CMMs.
- As already mentioned, targeting can be clearly proven by measuring HABA release from a HABA/avidin solution at 500 nm. Since we were now only interested in using this method as a targeting assay for avidin we measured the HABA release over a 5 min period. Despite the fact that only for S156C-S-Biotin the introduced biotin-side-chain is surface exposed and therefore easily accessible for binding to avidin, surprisingly all biotin-CMMs caused immediate HABA release when added to a buffered solution of HABA/avidin. Due to its surface exposure S156C-S-Biotin resulted in the highest HABA release compared to the other CMMs.
- We controlled the targeting process by comparison with solutions of SBL-WT (concentration calculated for same catalytic activity) and addition of (+)-biotin [diluted to the same concentration as expected in each one of the biotin-CMMs (by determination of PMSF-value).
- Since, for steric reasons, (+)-biotin should be better available to bind to avidin than the biotinylated side-chain of our CMMs we expected a smaller or, for the best case, the same HABA release for all biotin-CMMs compared to the biotin/WT mixture.
- S166C-, N62C- and L217C-S-Biotin confirmed our predictions, the S156C CMM however gave a drastically higher HABA release.
- We determined therefore the whole protein amount of the S156C-S-Biotin solution by lyophilization and calculated the biotin amount again (B2a). In this case the HABA release for a biotin/WT mixture is higher than for the S156C CMM, and we suggest that there might be inactive enzyme bearing the biotin group in the CMM solution which also binds avidin and causes therefore additional HABA release.
- For determination of avidin hydrolysis catalyzed by SBL-WT and the biotin-CMMs, respectively, we adopted the lectin assay method and measured A280 for hydrolysis fragments <3000 Da. The assay was carried out for S156C-S-Biotin since this CMM proved to be the best enzyme in the targeting assay. To allow comparison and demonstrate unselective hydrolysis, the SBL-WT was used as a solution diluted to the same catalytic activity as the biotin-CMM solution.
- The initial measurements with HABA/avidin and the enzyme revealed anomalies presumably caused by HABA, therefore we decided to do this assay with avidin alone. To determine the selectivity of avidin hydrolysis, a decoy protein, disulfide scrambled-RNAse A, was used, similar to the lectin assay described above. The solutions were incubated for 1 h and 4 h, respectively, and small protein fragments (<3000 Da), the products of hydrolysis, were separated using a size-exclusion membrane. Measurement of A280 furnished the total protein fragment concentration and is therefore an indicator of avidin hydrolysis.
- Both SBL-WT and S156C-S-Biotin are able to hydrolyze avidin. Since the enzyme concentrations were calculated for equal catalytic activity with the standard amidase substrate suc-AAPF-pNA the hydrolysis values can be compared directly. Therefore we are able to demonstrate not only that avidin is hydrolyzed by SBL-proteases but is also more efficiently hydrolyzed by a biotinylated protease. S156C-S-Biotin produces 45% more protein fragments after 240 min than GG36-WT. In the presence of decoy protein [0.05 mg, Decoy (1)] the amount of total protein produced increased drastically for the WT enzyme 27% after 240 min) whereas the production of total protein did not change significantly for the biotin-CMM. However a 3-fold higher level of decoy protein [0.15 mg, Decoy (2)] resulted also for S156C-S-Biotin in increasing production of total protein (38% after 240 min) which indicates a decreased selectivity for avidin. In studies run with controls for GG36-WT with different amounts of biotin added, the differences were fairly small.
- Avidin Targeting Assay (Displacement of HABA)
- 12 disposable cuvettes were filled as shown in Table 32 (before biotin and enzyme addition measurement of A500):
TABLE 32 Avidin targeting assay d-Biotin/ Cuvette Buffera/ HABA/Avidinb/ μL (conc. Enzyme/ Number μL μL [mg/mL]) μL (conc. [mg/mL]) 1 400 400 — —c 2 400 400 — —c 3 400 400 — —c 4 390 400 10 (0.060)d —c 5 400 400 — 200 of S156C- S-Biotin (0.329) 6 400 400 — 200 of S166C- S-Biotin (0.534) 7 400 400 — 200 of N62C- S-Biotin (0.260) 8 400 400 — 200 of L217C- S-Biotin (0.359) 9 400 400 — 200 of WT(0.143)e 10 390 400 10 (0.060)d 200 of WT (0.143)e 11 390 400 10 (0.097)f 200 of WT (0.143)e 12 390 400 10 (0.047)g 200 of WT (0.143)e 13 390 400 10 (0.065)h 200 of WT (0.143)e 14 390 400 10 (0.649)i 200 of WT (0.143)e - Before addition of biotin and enzyme the cuvette was equilibrated in the spectrophotometer until A500 stabilized (5-10 min). Biotin and enzyme, respectively, were added and A500 was measured over a period of 5 min. Table 33 shows the assay results:
TABLE 33 Results of assay. HABA/ % of Max HABA/Avidin HABA/Avidin Avidin HABA HABA Cuvette Beforea/ Afterb/ Diff.b/ Release/ Releaseb/ Number Abs Abs Abs Absb,c Abs 1 0.535 0.382 0.153 — — 2 0.487 0.344 0.143 — — 3 0.482 0.353 0.129 — — 4 0.563 0.304 0.259 0.117 40 5 0.545 0.121 0.424 0.282 95 6 0.547 0.267 0.280 0.138 47 7 0.545 0.347 0.198 0.056 19 8 0.545 0.331 0.214 0.072 24 9 0.493 0.349 0.144 0.002 1 10 0.513 0.272 0.242 0.100 34 11 0.522 0.218 0.304 0.162 55 12 0.513 0.289 0.224 0.082 28 13 0.501 0.255 0.246 0.104 35 14 0.522 0.084 0.438 0.296 100 - Avidin Hydrolysis Assay (Via A280 Mesaurement)—Measured for S156C-biotin Only
- Twenty disposable eppendorf vials were filled as shown in Table 34.
TABLE 34 Avidin hydrolysis assay. Decoy Vial Buffera/ Avidinb/ Proteinc/ Biotin/ Enzyme/ Number μL μL μL μL μL 1 700 100 — — —d 2 600 100 100 — —d 3 700 100 — — 200 of WT e4 700 100 — — 200 of WT e5 600 100 100 — 200 of WT e6 600 100 100 — 200 of WT e7 690 100 — 10f 200 of WT e8 690 100 — 10f 200 of WT e9 590 100 100 10f 200 of WT e10 590 100 100 10f 200 of WT e11 690 100 — 10g 200 of WT e12 690 100 — 10g 200 of WTe 13 590 100 100 10g 200 of WTe 14 590 100 100 10g 200 of WT e15 700 100 — — 200 of S156CMM 16 700 100 — — 200 of S156CMM 17 600 100 100 — 200 of S156CMM 18 600 100 100 — 200 of S156CMM 19 400 100 300 — 200 of S156CMM 20 400 100 300 — 200 of S156CMM - These solutions were incubated at 35° C. in a thermostat-controlled water bath for the indicated time. The contents of the appropriate vials were then each placed in the top of a Centricon-SR3 Concentrator (Amicon, MWCO 3000, previously cleaned by 2 mL of Milli-Q water centrifuged at 3750 rpm for 90 min) and centrifuged at 3750 rpm for 60 min. The resulting filtrates were then assayed as shown in Table 35.
TABLE 35 Assay. S156C-S-d-Biotin (0.329 mg/mL = 2.4 μM) Vial Incub. % of Max Total Number Time/min A280 a Total Protein/Abs Protein/ Abs 1 60 0.002 — — 2 60 0.014 — — 3 60 0.013 0.005 4 4 240 0.028 0.020 17 5 60 0.040 0.032 27 6 240 0.059 0.051 44 7 60 0.015 0.007 6 8 240 0.030 0.022 19 9 60 0.043 0.035 30 10 240 0.059 0.051 44 11 60 0.013 0.005 4 12 240 0.029 0.021 18 13 60 0.035 0.027 23 14 240 0.046 0.038 32 15 60 0.054 0.046 39 16 240 0.081 0.073 62 17 60 0.058 0.050 43 18 240 0.080 0.072 62 19 60 0.103 0.095 81 20 240 0.125 0.117 100 - Controls without Avidin
- Assay performed as Avidin Hydrolysis Assay except 100 μL aliquots of avidin replaced by 100 μL of Milli-Q water; the measurement for S156C-S-Biotin and a higher decoy protein amount [0.15 mg, Decoy (2)] was not repeated as control without avidin (see Table 36).
TABLE 36 Control hydrolysis assay without avidin. Vial Incub. Total Protein/ % of Number Time/min A280 a Abs Max Total Protein − Abs 1 60 −0.001 — — 2 60 0.018 — — 3 60 0.000 −0.008 −7 4 240 0.009 0.001 0.9 5 60 0.020 0.012 10 6 240 0.035 0.027 23 7 60 0.003 −0.005 −4 8 240 0.010 0.002 2 9 60 0.024 0.016 14 10 240 0.029 0.021 18 11 60 0.001 −0.007 −6 12 240 0.012 0.004 3 13 60 0.026 0.018 15 14 240 0.029 0.021 18 15 60 0.028 0.020 17 16 240 0.024 0.016 14 17 60 0.039 0.031 26 18 240 0.052 0.044 38 - Avidin Hydrolysis Assay (Via A280 Mesaurement) Using S166C-biotin, L217C-biotin and N62C-biotin
- The Avidin Hydrolysis Assay was also performed for N62C-S-Biotin and S166C-S-Biotin in addition to S156C-S-Biotin reported earlier. For comparison, we report the results for the S156C CMM again.
- S156C-S-Biotin produces 72% more protein fragments after 240 min than SBL-WT. In the presence of decoy protein [0.05 mg] the amount of total protein produced increases drastically for the WT enzyme (23% after 240 min) whereas the production of total protein does not change significantly for the biotin-CMM.
- N62C-S-Biotin provides nearly the same amount of protein fragments as SBL-WT after 240 min. However, in the presence of a decoy the N62C CMM gives only 5 % more protein release after 240 min and is therefore clearly more selective than SBL-WT (23% more protein fragments after 240 min). Those results suggests that the biotin side-chain of the N62C CMM is less available since overall protein hydrolysis is less effective by this CMM compared to S156C CMM which contains a surface exposed biotin moiety. However, since in the N62 CMM the biotin side-chain is adjacent to the catalytic center its avidin hydrolysis selectivity is nearly as effective as for S156C-S-Biotin.
- The S166C CMM gives a 7% higher protein release compared to SBL-WT but is fairly unselective in the presence of a decoy protein [18% protein fragments compared to 23% for SBL-WT after 240 min]. Although this enzyme proved to be the second best of the biotin-CMMs in the “Avidin Targeting Assay”, it is less selective than the N62C CMM with respect to the “Avidin Hydrolysis Assay”. Presumably the biotin side chain buried in the S1 pocket is available for avidin targeting but conformationally not very favorable for the effective and selective catalysis of avidin hydrolysis.
- Fourteen disposable eppendorf vials were filled as shown in Table 37.
TABLE 37 Setup for avidin hydrolysis assay. Decoy Vial Buffera/ Avidinb/ Proteinc/ Biotin/ Enzyme/ Number μL μL μL μL μL 1 700 100 — — —d 2 600 100 100 — —d 3 700 100 — — 200 of WT e4 700 100 — — 200 of WT e5 600 100 100 — 200 of WT e6 600 100 100 — 200 of WT e7 700 100 — — 200 of biotin- CMM f8 700 100 — — 200 of biotin- CMM f9 600 100 100 — 200 of biotin- CMM f10 600 100 100 — 200 of biotin- CMM f11 690 100 — 10g 200 of WT e12 690 100 — 10g 200 of WTe 13 590 100 100 10g 200 of WTe 14 590 100 100 10g 200 of WTe - These solutions were incubated at 35° C. in a thermostat-controlled water bath for the indicated time. The contents of the appropriate vials were then each placed in the top of a Centricon SR3 or Centricon YM-3 Concentrator (Amicon, MWCO 3000, previously cleaned with 2 mL of Milli-Q water centrifuged at 3750 rpm for 90 min) and centrifuged at 3750 rpm for 60 min. The resulting filtrates were then assayed and the results are shown in :Table 38, Table 39, Table 40, Table 41, and Table 42.
TABLE 38 Results for avidin hydrolysis assay for controls and WT Vial Incub. % of Number Time/min A280 a Total Protein/Abs Max Total Protein/ Abs 1 60 0.004 — — 2 60 0.013 — — 3 60 0.023 0.014 19 4 240 0.029 0.020 28 5 60 0.035 0.026 36 6 240 0.046 0.037 51 -
TABLE 39 Results of avidin hydrolysis assay for S156C-S-Biotin. Vial Incub. % of Number Time/min A280 a Total Protein/Abs Max Total Protein/ Abs 7 60 0.054 0.045 62 8 240 0.081 0.072 100 9 60 0.058 0.049 68 10 240 0.080 0.071 99 9b 60 0.103 0.094 131 10b 240 0.125 0.116 161 -
TABLE 40 Results of avidin hydrolysis assay for N62C-S-Biotin. Vial Incub. % of Number Time/min A280 a Total Protein/Abs Max Total Protein/ Abs 7 60 0.018 0.009 12 8 240 0.032 0.023 32 9 60 0.029 0.020 28 10 240 0.036 0.027 37 -
TABLE 41 Results of avidin hydrolysis assay for S166C-S-Biotin Vial Incub. Total Protein/ % of Max Total Number Time/min A280 a Abs Protein/ Abs 7 60 0.026 0.017 24 8 240 0.034 0.025 35 9 60 0.033 0.024 33 10 240 0.047 0.038 53 -
TABLE 42 Controls of avidin hydrolysis by SBL-WT with different amounts of biotin added Vial Incub. Total Protein/ % of Max Number Time/min A280 a Abs Total Protein/ Abs 11b 60 0.015 0.006 8 12b 240 0.030 0.021 29 13b 60 0.045 0.036 50 14b 240 0.051 0.042 58 11c 60 0.014 0.005 7 12c 240 0.026 0.017 24 13c 60 0.030 0.021 29 14c 240 0.039 0.030 42 11d 60 0.021 0.012 17 12d 240 0.032 0.023 32 13d 60 0.036 0.027 37 14d 240 0.047 0.038 53 11e 60 0.013 0.004 5 12e 240 0.029 0.020 28 13e 60 0.035 0.026 36 14e 240 0.046 0.037 51 - As an extension of the targeted degradation of enzymes, we have now focused on hapten directed degradation of antibodies by SBL. This example demonstrates antibody targeting using an anti-biotin antibody/biotin system.
- Preparation of biotin-MTS and Biotinylated CMMs
- In order to target anti-biotin with SBL, we have attached the biotin-MTS reagent to our mutant enzymes. The synthesis of the biotin-MTS was accomplished as outlined in Example 8. Each of the CMMs was prepared according to standard protocol, e.g., as described in Example 9. All CMMs were characterized using MALDI technique which has an method-dependent error in the magnitude of ±0.2-0.5%. The results are shown in Table 43 and Table 44.
TABLE 43 MALDI-MS for biotinylated CMMs Enzyme Calculated mass Found % error N62C-Biotin 26931 26943.7 0.04 S156C-Biotin 26958 26980.4 0.08 S166C-Biotin 26958 26977.5 0.07 L217C-Biotin 26932 26971.7 0.14 - The amidase activities of the new biotinylated CMMs were determined and show the same trend as described above in Example 9. The results are shown in Table 36.
TABLE 44 Amidase Activity for Biotinylated CMMs Amidase activity Enzyme kcat KM kcat/KM WTa 153 0.73 209 N62C-Biotin 108.86 0.96 113.40 S156C-Biotin 59.46 0.78 76.46 S166C-Biotin 46.00 0.999 45.83 L217C-Biotin 55.35 1.07 51.73 - Targeting Assay for Biotinylated CMMs to Anti-biotin
- Antibodies to biotin (anti-Biotin) are commercially available as either free antibody or as an enzyme-conjugate. We chose an anti-biotin conjugated to alkaline phosphatase as our model target antibody. Using the standard Enzyme Linked Immuno-sorbent Assay (ELISA)-technique, we could demonstrate the ability of our CMMs to target the antibody. The experiment is outlined schematically in FIG. 17.
- Our first assay series was carried out using the ELISA-technique (FIG. 17) with polystyrene 96-well plates (Harlow and Lane (1988)Antibodies: A laboratory Manual: Cold Spring Habour Laboratory, USA, p. 564-597). The CMM was immobilized on the plate surface overnight at 4° C. [typical binding of protein to a polystyrene plate is approximately 100 ng/well (300 ng/cm2). In our case, we attached less protein as we did not fully fill each well with enzyme solution]. After blocking the remaining binding sites on the plate with BSA, unbound protein (loosely antibody and BSA) was washed out twice with phosphate-buffered saline containing Tween, pH 7.2 (PBST). (Tween was used in this buffer to prevent the unbound polystyrene surface from the attachment of antibody.) Then the anti-Biotin was added to each well and incubated at 4° C. for 2 h. The plate was washed with PBST (4 times) to remove the loosely, unbound protein, and then with glycine buffer pH 10.4 (2 times) to wash away the phosphate buffer and to optimize the pH for alkaline phosphatase activity. To assay the biotin-CMM/anti-biotin binding the enzyme activity of the antibody-linked alkaline phosphatase was used. The phosphatase substrate [a solution of p-nitrophenylphosphate disodium salt (PNPP) in glycine buffer pH 10.4] was added and the reaction was carried out at 4° C. The release of p-nitrophenolate was determined visually using a 96-well plate (FIG. 17).
- From the 96-well results, we found that the amount of PNPP substrate is very important for demonstrating the differences of the targeting abilities of our biotin-CMMs to anti-biotin. Using a high amount of substrate we were unable to distinguish between different CMMs, as all gave a bright yellow colour within 30 min. However, we were still able to discern the location of the S156C-biotin on the plate since the color change was extremely rapid in this case.
- We also carried out a control reaction, using PMSF as an inhibitor for WT-and CMM-SBL (as SBL might hydrolyze anti-biotin leading to a negative result). No difference between the reactions with and without PMSF could be found. Therefore we excluded this reagent from our following experiments.
- Using the same protocol and conditions as for the 96-well plate experiments, later experiments were carried out in polystyrene cuvettes and the absorption (A405) of released p-nitrophenolate from PNPP (150 μL in 1 mL) was monitored spectrometrically (Table 45). Because of the high dilution of PNPP used, the reaction had to be monitored for a long time. It should be noted that the results of the assay using cuvettes are not always as consistent as those from 96-well plates. This was probably due to the fact that 96-well plates have been developed for protein attachment. The assay results are shown in Table 37.
TABLE 45 A405 assay (p-nitrophenolate release, low PNPP concentration) A405 S166C- L217C- time (h) WT N62C-Biotin S156C-Biotin Biotin Biotin 18 0.145 1.018 1.111 0.483 0.292 24 0.173 1.191 1.322 0.569 0.348 27 0.222 1.522 1.689 0.736 0.451 30 0.259 1.739 1.915 1.065 0.526 - All CMMs caused a higher release of p-nitrophenolate as compared to WT. S156C-biotin was found to induce the greatest p-nitrophenolate release (up to 86.5% more than WT after 30 h), showing it to be the most proficient CMM for Anti-biotin IgG targeting.
- Further experiments suggested that the concentration of PNPP can be increased (300 μL in 1 mL) to shorten the observation time. The trend of the p-nitrophenolate release is the same as in the low PNPP concentration assay. The results are shown in Table 46.
TABLE 46 A405 Assay (p-Nitrophenolate Release, high PNPP concentration) A405 S156C- S166C- L217C- time (h) WT N62C-Biotin Biotin Biotin Biotin 6 0.214 0.667 1.040 0.647 0.483 12 0.398 0.969 1.400 0.908 0.577 - All biotinylated CMMs gave an increased p-nitrophenolate release compared to WT. Therefore binding of the biotin-CMMs to anti-biotin must have been occured. The assay results (Tables 37 and 38) clearly demonstrate the ability of our biotinylated CMMs to target a biotin-antibody.
- “Hydrolysis” Assay of Anti-iotin by Biotinylated CMMs
- Next, we were interested in demonstrating the ability of our CMMs to hydrolyze the anti-biotin selectively. We adopted the approach used successfully to monitor the release of protein fragments during SBL-mediated avidin hydrolysis. It should be noted that equal concentrations of active enzymes (as determined by PMSF titration) were used in these experiments. The enzymes and anti-biotin IgG were incubated in Tris buffer (20 mM Tris HCl, 2 mM CaCl2, pH 8.6) at 35° C. for 60 and 240 min. The protein fragments were separated from the crude hydrolysate using size exclusion-membranes as reported previously. Measurement of the absorption at 280 nm afforded the concentration of the released protein fragments. The results are shown in Table 47.
TABLE 47 Anti-biotin hydrolysis assay (A280). Enzyme A280 (60 min) A280 (240 min) anti-Biotin + Tris (blank) 0.004 0.008 WT 0.086 0.087 N62C-Biotin 0.102 0.112 S156C-Biotin 0.140 0.177 S166C-Biotin 0.115 0.127 L217C-Biotin 0.069 0.125 - The results, except for one (L217C-Biotin), demonstrate clearly that our CMMs are able to hydrolyze anti-Biotin better than WT. These results also correspond to the targeting results (A405 assay for p-nitrophenolate release) which show that all biotinylated CMMs target anti-biotin and therefore give a higher p-nitrophenolate release than WT.
- To determine whether or not the hydrolysis was specifically towards anti-biotin, we adopted the biotin assay experiment again which uses RNAase as a decoy protein. The results for each CMM hydrolysis compared to WT are shown in Table 48, Table 49, Table 50, and Table 51.
TABLE 48 Assay (A280) for selective hydrolysis of anti-biotin by biotin-CMM N62C-biotin and by WTa A280 time WT + N62C- N62C- (min) WT decoy difference Biotin Biotin + decoy difference 60 0.040 0.148 0.108 0.045 0.068 0.023 240 0.040 0.148 0.108 0.052 0.075 0.023 -
TABLE 49 Assay (A280) for selective hydrolysis of anti-biotin by biotin-CMM S156C-biotin and by WTa A280 time WT + S156C- S156C- (min) WT decoy difference Biotin Biotin + decoy difference 60 0.040 0.148 0.108 0.110 0.112 0.002 240 0.040 0.148 0.108 0.134 0.148 0.014 -
TABLE 50 Assay (A280) for selective hydrolysis of anti-biotin by biotin-CMM S166C-biotin and by WTa A280 time WT + S166C- S166C- (min) WT decoy difference Biotin Biotin + decoy difference 60 0.040 0.148 0.108 0.074 0.085 0.011 240 0.040 0.148 0.108 0.087 0.090 0.003 -
TABLE 51 Assay (A280) for selective hydrolysis of anti-biotin by biotin-CMM L217C-biotin and by WTa A280 time WT + L217C- L217C- (min) WT decoy difference Biotin Biotin + decoy difference 60 0.040 0.148 0.108 0.037 0.060 0.023 240 0.040 0.148 0.108 0.053 0.065 0.012 - The experiments reveal that the differences in extend of hydrolysis between the reactions carried out in the presence and absence of decoy protein for CMMs catalyzed reactions are much smaller than for WT catalyzed reactions. Hence, as expected, our biotinylated CMMs hydrolyze anti-biotin more specifically than WT. Control experiments were carried out without anti-biotin (only SBL-CMM and RNAase) as well as with SBL-CMM and Tris buffer alone (without RNAase and anti-Biotin). The background absorption was insignificant in all cases.
- 5-([3aS-(3aα,4β,6aα)]-Hexahydro-2-oxo-1H-thieno[3,4-d]imidazol-4-yl)pentyl methanethiosulfonate [(+)-Biotin-MTS]
- The Biotin-MTS was prepared according to the procedure described in Example 8.
- Materials
- Phosphate buffered saline (PBS) solution was prepared from 8 g NaCl, 0.2 g KCl, 1.44 g Na2HPO4, 0.24 g KH2PO4 in 1 L water, adjust pH to 7.2 with 1N HCl and was stored at room temperature. 10% Sodium azide solution was prepared from 10 g NaN3 in 100 mL water and was stored at room temperature. 3% BSA in PBS solution was prepared from 3 g bovine serum albumin (fraction V) in 100 mL water, then 0.2
mL 10% NaN3 solution added and was stored at 4° C. Phosphate buffered saline with Tween (PBST) solution was prepared from 0.5 mL ofTween 80 in 1 L PBS solution. Anti-biotin solution (1:30,000) solution was prepared from 16.67 μL anti-biotin (Sigma A-6561 clone BN-34, conc. 1.15 mg/mL) in 50mL 3% BSA/PBS and was stored at 4° C. 0.1 M glycine buffer pH 10.4 solution was prepared from 7.51 g glycine, 203 mg MgCl2 H2O, 136 mg ZnCl2 in 1 L water. The pH was adjusted to pH 10.4 with 10 N NaOH. p-Nitrophenylphosphate 1 mg/mL solution was prepared from I tablet PNPP (Sigma N-2765) (20 mg) in 20 mL of 0.1 M glycine buffer and was stored at 4° C. 0.06 M PMSF solution was prepared from 47.2 mg α-toluenesulfonyl fluoride (PMSF) in 449.2 μL EtOH and was stored at 0° C. The following enzymes were used: WT (1mg/mL), N62C-Biotin (0.97 mg/mL), S156C-Biotin (0.71 mg/mL), S166C-Biotin (1.09 mg/mL) and L217C-Biotin (1.0 mg/mL). All enzymes were dissolved in MES buffer (20 mM MES, 1 mM CaCl2, pH 5.8). 0.1 M Tris Buffer pH 8.6 consisted of 1.21 mg Tris in 100 mL water. The pH was adjusted to pH 8.6 with conc. HCl. Ribonuclease A, 5 mg/mL consisted of 5 mg of ribonuclease A (with scrambled disulfide bonds, Sigma R-2638) in 1 mL water. - Targeting Assay of CMM-SBL to Anti-biotin Using Polystyrene 96-Well Plate
- 50 μL of each enzyme solution was added to each well of a polystyrene 96-well plate as shown in FIG. 18. All reactions were conducted twice to verity the reproducibility of the results.
- The plate was incubated at 4° C. overnight. The remaining enzyme solutions were removed using a pipette. Then, BSA/PBS (3%, 100 μL) was added to each well and the plate was incubated at RT for 1 h. The BSA solution was removed and the plate was dried by flicking and banging it on layers of paper towel. PMSF (10 μL) was added to
columns - 1.
Column μL 1 mg/mL PNPP. - 2.
Column μL 1 mg/mL PNPP. - 3.
Column μL 1 mg/mL PNPP+25 μL glycine buffer. - 4.
Column μL 1 mg/mL PNPP+37.5 μL glycine buffer. - 5.
Column μL 1 mg/mL PNPP+44 μL glycine buffer. - 6.
Column μL 1 mg/mL PNPP. - The assay results can be summarized as follows:
- The reactions in
columns - Targeting Assay of CMM-SBL to Anti-Biotin Using Polystyrene Cuvettes
- The immobilization of the enzymes and anti-biotin and the washing processes for the cuvettes were conducted in the manner similar to that described for the 96-well plate. Two different concentrations of PNPP were used. The experiments were carried out in duplicate and the data shown in Table 52 below are the average results:
TABLE 52 Targeting assay in polystyrene cuvettes Glycine A405 a PNPP Buffer time (h) Enzyme μL μL 6 12 18 24 27 30 WT 150 850 — — 0.145 0.173 0.222 0.259 N62C- 150 850 — — 1.108 1.191 1.522 1.739 S156C- 150 850 — — 1.111 1.322 1.689 1.915 S166C- 150 850 — — 0.483 0.569 0.736 1.065 L217C- 150 850 — — 0.292 0.348 0.451 0.526 WT 300 700 0.214 0.398 — — — N62C- 300 700 0.667 0.969 — — — S156C- 300 700 1.040 1.400 — — — S166C- 300 700 0.647 0.908 — — — L217C- 300 700 0.483 0.577 — — — - “Hydrolysis Assay” of Anti-biotin with Biotin-CMMs and WT
- Eppendorf vials were filled according to Table 43. The vials were then incubated at 35° C. in a thermostat-controlled water bath for 60 and 240 min. The contents of each vial were then placed in the top of a Centricon YM-3 filter (Amicon, MWCO 3000, pre-rinsed with 2 mL Milli-Q water centrifuged at 3750 rpm for 90 min) and centrifuged at 3750 rpm for 60 min. The filtrates were then assayed by measuring A280 (zeroed against with Milli-Q water). The results are as shown in Table 53.
TABLE 53 Hydrolysis assay of anti-niotin with niotin-CMMs and WT A280 b Anti-Biotin Tris Buffer RNAase time (min) Enzymea μL μL μL 60 240 — 50 940 — 0.004 0.008 — 50 930 10 0.005 0.007 WT — 990 — 0.046 0.050 N62C- — 990 — 0.057 0.060 S156C- — 990 — 0.028 0.029 S166C- — 990 — 0.041 0.040 L217C- — 990 — 0.072 0.072 WT — 980 10 0.025 0.036 N62C- — 980 10 0.055 0.060 S156C- — 980 10 0.045 0.054 S166C- — 980 10 0.040 0.045 L217C- — 980 10 0.051 0.059 WT 50 940 — 0.086 0.087 N62C- 50 940 — 0.102 0.112 S156C- 50 940 — 0.140 0.117 S166C- 50 940 — 0.115 0.177 L217C- 50 940 — 0.069 0.125 WT 50 930 10 0.173 0..184 N62C- 50 930 10 0.123 0.135 S156C- 50 930 10 0.155 0.188 S166C- 50 930 10 0.125 0.135 L217C- 50 930 10 0.114 0.124 - Anti-biotin Degradation
- The ability of Si156C-biotin to destroy anti-biotin IgG was examined using micro-partition experiments. Two control experiments were also performed to validate the data.
- Aliquots of an antibody-CMM (1:1, molecule:molecule) mixture were periodically withdrawn from an incubated vial (pH 8.6, 35° C.), and biotin solution was added to the aliquot. It was anticipated that only one CMM molecule would bind to each antibody molecule, as the steric bulk of the CMM would block the approach of a second CMM molecule to the other available binding site of the antibody. However, molecular biotin should be sufficiently small to allow it to bind to the second antibody binding site. As the antibody binding sites are degraded, fewer binding sites will be available resulting in more unbound biotin. Using a 3000 MWCO membrane, unbound biotin was separated from the macromolecules, and the biotin concentration was assayed using the HABA/avidin system.
- Additionally, control experiments were performed containing biotin (hapten) only. Experiments where the antibody had been pre-incubated with biotin (hapten) before addition of the CMM were, also studied. Reduction in the observed value of A500 corresponds to diminution of the antibody's binding ability (FIG. 19).
- Assay to Prove Destruction of Anti-biotin Binding Sites
- Monoclonal anti-biotin IgG (clone BN-34, Sigma, immunoglobulin concentration 1.3 mg/mL) conjugated to alkaline phosphatase was used for all studies. The TRIS buffer employed for these studies was the standard buffer employed for our amidase kinetic studies (0.1 M, pH 8.6, 0.005% Tween).
- A solution of biotin (1.94 mg/mL) in TRIS (pH 8.6) was prepared. 10 μL of this solution was added to 779.5 μL of TRIS (this solution will be referred to as B/79 throughout). An Eppendorf vial containing TRIS (700.5 μL) and anti-biotin (37.5 μL, 1.3 mg/mL immunoglobulin, alkaline phosphatase labelled) was prepared. S156C-biotin. (12.15 μL, 0.71 mg/mL) was added to the vial. The vial was vortexed, and was placed in a water bath (35° C.). Aliquots (170 μL) were periodically withdrawn from the vial, B/79 (20 μL) was added to each aliquot, and the mixture was then transferred to a pre-rinsed Centricon filter. The filters were centrifuged (2×1 h, 3750 rpm, 4° C.), and the filtrate was collected. The filtrate was assayed for biotin content using the HABA/avidin system: 70 μL of the filtrate was added to 70 μL of HABA/avidin reagent, and the A500 reading of the mixture was observed using a 130 μL cuvette. The results are tabulated below in Table 54.
TABLE 54 A500 results from anti-biotin binding site degradation assay. Incubation A500 time/h CMM then hapten 0 0.3172 1 0.31 2 0.2945 3 0.2907 - Control Experiments
- A solution of biotin (1.94 mg/mL) in TRIS (pH 8.6) was prepared. The solution was diluted twenty-fold (referred to throughout as B/20). Eppendorfyvials were filled according to Table 55, and incubated for varying times at 35° C.
TABLE 55 Volumes used for control experiments (each prepared in quadruplicate) Contents of each vial for each time point anti-biotin S156C- B/20 Experiment TRIS (μL) (μL) biotin (μL) (μL) Ab then B/20. Incubate 693 37.5 0 20 Ab then B/20, then CMM. 681 37.5 12.15 20 Incubate - After incubation, the contents of each vial were transferred to a pre-rinsed Centricon filter (MWCO 3000), and the filters were centrifuged. The filtrates were assayed spectrophotometrically using the HABA/avidin reagent: 500 μL of filtrate was added to 500 μL of HABA/avidin reagent, and the A500 value was determined using a 1 mL cuvette. The results are shown in Table 56.
TABLE 56 A500 results for control experiments Incubation time/h hapten then CMM hapten only 0 0.252 0.2687 1 0.2466 0.2659 2 0.2531 0.2704 3 0.2517 0.2702 - In various experiments the following catalytic antagonists were found to function substoichoimetrically: Pyrazole CMM-HLADH (Example 2), pyrazole CMM-HLADH in the presence of AP (Example 3), substoichiometric pyrazole CMM-HLADH (Example 4), sugar CMM-biotinylated Con A (Examples 7 and 8), biotin CMM-Avidin, and biotin CMM-anti-biotin IgG.
- It is understood that the examples and embodiments described herein are for illustrative purposes only and that various modifications or changes in light thereof will be suggested to persons skilled in the art and are to be included within the spirit and purview of this application and scope of the appended claims. All publications, patents, and patent applications cited herein are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety for all purposes.
Claims (145)
1. A catalytic antagonist of a target molecule, said antagonist comprising a targeting moiety that specifically binds to said target molecule said targeting moiety being attached to an enzyme that degrades said target molecule to reduce binding of the target molecule to its cognate ligand and to said targeting moiety thereby resulting in the release of said antagonist thereby allowing said antagonist to bind and degrade another target molecule.
2. The antagonist of claim 1 , wherein said targeting moiety is joined to said enzyme through the sulfur group on a cysteine.
3. The antagonist of claim 2 , wherein said cysteine is a cysteine that is substituted for a native amino acid other than cysteine in said enzyme.
4. The antagonist of claim 3 , wherein said cysteine is a cysteine that is substituted for a native amino acid other than cysteine in or near a subsite comprising a substrate binding site of said enzyme.
5. The antagonist of claim 4 , wherein said cysteine is a cysteine that is substituted for an amino acid forming a substrate binding site.
6. The antagonist of claim 3 , wherein said enzyme is an enzyme selected from the group consisting of a protease, an esterase, an amidase, a peptidase, a lactamase, a cellulase, an oxidase, an oxidoreductase, a reductase, a transferase, a hydrolase, an isomerase, a ligase, a lipase, a phospholipase, a phosphatase, a kinase, a sulfatase, a lysozyme, a glycosidase, a nuclease, an aldolase, a ketolase, a lyase, a cyclase, a reverse transcriptase, a hyaluronidase, an amylase, a cerebrosidase and a chitinase.
7. The antagonist of claim 6 , wherein said enzyme is a serine hydrolase.
8. The antagonist of claim 5 , wherein said enzyme is a subtilisin-type serine hydrolase and said cysteine is substituted for an amino acid in or near a subsite selected from the group consisting of an S1 subsite, an S1′ subsite, and an S2 subsite.
9. The antagonist of claim 8 , wherein said enzyme is a Bacillus lentus subtilisin.
10. The antagonist of claim 8 , wherein said cysteine is substituted for an amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in a Bacillus lentus subtilisin, where said reference residue is at or near a residue selected from the group consisting of residue 156, residue 166, residue 217, residue 222, residue 62, residue 96, residue 104, residue 107, residue 189, and residue 209.
11. The antagonist of claim 6 , wherein said enzyme is a chymotrypsin-type serine protease and said cysteine is substituted for the amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in a mature trypsin (Protein Data Bank entry 1TPP), wherein said reference residue is at or near a residue selected from the group consisting of Tyr94, Leu99, Gln175, Asp189, Ser190, Gln192, Phe41, Lys60, Tyr151, Ser214, and Lys224.
12. The antagonist of claim 7 , wherein said enzyme is an alpha/beta type serine hydrolase and said cysteine is substituted for the amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in a Candida antartica lipase (Protein Data Bank entry 1TCA), where the reference residue is at or near a residue selected from the group consisting of Trp104, Leu140, Leu144, Val154, Glu188, Ala 225, Leu278 and Ile285.
13. The antagonist of claim 7 , wherein said enzyme is an aspartyl protease.
14. The antagonist of claim 13 , wherein said enzyme is a pepsin-type protease and said cysteine is substituted for the amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in the mature human pepsin (Protein Data Bank entry 1PSN), where the reference residue is at or near a residue selected from the group consisting of Tyr9, Met12, Glu13, Gly76, Thr77, Phe111, Phe117, Ile128, Ser130, Tyr189, Ile213, Glu239, Met245, Gln287, Met289, Leu291, and Glu294.
15. The antagonist of claim 6 , wherein said enzyme is an cysteine protease.
16. The antagonist of claim 15 , wherein said enzyme is a papain and said cysteine is substituted for the amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in a mature papain (Protein Data Bank entry 1BQI), where the reference residue is at or near a residue selected from the group consisting of Asn18, Ser21, Asn64, Tyr67, Trp69, Gln112, Gln142, Asp158, Trp177, and Phe207.
17. The antagonist of claim 6 , wherein said enzyme is a metalloprotease.
18. The antagonist of claim 17 , wherein said enzyme is a metalloprotease and said cysteine is substituted for the amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in the mature human matrix metalloprotease (Protein Data Bank entry 830C), where the reference residue is at or near a residue selected from the group consisting of Leu111, Phe175, Tyr176, Ser182, Leu184, Phe189, Tyr214, Asp231, Lys234, and Ile243.
19. The antagonist of claim 1 , wherein said target is a molecule present on the surface of a cell.
20. The antagonist of claim 19 , wherein said molecule present on the surface of a cell is a molecule forming a receptor.
21. The antagonist of claim 19 , wherein said molecule present on the surface of a cell is a ligand.
22. The antagonist of claim 19 , wherein said molecule present on the surface of a cell is a component of a cell wall.
23. The antagonist of claim 19 , wherein said molecule present on the surface of a cell is a component of a cell membrane.
24. The antagonist of claim 1 , wherein said targeting moiety is selected from the group consisting of a protein, an antigen, a carbohydrate, a nucleic acid, a lipid, a coordination complex, a sugar, a vitamin, a dendrimer, and a crown ether.
25. The antagonist of claim 24 , wherein said targeting moiety is a cognate ligand for a receptor or an enzyme.
26. The antagonist of claim 24 , wherein said targeting moiety is an inhibitor for a receptor or an enzyme.
27. The antagonist of claim 1 , wherein said enzyme is a protease and said targeting moiety is a ligand selected from the group consisting of a carbohydrate, a vitamin or vitamin analog, an enzyme inhibitor, a peptide, a pharmaceutical that is a small organic molecule, and biotin.
28. The antagonist of claim 1 , wherein said enzyme is a protease and said targeting moiety is a receptor.
29. The antagonist of claim 27 , wherein said enzyme is a subtilisin.
30. The antagonist of claim 29 , wherein said targeting moiety is an enzyme inhibitor that is a pyrazole.
31. The antagonist of claim 29 , wherein said targeting moiety is a biotin.
32. The antagonist of claim 29 , wherein said targeting moiety is a ligand that binds a lectin.
33. The antagonist of claim 32 , wherein said lectin is concanavalin A.
34. The antagonist of claim 33 , wherein targeting moiety is a carbohydrate.
35. The antagonist of claim 34 , wherein said targeting moiety is -thioethyl D-mannopyranoside.
36. The antagonist of claim 33 , wherein said targeting moiety specifically binds to a soil and said enzyme degrades a component of said soil.
37. A method of degrading a target molecule, said method comprising contacting said target molecule with a catalytic antagonist comprising a targeting moiety that specifically binds to said target molecule said targeting moiety being attached to an enzyme that degrades said target molecule resulting in the release of said antagonist thereby allowing said antagonist to bind and degrade another target molecule.
38. The method of claim 37 , wherein said targeting moiety is joined to said enzyme through the sulfur group on a cysteine.
39. The method of claim 38 , wherein said cysteine is a cysteine that is substituted for a native amino acid other than cysteine in said enzyme.
40. The method of claim 39 , wherein said cysteine is a cysteine that is substituted for a native amino acid other than cysteine in or near a subsite comprising a substrate binding site of said enzyme.
41. The method of claim 39 , wherein said enzyme is an enzyme selected from the group consisting of a protease, an esterase, an amidase, a peptidase, a lactamase, a cellulase, an oxidase, an oxidoreductase, a reductase, a transferase, a hydrolase, an isomerase, a ligase, a lipase, a phospholipase, a phosphatase, a kinase, a sulfatase, a lysozyme, a glycosidase, a glycosyltransferase, a nuclease, an aldolase, a ketolase, a lyase, a cyclase, a reverse transcriptase, a hyaluronidase, an amylase, a cerebrosidase and a chitinase.
42. The method of claim 41 , wherein said enzyme is a serine hydrolase.
43. The method of claim 42 , wherein said enzyme is a subtilisin.
44. The antagonist of claim 39 , wherein said cysteine is a cysteine that is substituted for an amino acid forming a substrate binding site.
45. The method of claim 44 , wherein said enzyme is a subtilisin-type serine hydrolase and said cysteine is substituted for an amino acid in or near a subsite selected from the group consisting of an S1 subsite, an S1′ subsite, and an S2 subsite.
46. The method of claim 45 , wherein said enzyme is a Bacillus lentus subtilisin.
47. The method of claim 45 , wherein said cysteine is substituted for an amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in a Bacillus lentus subtilisin, where said reference residue is at or near a residue selected from the group consisting of residue 156, residue 166, residue 217, residue 222, residue 62, residue 96, residue 104, residue 107, residue 189, and residue 209.
48. The method of claim 41 , wherein said enzyme is a chymotrypsin-type serine protease and said cysteine is substituted for an amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in a mature trypsin (Protein Data Bank entry 1TPP), wherein said reference residue is at or near a residue selected from the group consisting of Tyr94, Leu99, Gln175, Asp189, Ser190, Gln192, Phe41, Lys60, Tyr151, Ser214, and Lys224.
49. The method of claim 41 , wherein said enzyme is an alpha/beta type serine hydrolase and said cysteine is substituted for an amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in a Candida antartica lipase (Protein Data Bank entry 1TCA), where the reference residue is at or near a residue selected from the group consisting of Trp104, Leu140, Leu144, Val154, Glu188, Ala225, Leu278 and Ile285.
50. The method of claim 41 , wherein said enzyme is an aspartyl protease.
51. The method of claim 50 , wherein said enzyme is a pepsin-type protease and said cysteine is substituted for the amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in the mature human pepsin (Protein Data Bank entry 1PSN), where the reference residue is at or near a residue selected from the group consisting of Tyr9, Met12, Glu13, Gly76, Thr77, Phe111, Phe117, Ile128, Ser130, Tyr189, Ile213, Glu239, Met245, Gln287, Met289, Leu291, and Glu294.
52. The method of claim 41 , wherein said enzyme is an cysteine protease.
53. The method of claim 52 , wherein said enzyme is a papain and said cysteine is substituted for the amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in a mature papain (Protein Data Bank entry Asn18, Ser21, Asn64, Tyr67, Trp69, Gln112, Gln142, Asp158, Trp177, and Phe207.
54. The method of claim 41 , wherein said enzyme is a metalloprotease.
55. The method of claim 54 , wherein said enzyme is a metalloprotease and said cysteine is substituted for the amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in the mature human matrix metalloprotease (Protein Data Bank entry 830C), where the reference residue is at or near a residue selected from the group consisting of Leu111, Phe175, Tyr176, Ser182, Leu184, Phe189, Tyr214, Asp231, Lys234, and Ile243.
56. The method of claim 37 , wherein said target is a molecule present on the surface of a cell.
57. The method of claim 56 , wherein said molecule present on the surface of a cell is a molecule forming a receptor.
58. The method of claim 56 , wherein said molecule present on the surface of a cell is a ligand.
59. The method of claim 56 , wherein said-molecule present on the surface of a cell is component of a cell wall.
60. The method of claim 56 , wherein said molecule present on the surface of a cell is component of a cell membrane.
61. The method of claim 37 , wherein said targeting moiety is selected from the group consisting of a protein, an antigen, a carbohydrate, a nucleic acid, a lipid, a coordination complex, a sugar, a vitamin, a dendrimer, and a crown ether.
62. The method of claim 61 , wherein said targeting moiety is a cognate ligand for a receptor or an enzyme.
63. The method of claim 61 , wherein said targeting moiety is an inhibitor for a receptor or an enzyme.
64. The method of claim 37 , wherein said enzyme is a protease and said targeting moiety is a ligand selected from the group consisting of a carbohydrate, a vitamin or vitamin analog, an enzyme inhibitor, a peptide, a pharmaceutical that is a small organic molecule, and biotin.
65. The antagonist of claim 37 , wherein said enzyme is a protease and said targeting moiety is a receptor.
66. The method of claim 64 , wherein said enzyme is a subtilisin.
67. The method of claim 66 , wherein said targeting moiety is an enzyme inhibitor that is a pyrazole.
68. The method of claim 66 , wherein said targeting moiety is an biotin.
69. The method of claim 66 , wherein said targeting moiety is a ligand that binds a lectin.
70. The method of claim 69 , wherein said lectin is concanavalin A.
71. The method of claim 70 , wherein targeting moiety is a carbohydrate.
72. The method of claim 70 , wherein said targeting moiety is -thioethyl D-mannopyranoside.
73. The method of claim 66 , wherein said targeting moiety specifically binds to a soil and said enzyme degrades a component of said soil.
74. An enzyme having altered substrate specificity said enzyme comprising a targeting moiety attached to a subsite comprising the substrate binding site of said enzyme.
75. The enzyme of claim 74 , wherein said targeting moiety is coupled to said enzyme through to a sulfur of a cysteine in said subsite of said enzyme.
76. The enzyme of claim 75 , wherein said cysteine is substituted for a native amino acid that is not cysteine in said subsite of said enzyme.
77. The enzyme of claim 75 , wherein said enzyme is an enzyme selected from the group consisting of a protease, an esterase, an amidase, a peptidase, a lactamase, a cellulase, an oxidase, an oxidoreductase, a reductase, a transferase, a hydrolase, an isomerase, a ligase, a lipase, a phospholipase, a phosphatase, a kinase, a sulfatase, a lysozyme, a glycosidase, a glycosyltransferase, a nuclease, an aldolase, a ketolase, a lyase, a cyclase, a reverse transcriptase, a hyaluronidase, an amylase, a cerebrosidase and a chitinase.
78. The enzyme of claim 77 , wherein said enzyme is a serine hydrolase.
79. The enzyme of claim 78 , wherein said enzyme is a subtilisin.
80. The enzyme of claim 76 , wherein said cysteine is a cysteine that is substituted for an amino acid forming a substrate binding site.
81. The enzyme of claim 80 , wherein said enzyme is a subtilisin-type serine hydrolase and said cysteine is substituted for an amino acid in or near a subsite selected from the group consisting of an S1 subsite, an S1′ subsite, and an S2 subsite.
82. The enzyme of claim 81 , wherein said enzyme is a Bacillus lentus subtilisin.
83. The enzyme of claim 81 , wherein said cysteine is substituted for an amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in a Bacillus lentus subtilisin, where said reference residue is at or near a residue selected from the group consisting of residue 156, residue 166, residue 217, residue 222, residue 62, residue 96, residue 104, residue 107, residue 189, and residue 209.
84. The enzyme of claim 77 , wherein said enzyme is a chymotrypsin-type serine protease and said cysteine is substituted for an amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in a mature trypsin (Protein Data Bank entry 1TPP), wherein said reference residue is at or near a residue selected from the group consisting of Tyr94, Leu99, Gln175, Asp189, Ser190, Gln192, Phe41, Lys60, Tyr151, Ser214, and Lys224.
85. The enzyme of claim 77 , wherein said enzyme is an alpha/beta type serine hydrolase and said cysteine is substituted for an amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in a Candida antartica lipase (Protein Data Bank entry 1TCA), where the reference residue is at or near a residue selected from the group consisting of Trp104, Leu140, Leu144, Val154, Glu188, Ala225, Leu278 and Ile285.
86. The enzyme of claim 77 , wherein said enzyme is an aspartyl protease.
87. The enzyme of claim 86 , wherein said enzyme is a pepsin-type protease and said cysteine is substituted for the amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in the mature human pepsin (Protein Data Bank entry 1PSN), where the reference residue is at or near a residue selected from the group consisting of Tyr9, Met12, Glu13, Gly76, Thr77, Phe111, Phe117, Ile128, Ser130, Tyr189, Ile213, Glu239, Met245, Gln287, Met289, Leu291, and Glu294.
88. The enzyme of claim 77 , wherein said enzyme is an cysteine protease.
89. The enzyme of claim 88 , wherein said enzyme is a papain and said cysteine is substituted for the amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in a mature papain (Protein Data Bank entry Asn18, Ser21, Asn64, Tyr67, Trp69, Gln112, Gln142, Asp158, Trp177, and Phe207.
90. The enzyme of claim 77 , wherein said enzyme is a metalloprotease.
91. The enzyme of claim 90 , wherein said enzyme is a metalloprotease and said cysteine is substituted for the amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in the mature human matrix metalloprotease (Protein Data Bank entry 830C), where the reference residue is at or near a residue selected; from the group consisting of Leu111, Phe175, Tyr176, Ser182, Leu184, Phe189, Tyr214, Asp231, Lys234, and Ile243.
92. The enzyme of claim 37 , wherein said target is a molecule present on the surface of a cell.
93. The enzyme of claim 75 , wherein said targeting moiety is selected from the group consisting of a protein, an antigen, a carbohydrate, a nucleic acid, a lipid, a coordination complex, a sugar, a vitamin, a dendrimer, and a crown ether.
94. The enzyme of claim 75 , wherein said targeting moiety is a cognate ligand for a receptor or an enzyme.
95. The enzyme of claim 75 , wherein said targeting moiety is an inhibitor for a receptor or an enzyme.
96. The enzyme of claim 75 , wherein said targeting moiety is selected from the group consisting of a growth factor, a cytokine, and a receptor ligand.
97. The enzyme of claim 75 , wherein said enzyme is a protease and said targeting moiety is a ligand selected from the group consisting of a carbohydrate, a vitamin or vitamin analog, an enzyme inhibitor, a peptide, a pharmaceutical that is a small organic molecule, and biotin.
98. The enzyme of claim 75 , wherein said enzyme is a protease and said targeting moiety is a receptor.
99. The enzyme of claim 97 , wherein said enzyme is a subtilisin.
100. The enzyme of claim 99 , wherein said targeting moiety is an enzyme inhibitor that is a pyrazole.
101. The enzyme of claim 99 , wherein said targeting moiety is an biotin.
102. The enzyme of claim 99 , wherein said targeting moiety is a ligand that binds a lectin.
103. The enzyme of claim 102 , wherein said lectin is concanavalin A.
104. The enzyme of claim 103 , wherein targeting moiety is a carbohydrate.
105. The enzyme of claim 103 , wherein said targeting moiety is -thioethyl D-mannopyranoside.
106. The enzyme of claim 99 , wherein said targeting moiety specifically binds to a soil and said enzyme degrades a component of said soil.
107. A method of directing the activity of an enzyme to a specific target, said method comprising
providing an enzyme having altered substrate specificity said enzyme comprising a targeting moiety attached to a subsite within the substrate binding region of said enzyme; and
contacting said target with said enzyme, whereby said enzyme specifically binds to said target thereby localizing the activity of said enzyme at said target.
108. The method of claim 107 , wherein said targeting moiety is coupled to said enzyme through to a sulfur of a cysteine in said subsite of said enzyme.
109. The method of claim 108 , wherein said cysteine is substituted for a native amino acid that is not cysteine in said subsite of said enzyme.
110. The method of claim 108 , wherein said method further comprises substituting an amino acid in said subsite with a cysteine and chemically coupling said targeting moiety to said cysteine.
111. The method of claim 107 ,-wherein said enzyme is an enzyme selected from the group consisting of a protease, an esterase, an amidase, a peptidase, a lactamase, a cellulase, an oxidase, an oxidoreductase, a reductase, a transferase, a hydrolase, an isomerase, a ligase, a lipase, a phospholipase, a phosphatase, a kinase, a sulfatase, a lysozyme, a glycosidase, a glycosyltransferase, a nuclease, an aldolase, a ketolase, a lyase, a cyclase, a reverse transcriptase, a hyaluronidase, an amylase, a cerebrosidase and a chitinase.
112. The method of claim 111 , wherein said enzyme is a serine hydrolase.
113. The method of claim 112 , wherein said enzyme is a subtilisin.
114. The method of claim 109 , wherein said cysteine is a cysteine that is substituted for an amino acid forming a substrate binding site.
115. The method of claim 114 , wherein said enzyme is a subtilisin-type serine hydrolase and said cysteine is substituted for an amino acid in or near a subsite selected from the group consisting of an S1 subsite, an S1′ subsite, and an S2 subsite.
116. The method of claim 112 , wherein said enzyme is a Bacillus lentus subtilisin.
117. The method of claim 112 , wherein said cysteine is substituted for an amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in a Bacillus lentus subtilisin, where said reference residue is at or near a residue selected from the group consisting of residue 156, residue 166, residue 217, residue 222, residue 62, residue 96, residue 104, residue 107, residue 189, and residue 209.
118. The method of claim 111 , wherein said enzyme is a chymotrypsin-type serine protease and said cysteine is substituted for the amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in a mature trypsin (Protein Data Bank entry 1TPP), wherein said reference residue is at or near a residue selected from the group consisting of Tyr94, Leu99, Gln175, Asp189, Ser190, Gln192, Phe41, Lys60, Tyr151, Ser214, and Lys224.
119. The method of claim 111 , wherein said enzyme is an alpha/beta type serine hydrolase and said cysteine is substituted for the amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in a Candida antartica lipase (Protein Data Bank entry 1TCA), where the reference residue is at or near a residue selected from the group consisting of Trp104, Leu140, Leu144, Val154, Glu188, Ala 225, Leu278 and Ile285.
120. The method of claim 111 , wherein said enzyme is an aspartyl protease.
121. The method of claim 120 , wherein said enzyme is a pepsin-type protease and said cysteine is substituted for the amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in the mature human pepsin (Protein Data Bank entry 1PSN), where the reference residue is at or near a residue selected from the group consisting of Tyr9, Met12, Glu13, Gly76, Thr77, Phe111, Phe117, Ile128, Ser130, Tyr189, Ile213, Glu239, Met245, Gln287, Met289, Leu291, and Glu294.
122. The method of claim 111 , wherein said enzyme is an cysteine protease.
123. The method of claim 122 , wherein said enzyme is a papain and said cysteine is substituted for the amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in a mature papain (Protein Data Bank entry 1 BQI), where the reference residue is at or near a residue selected from the group consisting of Asn18, Ser21, Asn64, Tyr67, Trp69, Gln112, Gln142, Asp158, Trp177, and Phe207.
124. The method of claim 111 , wherein said enzyme is a metalloprotease.
125. The method of claim 124 , wherein said enzyme is a metalloprotease and said cysteine is substituted for the amino acid corresponding to a reference residue in the mature human matrix metalloprotease (Protein Data Bank entry 830C), where the reference residue is at or near a residue selected from the group consisting of Leu111, Phe175, Tyr176, Ser182, Leu184, Phe189, Tyr214, Asp231, Lys234, and Ile243.
126. The method of claim 75 , wherein said targeting moiety is selected from the group consisting of a protein, an antigen, a carbohydrate, a nucleic acid, a lipid, a coordination complex, a metal, a sugar, a vitamin, a dendrimer, and a crown ether.
127. The method of claim 107 , wherein said targeting moiety is a cognate ligand for a receptor or an enzyme.
128. The method of claim 107 , wherein said targeting moiety is an inhibitor for a receptor or an enzyme.
129. The method of claim 107 , wherein said targeting moiety is selected from the group consisting of a growth factor, and a cytokine.
130. The method of claim 107 , wherein said enzyme is a protease and said targeting moiety is a ligand selected from the group consisting of a carbohydrate, a vitamin or vitamin analog, an enzyme inhibitor, a peptide, a pharmaceutical that is a small organic molecule, and biotin.
131. The antagonist of claim 107 , wherein said enzyme is a protease and said targeting moiety is a receptor.
132. The method of claim 130 , wherein said enzyme is a subtilisin.
133. The method of claim 132 , wherein said targeting moiety is an enzyme inhibitor that is a pyrazole.
134. The method of claim 132 , wherein said targeting moiety is an biotin.
135. The method of claim 132 , wherein said targeting moiety is a ligand that binds a lectin.
136. The method of claim 135 , wherein said lectin is concanavalin A.
137. The method of claim 136 , wherein targeting moiety is a carbohydrate.
138. The method of claim 136 , wherein said targeting moiety is -thioethyl D-mannopyranoside.
139. The method of claim 132 , wherein said targeting moiety specifically binds to a soil and said enzyme degrades a component of said soil.
140. A method of enhancing the activity of a drug that acts as an inhibitor of a receptor or an enzyme, said method comprising:
coupling a serine hydrolase to said drug such that when said drug binds said receptor or enzyme, the serine hydrolase degrades the receptor or enzyme.
141. The method of claim 140 , wherein said method increases the dosage therapeutic window of said drug.
142. The method of claim 140 , wherein said serine hydrolase is a subtilisin.
143. A method of inhibiting an enzyme or a receptor, said method comprising contacting the enzyme or receptor with a chimeric molecule comprising a ligand that binds said enzyme or receptor attached to an enzyme that degrades the cognate ligand of said enzyme or receptor.
144. The method of claim 143 , wherein said chimeric molecule comprises a protease attached to an inhibitor of said enzyme or receptor.
145. The method of claim 144 , wherein said protease is selected from the group consisting of a serine protease, a cysteine protease, an aspartyl protease, a pepsin-type protease, and a metalloprotease.
Priority Applications (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US10/791,628 US20040170618A1 (en) | 1999-04-28 | 2004-03-01 | Specifically targeted catalytic antagonists and uses thereof |
US12/953,378 US8431121B2 (en) | 1999-04-28 | 2010-11-23 | Specifically targeted catalytic antagonists and uses thereof |
Applications Claiming Priority (3)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US13136299P | 1999-04-28 | 1999-04-28 | |
US55646600A | 2000-04-21 | 2000-04-21 | |
US10/791,628 US20040170618A1 (en) | 1999-04-28 | 2004-03-01 | Specifically targeted catalytic antagonists and uses thereof |
Related Parent Applications (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US55646600A Continuation | 1999-04-28 | 2000-04-21 | |
US09/566,466 Continuation US6707470B1 (en) | 1999-05-21 | 2000-05-08 | Apparatus for and method of gathering information, which can automatically obtain HTML file of URL even if user does not specify URL |
Related Child Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US12/953,378 Continuation US8431121B2 (en) | 1999-04-28 | 2010-11-23 | Specifically targeted catalytic antagonists and uses thereof |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20040170618A1 true US20040170618A1 (en) | 2004-09-02 |
Family
ID=26829404
Family Applications (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US10/791,628 Abandoned US20040170618A1 (en) | 1999-04-28 | 2004-03-01 | Specifically targeted catalytic antagonists and uses thereof |
US12/953,378 Expired - Fee Related US8431121B2 (en) | 1999-04-28 | 2010-11-23 | Specifically targeted catalytic antagonists and uses thereof |
Family Applications After (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US12/953,378 Expired - Fee Related US8431121B2 (en) | 1999-04-28 | 2010-11-23 | Specifically targeted catalytic antagonists and uses thereof |
Country Status (8)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (2) | US20040170618A1 (en) |
EP (1) | EP1185302B1 (en) |
JP (1) | JP5180417B2 (en) |
KR (1) | KR20020057797A (en) |
AU (1) | AU781451B2 (en) |
CA (1) | CA2368213C (en) |
MX (1) | MXPA01010896A (en) |
WO (1) | WO2000064485A2 (en) |
Cited By (6)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20030003114A1 (en) * | 2001-03-22 | 2003-01-02 | Pan Xing Qing | Enzyme-based anti-cancer compositions and methods |
US20080139467A1 (en) * | 2004-03-03 | 2008-06-12 | John Colyer | Method and Products For the Selective Degradation of Proteins |
US20080255345A1 (en) * | 2006-11-21 | 2008-10-16 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | IRNA Agents Targeting CCR5 Expressing Cells And Uses Thereof |
US20090316154A1 (en) * | 2008-06-18 | 2009-12-24 | David Wagner | Tachyonized Material Test Method |
US20190004299A1 (en) * | 2016-07-13 | 2019-01-03 | Oxford University Innovation Limited | Interferometric scattering microscopy |
US12111456B2 (en) | 2019-10-10 | 2024-10-08 | Refeyn Ltd | Methods and apparatus for optimised interferometric scattering microscopy |
Families Citing this family (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
EP1644390B1 (en) * | 2003-06-24 | 2011-04-20 | Isis Innovation Limited | Reagents and methods for the formation of disulfide bonds and the glycosylation of proteins |
EP2968215B1 (en) | 2013-03-14 | 2021-05-05 | The Regents of the University of California | Thiosaccharide mucolytic agents |
NL2028505B1 (en) * | 2021-06-21 | 2022-12-29 | Pharmacytics B V | Sugar thiol compounds and methods of producing the same |
Citations (8)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US5208158A (en) * | 1990-04-19 | 1993-05-04 | Novo Nordisk A/S | Oxidation stable detergent enzymes |
US5244791A (en) * | 1984-05-29 | 1993-09-14 | Genecor International, Inc. | Methods of ester hydrolysis |
US5316941A (en) * | 1989-01-06 | 1994-05-31 | Genencor, Inc. | Non-human carbonyl hydrolase mutants, DNA sequences and vectors encoding same and hosts transformed with said vectors |
US5316935A (en) * | 1992-04-06 | 1994-05-31 | California Institute Of Technology | Subtilisin variants suitable for hydrolysis and synthesis in organic media |
US5403737A (en) * | 1990-08-09 | 1995-04-04 | Genentech, Inc. | Serine protease variants having peptide ligase activity |
US5436150A (en) * | 1992-04-03 | 1995-07-25 | The Johns Hopkins University | Functional domains in flavobacterium okeanokoities (foki) restriction endonuclease |
US5629173A (en) * | 1990-08-09 | 1997-05-13 | Genentech, Inc. | Methods of use of serine protease variants having peptide ligase activity |
US5955340A (en) * | 1984-05-29 | 1999-09-21 | Genencor International, Inc. | Modified subtilisins having amino acid alterations |
Family Cites Families (13)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN1056187C (en) | 1988-02-11 | 2000-09-06 | 金克克国际有限公司 | Proteolytic enzymes and their use in detergents |
GB9300686D0 (en) | 1993-01-15 | 1993-03-03 | Imp Cancer Res Tech | Compounds for targeting |
US5837516A (en) | 1995-03-03 | 1998-11-17 | Genentech, Inc. | Subtilisin variants capable of cleaving substrates containing basic residues |
US6946280B1 (en) | 1996-03-29 | 2005-09-20 | Genencor International, Inc. | Enzyme multimer and process of producing same |
WO1998023732A2 (en) | 1996-11-26 | 1998-06-04 | Genencor International, Inc. | Chemically modified enzymes |
US6159447A (en) * | 1997-10-16 | 2000-12-12 | Pharmacal Biotechnologies, Llc | Compositions for controlling bacterial colonization |
MA25044A1 (en) * | 1997-10-23 | 2000-10-01 | Procter & Gamble | WASHING COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING MULTISUBSTITUTED PROTEASE VARIANTS. |
JP4475371B2 (en) * | 1998-01-23 | 2010-06-09 | ジェネンコア インターナショナル インコーポレーテッド | Chemically modified mutant enzymes and methods for production and screening thereof |
US6395532B1 (en) * | 1998-01-23 | 2002-05-28 | Genencor International, Inc. | Modified enzymes and their use for peptide synthesis |
ATE407941T1 (en) * | 1998-07-02 | 2008-09-15 | Univ Toronto | PROTEINS CHEMICALLY MODIFIED WITH A CARBOHYDRATE GROUP |
AU772427B2 (en) * | 1998-11-10 | 2004-04-29 | Genencor International, Inc. | Chemically modified mutant serine hydrolases show improved catalytic activity and chiral selectivity |
DE69941223D1 (en) * | 1998-12-21 | 2009-09-17 | Billig Fritz | CHEMICALLY MODIFIED ENZYMES WITH MULTIPLE CHARGED VARIATIONS |
US9814280B2 (en) | 2015-08-12 | 2017-11-14 | Ariat International, Inc. | Heel dampening systems and footwear including the same |
-
2000
- 2000-04-21 JP JP2000613475A patent/JP5180417B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 2000-04-21 CA CA2368213A patent/CA2368213C/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 2000-04-21 EP EP00928344.1A patent/EP1185302B1/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 2000-04-21 WO PCT/US2000/010988 patent/WO2000064485A2/en active IP Right Grant
- 2000-04-21 KR KR1020017013737A patent/KR20020057797A/en not_active Application Discontinuation
- 2000-04-21 MX MXPA01010896A patent/MXPA01010896A/en active IP Right Grant
- 2000-04-21 AU AU46595/00A patent/AU781451B2/en not_active Ceased
-
2004
- 2004-03-01 US US10/791,628 patent/US20040170618A1/en not_active Abandoned
-
2010
- 2010-11-23 US US12/953,378 patent/US8431121B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
Patent Citations (8)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US5244791A (en) * | 1984-05-29 | 1993-09-14 | Genecor International, Inc. | Methods of ester hydrolysis |
US5955340A (en) * | 1984-05-29 | 1999-09-21 | Genencor International, Inc. | Modified subtilisins having amino acid alterations |
US5316941A (en) * | 1989-01-06 | 1994-05-31 | Genencor, Inc. | Non-human carbonyl hydrolase mutants, DNA sequences and vectors encoding same and hosts transformed with said vectors |
US5208158A (en) * | 1990-04-19 | 1993-05-04 | Novo Nordisk A/S | Oxidation stable detergent enzymes |
US5403737A (en) * | 1990-08-09 | 1995-04-04 | Genentech, Inc. | Serine protease variants having peptide ligase activity |
US5629173A (en) * | 1990-08-09 | 1997-05-13 | Genentech, Inc. | Methods of use of serine protease variants having peptide ligase activity |
US5436150A (en) * | 1992-04-03 | 1995-07-25 | The Johns Hopkins University | Functional domains in flavobacterium okeanokoities (foki) restriction endonuclease |
US5316935A (en) * | 1992-04-06 | 1994-05-31 | California Institute Of Technology | Subtilisin variants suitable for hydrolysis and synthesis in organic media |
Cited By (11)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20030003114A1 (en) * | 2001-03-22 | 2003-01-02 | Pan Xing Qing | Enzyme-based anti-cancer compositions and methods |
US20080139467A1 (en) * | 2004-03-03 | 2008-06-12 | John Colyer | Method and Products For the Selective Degradation of Proteins |
US20080255345A1 (en) * | 2006-11-21 | 2008-10-16 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | IRNA Agents Targeting CCR5 Expressing Cells And Uses Thereof |
US8034921B2 (en) * | 2006-11-21 | 2011-10-11 | Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | IRNA agents targeting CCR5 expressing cells and uses thereof |
US20090316154A1 (en) * | 2008-06-18 | 2009-12-24 | David Wagner | Tachyonized Material Test Method |
US7760357B2 (en) * | 2008-06-18 | 2010-07-20 | David Wagner | Tachyonized material test method |
US20190004299A1 (en) * | 2016-07-13 | 2019-01-03 | Oxford University Innovation Limited | Interferometric scattering microscopy |
US10775597B2 (en) * | 2016-07-13 | 2020-09-15 | Oxford University Innovation Limited | Interferometric scattering microscopy |
US20200386975A1 (en) * | 2016-07-13 | 2020-12-10 | Oxford University Innovation Limited | Interferometric scattering microscopy |
US20230359009A1 (en) * | 2016-07-13 | 2023-11-09 | Oxford University Innovation Limited | Interferometric scattering microscopy |
US12111456B2 (en) | 2019-10-10 | 2024-10-08 | Refeyn Ltd | Methods and apparatus for optimised interferometric scattering microscopy |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
US8431121B2 (en) | 2013-04-30 |
WO2000064485A3 (en) | 2001-12-27 |
JP2002542303A (en) | 2002-12-10 |
WO2000064485A2 (en) | 2000-11-02 |
AU4659500A (en) | 2000-11-10 |
CA2368213C (en) | 2013-08-06 |
AU781451B2 (en) | 2005-05-26 |
EP1185302A2 (en) | 2002-03-13 |
US20110262419A1 (en) | 2011-10-27 |
WO2000064485A8 (en) | 2001-02-08 |
KR20020057797A (en) | 2002-07-12 |
WO2000064485A9 (en) | 2001-07-19 |
CA2368213A1 (en) | 2000-11-02 |
EP1185302B1 (en) | 2013-07-24 |
MXPA01010896A (en) | 2003-06-24 |
JP5180417B2 (en) | 2013-04-10 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US8431121B2 (en) | Specifically targeted catalytic antagonists and uses thereof | |
US9655953B2 (en) | Targeted protein replacement for the treatment of lysosomal storage disorders | |
CA2450073C (en) | Compositions and methods for modulating blood-brain barrier transport | |
Schneider et al. | Recent progress in transglutaminase-mediated assembly of antibody-drug conjugates | |
US6008336A (en) | Compacted nucleic acids and their delivery to cells | |
US7560431B2 (en) | Methods of increasing delivery of active agents to brain comprising administering receptor associated protein (RAP) fragments conjugated to active agents | |
US8809504B2 (en) | Inhibitor which is deactivatable by a reagent produced by a target cell | |
EP2178559B1 (en) | Recombinant vibrio cholerae exotoxins | |
Harford et al. | The hepatic receptor for asialoglycoproteins | |
US20050249738A1 (en) | Immunotoxins directed against malignant cells | |
KR100321012B1 (en) | Fusion proteins for prodrug activation | |
EP0806964B1 (en) | Chemical compounds | |
CN105637088A (en) | COAGULATION FACTOR VII polypeptides | |
US20040072755A1 (en) | TF antagonist | |
WO1999006072A1 (en) | Cyclized prodrugs | |
WO2004007557A2 (en) | Tf antagonist | |
Houba et al. | Improved Characteristics of a Human β-Glucuronidase− Antibody Conjugate after Deglycosylation for Use in Antibody-Directed Enzyme Prodrug Therapy | |
CA2481334A1 (en) | Tissue-specific endothelial membrane proteins | |
Asai et al. | An interaction between S• tag and S• protein derived from human ribonuclease 1 allows site-specific conjugation of an enzyme to an antibody for targeted drug delivery | |
EP1372734A1 (en) | Lectin-directed prodrug delivery system | |
Gooden et al. | Design, Synthesis, and Cellular Delivery of Antibody-Antisense Oligonucleotide Conjugates for Cancer Therapy | |
Gupta et al. | Endogenous lectins as drug targets | |
Tsuji et al. | Lysosomal enzyme replacement using α2-macroglobulin as a transport vehicle | |
TW201627499A (en) | Highly potent modified acid alpha-glucosidase and method of making and using it |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation |
Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION |